5^1
PDF Creation by:
Hari Parshad Das (HPD)
on 28 May 2014.
MEHAR CHANB LACHHMAN DAS
Sanskrit and Prakrit Series
VOLUME THREE
Published by
MEHAR CHAND LACHHMAN DAS
Sanskrit Book Depot
Said Mitha Bazar, Lahore.
(INDIA).
RKTANTRAM
A pratiSakhya of the samaveda
CRITICALLY EDITED
vrnn
An Introduction, Appendices, exhaustive notes,
a Commentary called Rktantravivrti and
Samavedasarvanukramanl.
By
Vldyabhaskara, Vedantaratna, Vyafcaranatirtha,
SURYA KANTA SHASTRI, M.A., M.O.L
Professor, D. A. V. College
LAHORE.
PDF Creation by:
Hari Parshad Das (HPD)
on 28 May 2014.
Printed by
Khazanchi Ram Jain,
t the Manohar Electric Press,
Said Mitha Bazar, Lahore.
PREFACE
I
When I originally conceived the idea of this work, my in-
tention merely was to offer the Rktantra, along with the com-
mentary in the Devanagarl characters, to the Indian students;
and at first, I thought that the same might be adequately
given within the compass of a very small volume and in
a little time. But when, after completing my History of
Hindi Literature in 1930, I took up the work seriously, I found
it otherwise. The work has been till now utterly ignored and
neglected by Sanskrit grammarians, and the way in which
Dr. Burnell treated it, left little attraction to a serious study
of the same ; the only apparent charm which it claimed was,
that this was the only available work of Jsakatayana, one of
the most ancient Indian grammarians, and this charm was
rudely shattered by the erudite editor himself. But a patient
and sifting enquiry into the matter led me, ultimately, to think
otherwise; and the rich store of facts, which this little treatise
yielded to me, supplied me with material, rich enough to build
a fine bridge of hypothesis, standing over which we could get
a clear glimpse of the glorious region of the rising harvest of
•Indian grammar, a region till now left quite unlit by my
learned predecessors. Standing over this bridge, we are
enabled to see the mighty figures of Audavraji, Gargya and
Sakatayana, casting their stately shadows forward on the rich
canvass of Yaska and Panini. Nay, more than that. For
ii
the first time in the history of Indian Grammar, we have been
vigorously urged to read in the works of Yaska and Panini
the essence of what Gargya and £akatayana had taught
centuries before, centuries that were till now supposed quite
beyond the range of history. And thus it was that in attemp-
ting to settle one question I raised many more. Wider and
wider prospects opened out before me, and thus, step by step,
I was lured on into the far-spreading field of Indian Grammar,
that had been but little explored by my worthy predecessors.
The bridge of Rktantra has led us upto Audavraji, whom the
Vamsabrahmana mentions among the most illustrious ancients
of Samavedic traditions; and here we stand up sharp on the
edge of a yawning chasm, across which we are quite unable to
find any way. I know that hypothesis are very often only
. temporary bridges to connect isolated facts; and no wonder,
if my light bridge should, sooner or later, be superseded by a
more solid structure, but my work will still claim its utility
and its interest as a repertory of facts.
II
Truth has been my only guiding star, and in the love of
truth I have not hesitated to express my views about the
origin of the Saman, which, I am afraid, may not be palatable
to my Indian friends and co-religionists. It is, indeed, a
melancholy and, in some respects, a thankless task to strike at
the foundations of old religious beliefs, beliefs in which, as in
a strong tower, the hopes and aspirations of countless devotees,
. through long ages, have sought refuge from the stress and storm
of life. Yet, sooner or later, it is inevitable, as Frazer has put it,
that the battery of comparative reseasch should breach these
venerable walls, mantled over with the ivy and mosses and wild
flowers of a thousand tender and sacred associations. At pre-
sent the science is only dragging the guns into position; they
have hardly yet begun to speak. The task of building up into
fairer and more enduring forms the old structures of beliefs,
iii
so rudely shattered, is reserved for other hands, more beautiful
than mine, perhaps for future and happier ages. We cannot
foresee, and we have no right even to guess the new forms,
which our religious beliefs and dogmas will assume in future.
Yet this uncertainty must not induce the scientist, from any
consideration of expediency or reverential regard for anti-
quity, to spare the ancient moulds of belief, however beauti-
ful and pious, from the fire of sifting criticism. We must
follow truth alone, irrespective of what comes of it or where
it leads. I have also discussed, in a new light, of course, the
age-long question of the priority of Purvarcika over the
Uttararcika. The problem has, for a long time, exercised the
minds of two of the most brilliant Orientalists of the day i.e.
Oldenberg and Caland. Here I have accepted, though only
partially, the verdict of H. Oldenberg on my own indepen-
dent ground and have, in parts, rejected both, and that too,
on my own account.
These and many other things have been touched and
discussed in the Introduction, and many more, particularly
those, connected with the Pratisakhya literature proper, will
be found in the notes.
Ill
A word now about the manuscript material. The
manuscript material, on which is founded this edition of
iRktantra, is as follows : —
A. This MS. belongs to the Central Library of Baroda.
No. 12912 (a) p. 24 of the Catalogue of MSS. in the Central
Library, Barauda, Vol. I. Leaves 4 ; granthas 70; Samvat 1682;
size 9. 1/2x4. 1/2 ; material light-coloured paper ; number of
leaves in the full MS. 19 ; number of lines per page 10 ;
character Devanagari.
Contents. It gives the text of the Rktantra and Sama-
tantra. It is distinctly and correctly written.
IV
B. Its number is 12917 ; leaves 19; granthas 500;
Catalogue of the MSS. in the Central Library, Baroda p. 24.
Its size is 9X4. 1/2; material paper; number of lines per
page 10 ; characters Devanagarl. It is a copy of the text to-
gether with the commentary, each separate rule being follow-
ed by its own comment. It is distinct and virtually correct.
The appearance of the paper and orthography point' out that
the MS. is, in no case, later than the 15th A. D. It may be
earlier. The MS. has been of great help to me.
C. This MS. belongs to the Adyar Library. Its No. is
33 E 12 gra 8 ; A Catalogue of the Sanskrit MSS. in the
Adyar Library, Part I, p. 48. It is written in grantha charac-
ters ; the total number of lines in the MS. is 200. It was
transcribed into the Devanagarl script for me by Mr. E.
Krishna Variar. It gives the text alone and is fairly correct.
As regards the text of the Rktantra all the MSS. virtual-
ly agree. As for the first Prapathaka and the commentary, the
MS. B. seems decidedly better than the one used by Burnell.
With regard to the punctuation and euphonic combina-
tions in the commentary, I have taken liberties for the sake of
inserting references to the examples. Burnell and B. are in no
slight degree discordant with each other, inconsistent with
themselves and at places quite careless of the requirements
of the sense. In fact, they offer no sure standard to follow.
For the occurrence of viramas, as printed, I am alone res-
ponsible. But at places— and these are many — where Bur.
and B. are agreed in matters of punctuation and reading, I
have followed them in the text, but have proposed my
emendations in the notes, which alone can make the text
sensible; and in that alone lies the real test of the ability of
the editor.
In the same method are treated minor orthographical
peculiarities, such as writing a sibilant instead of visarjanlya
before an initial sibilant and so on. I have not, however,
V
thought it advisable to interfere with the practice of writing
anusvara, instead of a nasal before initial dentalB, because
the practice is a peculiar feature of the Samavedic literature.
Cp. note on 178. Similarly in citing examples on sutras
269-271, I have closely followed the manuscript authority, and
have given only one letter, where the sutras require doubling;
thereby showing that the phenomenon of doubling, which once
formed so prominent a feature of the Vedic euphony, fell into
abeyance at some time, and to this time belong, invariably all
our Samavedic MSS. Cp. note on 271. and Macdonell, Vedic
Gr. p. 21.
In making references to the SV., I have used only two
numbers, the first designates the Arcika and the second de-
notes the consecutive number of the stanzas, as was done by
Burnell, and was lately adopted by M. Bloomfield in his
Concordance. The divisions adopted by Benfey, — and those
are the real and logical divisions of the SV. — would have
covered too much space; and this would have spoiled the
beauty of the printing. For the same reason I have dispensed
with the use of Indian viramas in favour of the English full
stop after brackets, when they occur in between two examples.
A MS. of Rktantra-vivrti (No. 26 G. 34 gra 23 Catalogue
No. of p. 48) was secured from the Adyar Library, which was
transcribed for me into the Devanagari script by Mr. Variar,
and the same has been printed here for the first time. Burnell
also had a copy of it, which he later on made over to the
British Museum. It would have taken long time to get the
same from London, and moreover, I knew from its specimen,
printed by Burnell in the Introduction of his Arseya brahmana,
that it would offer me little help in constructing the correct
text. I therefore forewent the idea of delaying the work on
that account.
A codex containing numerous works on Samveda, some
of them being of intrinsic worth, was secured from the same
VI
library. And I got from it Laghu-rktantra-sangraha (33 D
12 gra 20 Catalogue p. 48) Samaveda-sapta-laksana (33 D 12
gra 20 Catalogue p. 54) and Ssmavedasarvanukramanl by
Talavrntanivasin (33 D 12 gra 20 Catalogue p. 54) transcribed
into Devanagari for my personal use. The first two works
have a direct bearing on the Rktantra, and will therefore be
printed with copious comparative notes and references in a
separate volume. Important extracts have been given from
the third, which seems, to all intents and purposes, a
modern- work.
In my notes on Rktantra I have instituted a careful and
exhaustive comparison with other PratiSakhyas and Panini,
have discussed in detail the peculiarities of the Samavcdic
grammar, and have made for that, the fullest use of all "the
eminent Indian and Western writers on the subject. In making
references to the examples, catalogued in Laghurktantra and
Samasaptalaksana, I have followed the most tedious method
i.e. SV. = RV. = RT. RPr. =VPr. = TPr. -and CA. for each
example, and have thus succeeded in presenting, more or less,
a complete picture of the whole Vedic euphony. In fact, my
aim has been throughout to follow meticulously the com-
parative method of studies, in which I have been very liberal,
perhaps more liberal than may seem worthwhile even to
German scholars. But I preferred to err in this direction
than the contrary.
And it will not be any exaggeration if I say that, having
this booklet of Pratigakhya literature in his hand, the student
of Vedic euphony will not feel the necessity of studying any
other PratisSkhya or a kindred work.
IV
I shall have, occasion to speak in the Introduction of
the extreme brevity and curtness of the text and the com-
mentary. Thus, though- only imperfectly aided by the
commentator, I have yet enjoyed one compensating advantage
vii
■over those, who have hitherto undertaken the publication of
works of this class, in that I have been able to avail myself of
the results of their labours. Had it not been for their efficient
help, more particularly that of Whitney, Benfcy, Burnell,
Wackernagel and Macdonell, much in the present treatise, of
which the explanation has now been satisfactorily made out,
might have remained obscure; and 1 desire to make a general
acknowledgment of my indebtedness to them and a host of
other brilliant orientalists of Europe and America, whose
authority I have cited very often, and with a very great
regard, indeed. Much as I owe to these big luminaries in their
individual capacity, I owe infinitely more to the collective
Western Scholarship, my debt to which it is simply impossible
for me to acknowledge here adequately. My interest in this
kind of comparative Vedic study was first excited by the
works of Pischel, Geldner, Oldenberg, Caland, Macdonell and
Keith, who opened up a mental vista, undreamed of by me
before. But it is a long step from a lively interest in a subject
to a systematic study of it, and that I took this step is entirely
due to my beloved acarya, Principal A. C. Woolner, M. A.,
CLE. The debt which I owe to the vast stores of his know-
ledge, the abundance and fertility of his ideas, the unfailing
sureness and clearness of his judgment and above all, his
unwearied kindness, can never be over-estimated. Never did
I feel happier in my life, and I mean it to be taken literally,
than while sitting at his feet and listening to his brilliant
exposition of the Veda and the comparative Indo-European
Philology. Woolner ! what a glorious word ! It stands, to
me, for an immense volume pf hard work, a mass of original
research, touched by the spark of genius, and expressed with the
fire of the true teacher. Nay more. It stands for two things
that are infinitely better than charm and popularity, fairer than
even wisdom: uprightness and honour. And if I, inspite of
getting the privilege of working under such a ripe scholar, have
been able, hitherto, only to touch, as I am quite aware, only the
viii
fringe of a great subject, to finger only a few of the countless
threads, that compose the mighty web of Oriental Studies, it
is not because of the teacher's negligence, but merely because
neither my time nor my knowledge, little as it is, has hitherto
allowed me to do more. I am also indebted, in my .literary
pursuit, to Dr. Lakshman Sarup M. A., D. Phil., Professor of
Sanskrit Literature, whose name conjures up many pleasant
hours spent in his company, many memories both blissful as
well as sad, and many benefits. I am obliged, for readily
procuring MSS., to my colleague and friend Pt. Bhaga-
vaddatta B. A., Superintendent, Research Department, D.A.V.
College, Pandit Hans Raj, -Librarian, Lai Chand Library
Lahore and Lala Labhu Ram, Librarian, Punjab University
Library. I must also record my thanks to Messrs. Mehar
Chand Lachhman Das, Lahore, who at my request started, in
these days of terrible depression, the Series of Oriental Publi-
cations and thus, have laid the oriental learning under a deep
debt of gratitude.
But the one person whose name I cannot pass over
in silence, and to whom my debt with regard to this volume
is particularly heavy, is my wife grimatl Sukhada Devi;
( for to her has fallen the task — necessarily laborious and
exacting— of preparing indices to the RT. Nothing has, in-
deed, encouraged me more in this arduous and fascinating
pursuit of research, than the loving and meticulous care, with
which she, my comrade of many hard years, has always helped
me in my' literary pursuits.
D. A. V. College, Lahore
Sravanl, the day of Raksabandhana. SORYA KANT A
5. 8. 1933.
CONTENTS.
I
List of Abbreviations
II
Corrigenda
III
Introduction 1-101
1(a) Rktantra belongs to
theSV. 3-11
(6) Rktantra is a Pratiijakhva
of (to SV. 1
(e) RT does not belong to
the Jajminlya&kha 2
(d) RT belongs to the Kan
thtunasakha 3
(c) Fifty two treatises of the
Kanthnmisakha 4
(/) Ihe precise scope of a
Pralijakhpa 5-S
(0 The two conflicting views
reconciled 1
(h) The origin of the gakhas 8
(*) The two conflicting views
reconciled 9-11
II WhatiaSamaveda'll 18
(a) The distinction between
the Ro and the human 12
(&) Ihe origin of the Saman 13
(c) Shamanism l-l
(e?) Shamanism as the basis
of the SV Iff
(«) SV dadaism compared
with N American songs IG
{/) Shamanism as the basis o£
the SV. 17-18
HI TheSV. i.e the Ar-
cika. 18-22
(0) Iho Arcika 19
(1) The tfttarftrcika 20
(c) Uha and Uhyaganas 21
IV Chronology of the
SV, 22-33
(a) Was the Purvfircika or was
the UttarSrcika older ! 23
(b) Tbe view o£01deaberg and
Caland 24
(c) The view criticised. 25
(d) Purvarcika is older than
the TJttarfircifca 26
(e) TJttarfircifca is older than
the Brahmana 27
(/) Difficulties explained 28
(g) The liter Ganas are 'panra
?eya* 29
(h) Uha and Uhya ore older
than the PpS 30
{%) The three estageaoUheSV 31-33
V Who was the author
of the RT ? 33-46
(a) The four noteworthy points 34
(i) The technical terms of the
RT and ST 35-36
(c) Audavraji, tho author of
ST, RT and PpS 37
(d) Affinity between RT,
ST and PpS 38
(e) The hypothesis. 39
(/) The three stages of the RT. 40-41
(<jr) RT., as a whole, is prior to
Panini and Katyayana. 42
(h) The three stages of the PpS. 43
(i) Pratisakhyas have suffered
extensive modifications. 44
(j) The three stages of Nirukta. 45
VI Do we find any trace
of Sakatayana' s views
in the RT. ? 46
References to Sakatayana's
treatise on Phonetics. 47-48
VII How is it that Panini
stands indebted to
r
- Sakatayana ? 49-66
(a) Panini has closely follow-
ed the implications of the
SVPp. 50-51
(6) SYPp., Yaska and Panini
all the three agree. 52
(c) Differences noted. 53-54
(d) Panini rejects SVPp, and
Yaska. 55
(e) Panini rejects Yaska and
follows SVPp. 56
(/) Panini accepts Yaska only
partly. 57
(g) Yaska tacitly follows the
SVp P. 58-59
(h) SVPp., Yaska and Panini
all the three agree. 60
(i) Burn ell refuted. " 61
(j) Contrast 'between "the
SVPp. and RVPp. 6 2
{h) Is the SVPp, in toto, the
creation of Gargya 1 63
(?) Anomalies in the SVPp,
noted, 64
(m) Do we find any trace of
Sakatayana in the SVPp. 1 65
VIII The Age of the RT. 65-68
IX Analysis of the RT. 68-71
X Remarks. . 71-96
(a) Peculiarities of the RT. 7 1-72
(6) RT. is less comprehensive
, than the RPr. 73
(c) Abhinihita sandhi in the
SV. 74-77
( d ) RPr. is entirely free from
all oversights. 78
(e) Lengthening in the RV. =
RPr. 79-96
XI The Commentary. 96-99
Reculiarities of the Com-
mentary. 96-98
XII Who was the author
of the Commentary? 98-99
XIII Can we improve the
text of the SV. with
the help of the Pra-
tisakhya ? 99-101
(a) Benfey at variance with
&aurisunu. 100
(6) Need of a fresh edition of
the SV. 101
IV
The Text.
V
Appendices.
(1) Index to the Sutras.
1-61
1-15
1-4
(2) Word index to the Sutrjw. 4-8 (8) index to tho Gams rofer-
(3) References to there of the
SV. in the commentary. 8-13
(4) f References to tho verses
4)1 the RV. in the com-
rlaentary,
(5) llteferences to other works,
(6) ilidex to the melodies re-
ferred to in the commen-
tary.
(7) Iqldex to the proper names
i^i tho Sutras, ^
U
15
red to in tho SQtras. 15
VI
Notes. 1-69
VII
llktantravivrtL 1-13
VIII
Sdmavedasa rvHn ukra-
manu 1-8
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
AB. Aitareyabrahmana. Ed. by Haug, Bombay [1863;
Satyavrata Samagramin, Calcutta 1895. - 1
Altind. Gr. Altindische Grammatik. By J. WackeAiagel.
(Compare with it Bartholomae, ZDMG. L. 6714-735)
Gottingen, 1896. N /
Anc. Skt. Lit. A History of Ancient Sanskrit Litlrature.
By M. Mtiller. London, 1860. |
APr. Atharva PratiSakhya. Ed. by Vidyarthl. Lahore, Jl923.
Arbr. or Arseyabr. Arseyabrahmana. Ed. by A. C. Bi/rnell.
Manglore, 1876. \ t
Bergai Tansc B t e vT " ' Henly ' Man ^' >™ «L, .e
banscnt Vedique. Paris, 1891 > J
BKSG T enS chS e der K6nige Sachs Ges " 4 wi,
BLWG LscMchrr Z , UrLiteratUre WiSS6nSChaft ^/Getotes
^eschichte Indiens. Bonn, 1926.
*rU. Brhadaranyakopanisat. Poena, 1902 ,
Bur. Burnell's Rktantra. Manglore, 1879.
Caturadhyayika. Ed hv w txti_.
Ne W Have y n( N ew d orSi D - ^ ^
Z. U - Chandogyopanisat. Poona, 1890
om P- Gr - Comparative Grammar R„ n
Critical Studies. Critical W I PP ' L ° nd ° n ' 1885 '
«ons of Ldi an r m Ph ° netic 0bserva -
Verma. LnS n i 9 S ammarianS - *
Dbr. Daivatabrahmana or DevaHHW- u u
Jivanand. Calcutta, Ed '
ii
Dr. or Drah. DrShyayanasrautastitra. Ed. by J. N. Reuter.
(Incomplete) London, 1904.
Ele. of South Ind. Pal. Elements of South Indian Paleogra-
phy. By A. C. Burnell. London, 1878.
Einl. Einleitung zum SSmaveda. Benfey. Leipzig, 1848.
Epigr. Ind. Epigraphica Indica.
Gesch. der Ind. Lit. Geschichte der Indischen Literature.
By M. Winternitz. Leipzig, 1909.
GGA. Gottingische Geleherte Anzeigen.
GGKP. GobhillyagriiyakarmaprakaSika- Benares. 1905.
Grundriss d Indoarischen Phil. Grundriss der Indoarischen
Philologie und Altertumskunde, Ed. by George Bilhler;
1896 ff; F. Kielhorn (since 1899) and now by H.
Luders and J. Wackernagel. Strassburg.
Hist, of Skt. Lit. A History of Sanskrit Literature. By A. A.
Macdonell. London, 1917.
Ind. Ant. Indian Antiquary, Bombay, 1872 ff.
Indiens Lit. und Cult. Indiens Literatur und Cultur in his-
torischer Entwicklung. By von Schroeder. Leipzig,
1913.
Ind. Phil. Indian Philosophy. By S. Radha Krishan.
London, 1923.
Ind. Stud. Indische Studien. Ed. by A. Weber. Leipzig,
1850 ff.
Int. to RPr. Introduction to the RkPratisakhya. By Man-
gala Deva. Oxford, 1922.
JAOS. Journal of American Oriental Soceity. New Haven
(New York) 1850 ff.
JB. or Jaimbr. Das Jaiminlyabrahmana in Auswahl. By
W. Caland. Amsterdom, 1919.
Jainp. Beitrage zur Grammatik des Jaina Prakrit. By Muller.
1876.
JGOS. Journal of German Oriental Soceity.
JNMV. Jaiminiyanyayamalavistara. Ed. by Theodor Gold-
Ill
stacker. London, 1878 ; M. M. ^ivadatta. Poona,
1892.
JRAS. Journal of Royal Asiatic Society. London, 1834 ff.
JS. Jaiminlya Samhita. Ed. by W. Caland. (Indische
Forschungen, ed. by A. Hillebrandt) Breslau, 1907.
Kathakopa. Kathakopanisat. Calcutta edition.
KS. Kathakasamhita. Ed. by von Schroeder. Leipzig, 1900.
KGS. Kathakagrhyasutra. Ed. by W. Caland. Lahore, 1925.
KZ. Kuhn's Zeitschrift
Lanman C. R. A Statistical account of Noun-inflection in
the Veda. (JAOS. 1840) 325-601
Laty. Latyayanasrautasutra. Ed. by Ananda Chandra.
Calcutta, 1872.
L& Lomasi 6iksa in &ksasangraha.
or 33. Laghusabdendusekhara. Benaras, 1911.
Mbh. Vyakaranamahabhasya. Ed. by F. Kiehhorn. Bombay,
1892 ; M. M. £ivadatta. Bombay, 1917.
Modern Eng. Gr. A Modern English Grammar. By Otto
Jesperson. Heidelberg, 1922.
MS. Maitrayani Samhita. Ed. by von Schroeder. Leipzig,
1888.
N. Nanabhai on Puspasutra.
Narg. or Naradi Siksain Siksasangraha and Burnell's RT.
Nir. Nirukta. Ed. by R. Roth. Gottingen, 1852 ; L, Sarup.
Lahore, 1927 ; The Nirukta, its place in Old Indian
Literature, its etymologies. By Mannes Skold. Lund,
1926.
Out. of Eng. Phon. An Outline of English Phonetics. By
Daniel Jones. Cambridge, 1932.
P. Panini ; Panini's Grammatik. By Otto Bohtlink. 1887.
PhiLderUpa. Paul Deussen. English Translation. Edin-
burgh, 1908.
Pp. Padapatha.
PW. Petersburger (Sanskrit) Worterbuch. By Otto Boht-
iingk and R. Roth. 1852-1875
iv
PSiksa. Paniniya&ksa with a gloss. Ed. by Becana Rama.
Benares, 1887.
PpS. PuspasQtra. Ed. by R. Simon. MUnchen, 1908.
PVB. Pancavimsabrahmana with Sayana. Ed. by Anand
Chandra. Calcutta, 1870-74; Translation by W.
Caland. Calcutta, 1932.
Paris Parasarl &ksa in !§iksasangraha.
Rel. and Phil, of the Veda and Upa. Religion and Philosophy
of the Veda and Upanisads. By A. B- Keith (HOS.
31-32) 1925.
Rel. of the Veda. Religion of the Veda. By M. Bloomfield.
New York, 1908.
RPr. RkPrati£"akhya. Ed. by M. D. Shastri. Allahabad, 1931.
RT. Rktantra.
RV. Rgveda. Ed. by M. Mollcr. London, 1873.
RVPp. Rgvedapadapatha. Ed. by M. Muller, 1873.
§A. isabdanuSasana of the Jaina Sakatayana. Ed. by Gustav
Oppert. Madrass 1893 ; Bombay, 1907.
!§B. isatapathabrahmana. Ed. by A. Weber. Leipzig, 1924.
3abdak. §abdakaustubha. Chowkhamba Skt. Series, 1929.
JsR. ^abdaratna. Ed. by Rama Shastri. Benares, 1888.
S^S. ^ankhayanasrautasutra. With the Commentary of
Varadattasuta Anartlya. Ed. by A Hillebrandt.
Calcutta, 1888.
6s. !§iksasangraha. Benares Skt. Series, 1873.
Say. Sayana.
SBE. Sacred Books of the East. Ed. by M. Mailer.
Oxford, 1879 ff.
Shpbr. Samhitopahisadbrahmana. Ed. by A. C. Burnell.
Manglore, 1877.
SK. Siddhantakaumudl. Ed. by M. M. Ssivadatta. Bombay,
1909.
SRV. Sayara on Rgveda. Ed. by M. Mullar, 1890.
SV. Samaveda. Ed. by Theodor Benfey. Leipzig, 1848.
V
SVPp. Samaveda Padapatha. Ed. by Satyavrata Sama-
§ramin, Calcutta.
Systems of Skt. Gr. Systems of Sanskrit Grammar. By
Belvalkar. Poona, 1918.
TA. Taittirlyaranyaka. Ed. by R. L. Mitra. Calcutta, 1872.
TB. Taittiriyabrahmana. Ed. by Shama Sastri. Mysore,
1921.
TPr. Taittiriya PratiSakhya. Ed. by W. D. Whitney
(JAOS) New Haven 1871; with Tribhasyaratna by
Shama Sastri, Mysore, 1906.
TS. Taittiriyasamhita. Ed. by Mahadeva Sastri, Mysore,
1894.
Vakyap. Vakyapadiya. Ed. by Rama Krsna Shastri. Benares,
1884.
VBr. Vamsabrahmana. Ed. by Satyavrata Sama§ramin.
Calcutta, 1892.
Ved. Stud. Vedische Studien. By Pischel and Karl F.
Geldner. Stuttgarter, 1889.
Ved. Myth. Vedische Mythoiogie. By A. Hillebrandt. Breslau,
1891, 1927.
Vedic Chant. Vedic Chant Studied in its Textual and
Melodic Form. By J. M. von der Hoogt, 1932.
Veda of Black Yajus. Veda of Black Yajus School Trans-
• lated. By A. B. Keith, (HOS. 18 and 19). New
Haven, 1914.
Vedic Gr. Vedic Grammar. By A. A. Macdonell. Strassburg,
1910.
VPr. Vajasaneyl PratiSakhya. Benares Skt. Series 1888;
Calcutta, 1893.
VS. Vajasaneyl Samhita. Ed. A Weber. Berlin, 1852; by
LakShman Shastri - Bombay, 1912.
W. Worterbuch zum Rgveda. By Hermann Grassmann.
Leipzig, 1873. .
Whitney W. D. A Sanskrit Grammar. Leipzig, 1879.
WZ KM. Wiener Zeitschrif t f ur die Kunde des Morgenlandes.
(Ed. by BUhler.) Wien, 1887 ff.
YV. Yajurveda, with the Commentaries of Uvata and Mahl-
dhara. Chowkhamba, Benares, 1912.
YV& Yajnavalkya !§iksa in S§iUs3sangraha.
ZDMG. Zeitschrif t der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesel-
schaft. Leipzig, 1847 ff.
CORRIGENDA.
The reader is requested to consult notes, while reading
the text; corrections and emendations proposed therein are
not repeated here.
TEXT.
P. L.
Read
For
18 14
20 *
VMl c (t1|V
24 13
176
177
25 5
23
123
95 20
26 8
4 AO
1 9fi
28 1
124
142
28 5
1 6
16
31 5
34 8
34 16
36 15
31
25
38 13
51 13
NOTES.
P. Col L.
1 2
21
Konda °
Kanda°
3 2
17
explicit
explicite
6 .1
6, 31. chords
cards
6 2
9
consonants
consonents
11 2
34
phenomenon
phenomena
19 2
16
explicitly
explicitely
25 1
2
. phenomenon
phenomena
31 sahah | jah SVPp. explanation wrong. It is not saba | ojah but
sahas \ jah ] ,
INTRODUCTION
I
UUanlra belonys to the Samuveda.
The text, commonly called Rktantravy.lkarana, belongs
to the SV. and not to the RV. This is shown by the following:-
(a) It frequently alludes to saman, stobha and the like. Cp.:-
(b) The technical terms, used in it, belong to the Samavedic
literature. This will be shown in details later on.
(c) Naigi and Audavraji, the two ancient ScSryas of the SV.
alone are cited.
(d) Rc 1. 337 is quoted on 89. This is not found in the RV,
but only in the SV. The above facts show that Rktan-
tra belongs to the SV. and not to the RV. It is needless
to refer to the commentary in support of this view.
Rl.tantra is a PrSlisSMiya of the 8V.
A PratiSakhya was defined by Goldstucker 2 as "a gra-
1 "tflntramiva tantram ] dairghyeni prasaritastantavaBtantramity-
ucyante ] yatlia tadanekftsya tiragclnasya tantoranugrahakam tatbedamaphya-
nekasyn laksyasyetyarthali" Nyasa on KaSika Vol. I, p. 2.
2 Goldstucker, Academy, July 9, 1870, p. 270, quoted by Burnel),
RT. p vu, Oaland. PVB. Int. p vu.
Terms,
samsvada and nigara
-iSman
rajana (saman)
kitkit
Sutras Terms.
11 ! stobha
39 him
123 gati
10 gr.l (gramegeyagana)
90. 266
29. Ill
Sutras.
150
113
2 RT. does not belong to the Jaiminlyasakha;
mmatical treatise which shows how the padas must change in
order to become the real hymnical text, and again, how by
means of the krama, the padas become the true representa-
tives of the Samhita". The SV. has no krama text, 1 but in
other respects, our treatise agrees with this definition, and we
may safely call it a PratiSakhya.
But because a PratiSakhya, as its name implies, must be
concerned with a particular Sakha of a Veda, our treatise
must belong to a particular Sakha of the^ SV. and not to all
of them. Burnell has given the following Sakhas 2 of the SV.:-
(1) Kauthuma.
(2) Jaiminiya.
(3) Ranayamya.
(4) Gautaml.
(5) Naigeya.
To which of these Sakhas does the RT. belong ?
{I) It does not primarily belong to the JaiminiyasdZkhdl.
(a) The prominent feature 3 of the JS. is the conversion of
d into 1 . This is not stated in it.
(b) Rule 58 prescribes circumflex for 'vrdhe 'sman' (SV. 1.
239). The JS. reads Vrdhe asman'; hence the rule is
not applicable to it.
(c) Rule 114 prescribes rangatva for a in cases like 'svarvaV
The phenomenon is not found in the JS. Cp. Benfey,
'svarva* asurebhyah.' 1. 254 = JS. 'svarvam asurebhyahr
1. rgvedastu ghanantalt syad yajurvedo jat&ntakah j
samavedali padantah syat samhitantastvatharvanah |j
Yohipraptilaksana, a MS. work in the Madras Library, No. 948.
2. Muller, Anc. Skt. Lit. Caranas, pp. 365-378; Bur. BT. p. xxvi; K.
Simon, Vedischo Schulen, pp. 27-31; PrapaBcahrdayam, p. 19; Sama^ramin,
Traylparicaya p. 40.
3. Caland, JS. p. 33. For a discussion on d=], cp. Turner "Middle
Indian-d and dd" in BWGI. 4. 35,
RT. belongs to the Kauthumas'akha.
3
'midhva* asmabhyam' II. 982 = 'midhvarnasmabhyam;'
'agne devat lhavaha' II. 142 = 'agne devam lhavaha.'
(d) Rule 112 implies 'vasu^nha,' 'rudra"< aditya 1 *. uta' and
soon. JS. on the contrary reads 'vasumnha,' 'rudram
adityam uta' and so on '
(2) Our treatise does not primarily belong to the S&Uia of S&tya-
mugri and Rdtoayuna.—
Patafijali states that the followers of Satyamugri and
RanSyana read a half e and o in instances like 'sujate esvaso-
nrte,' 'adhvaryo odnbhih sutam'. According to Bhattoji 2 , the
fact was expressly noted in the PratiSakhya of this 3akha.
This is not referred to in our treatise.
(3) RT. does not primarily belong to the Gaiilamlsakka.
The GautamlSiksa', a treatise on the doubling of (SV )
consonants, makes m the end the following statement—
"atha saptaksaramekamudahrtam pratigakhye I tra hi
tra hi yiniksva (1. 301) lti nanakasasasavah I gautamenoktam I
"na saptaksarat parah samyogo bhavati I"
This is significant, as it shows that there existed a Pr3-
tisakhya, presumably of the Gautamas, which recorded this
phenomenon. Our treatise does not even hint at it.
(4) ET. does not primarily belong to the NaigeyasSlhS,.
On sutra 94, the commentator cites 'endra sanasim'
(1. 129) as an example of the guna sandhi. The Sarnhita of
the Naigeyas has 'aindra sanasim'.*
(5) The tieatise primarily belongs to the KaiitkumasUKhoZ. 5
1. For other peculiarities cp Caland, JS pp 32-35
2. Cp. note on 82
3. Burnell, RT p, xxxvi.
4 Benfey, SV. Ejnl. p. xxxn
5, In later times the followers of this Sakha spread m the Gujrat. Cp
B. L Mitra, CInndogyopm]§at, translation Introduction p 4, Sieghng, Die
Rezensionen das Caranavyuha p 27. The Kauthumas and Ranayanlyas use
seven notes in music, while the JaimjnTyas use bix and others only five, Cp the
verses at the beginning of PpS IX. 22 and R Simon, PpS. p, 495.
4 Fifty-two treatises of Kauthumas/akha.
The references to the rc, in the sutras, are without any
exception, found in the Kauthuma SV. The commentator has
closely followed the same text. Moreover, we meet with expli-
cit statements to this effect. To quote only one:-
"kauthumanam ke va grantha adhyetavya iti cedatraha
kascit":-
u dvipaficasadime granthah gakhayah kauthumeriha' }
proktah samodadhau yasmacchraute smarte sunigcitah II
tasmadvai samasakhayam granthabhedo nigadyate I
§rautasmartodite yasmanna muhyeta~katham cana II
venaranyakamuho'tra rahasyam ganamucyate 1
chandasyaranyake caivam mantrah sottarakah smrtah II
chandasyaditrayam stobhah sapadam syaccatustayam I
tandyah sadvimsakam samavidhanarseyake tatha II
devatadhyayavamSakhyah samhitopanisattatha I
astamopanisacciva brahmane samudahrtah II
naradl loma§I siksa gautaml ceti vai tridha I
kalpasutram tatha ksudram latyayanakameva ca II
upagranthah paficavidho nidanam tandyalaksanam I
anupatsthadanustotram kalpanupadameva ca II
etadda§avidham sutram samagesu ca visrutam I
rktantram samatantram ca sanjnalaksanameva 2 ca II
1. Caland has treated these treatises in detail in his Einleitung to the
JS. pp. 1-U; PVB. pp. 1. viii.
5. According to Burnell (Catalogue of a collection of Sanskrit Mss. Lon-
don, 1870, p, 41) the last two Prapathakas of Rktantra are called
Sanjs&prakarana. Caland holds (PVB. Intr. p. vii) that this is probably the
same as the Sasjfialaksana, mentioned in the Caranavyuha. But the last
two chapters of the RT. have nothing peculiar to claim this appellation
and a separate reference in the Caranavyuha. We have, on the other
hand, a SaBjfiakaranabhasya, a Ms. work in the Library of Asiatic
Society of Bengal. (A Descriptive Catalogue of Skt. Mss. in the Govern-
ment Collection. The Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. II, p, 1052) which
is a commentary on Safi jnakarana, a treatise in sutra form on the stobhas
The precise scope of a PratiSakhya
5
dhatulaksanakarn' ca syaditi vyakaranani ca I
anukramanika ceti naigeyam ca tatah param II
phullarri gobhilagrhyaip ca mantralak^anakam tatha I
gayatryadividhanam ca tatah stobhanusarnharah II
chandogaparUistam tu grhya sangraha* eva ca I
sraddhakalpe tato vedyasudhanarn gobhillyakam II
snanavidhirupakarma sravanena paro vidhih I
dvipaiicasadime grantha vrsotsargantag.lh smrtah II
iti kauthumaSakliay.'im granthasamkhya yathakramat I
etanadhltya nikhilam \edoktam jflatumarhati II
GGKP. pp. 28-29.
This makes the position quite clear But assuming that
the RT. belongs to the KauthumaSakha, how to explain those
statements of it, that apparently apply to the tcxtb of other
SsakhSs, and references to the authorities, that have their own
Ssakhas. The explanation uill be found in the following'-
T/ie precise scope of a Prathalhja.
The original and perhaps more significant term for the
PratiSakhya was the parsada, which implied that the treatise
m question belonged to a social group (pansad) m which, among
other things, the general principles of phonetics were adop-
ted to Vedic texts, by oral instruction 3 . According to
or particular words put in, in chanting tho \arious s3mnns And this is
exactly what the Caranatjuha soems to line in wow, and what the
contest hero requires, A similar treatise is Aksaratantra, edited by
Sat^svrata SamaSramin, bat not tnontionod by Caland in JS and PVB.
I Not yet identified
2, Printed text has grhjasangrohn. But cp. Ms. Bodl. \V 504 "grhjasangra
ham nama pans'igtam gobhilnputrakrtam I ha\e adopted this onlj
partialis
3 S Varolii, Critical Studies, p 12 pansad md innsid^githering for
open discussion, opposed to upanisad, which implied secret Instruction.
Gldauberg is inclined to beUo\e that the real sense of the term yijjr
mjad is worship or reterenee and that tho word expresses the same
meaning as upfisana, J5DMO. 1. 427 ff Ln 70 ff, Die Lehre det T/pa
maiden p 37. Tor the view of Deusien cp Fhil of Up p 16 ff
6 The precise scope of a Pratisakhya.
• Yaska 1 each Carana of a Veda had its own parsada, and the term
Pratigakhya, which obtained later on to designate these trea-
tises, has been etymologically explained by Madhava 2 as "pra-
ti&kham bhavam pratisakhyam" and this leaves absolutely
no doubt that there existed, at some time, as many Pratisa-
khyas as there were schools of the Vedas 3 .
But contrary to this, the author of Vaidikabharana 4
states, in no less explicit terms, (a) that the word Pratisakhya
1. padaprakrtini sarvacarananam parsadani J Isir. I. 17. For the difference
between Carana and Sakha cp. Miillor, Auc. Skt. Lit. pp. 125-129; 377,
378. Cp. also his admirable discussion on Carana pp. 364-378.
2. Jfianendra SarasvatI on SK. Panini IV, 3. 59.
3. (a) Six Pratigakhyas are available: —
(1) TPr. belonging to the Aukheyas.
(2) VPr. belonging to the Vajasaneyins.
(3) RPr. belonging to the 6akalas.
(4) RT. belonging to the Kauthumas,
(5) CA. belonging to the 6aunaka4akha of the AV.
(6) APr, newly discovered: text with a copious commentary in the press.
(b) References are found to three more: —
(1) Satyarnugri Pratigakkya. Cp. above.
(2) Gautama Pratisakhya. " ' '
(3) Carayamya Pratisakhya, Devapala on IvGS. (1. 5, 1.) refers to it. He
says "tatha ca carayamyasutram" "purukrte chvaehrayoh" iti purusab-
dab krta^abdas' ca lupyate yathasamkhyam che chre paratah" | See
Caland, K.GS. For kvcchra = kypsra cp, Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p. 31.
I owe this information to my friend Pt.j-Bhagavaddatta of the D.A.V,
College, Lahore.
(c) There may have existed a distinct Pratisakhya for the Ba^kala Sakha,
of the RV. Referring to "na rte grantasya sakhyaya devab" the commen-
tator on S^S. (xii. 13. 5) states:—
"apadruto nama sandhir baskalanam prasiddhab ) tasyodaharanam" J
This sandhi has not been noticed by the RPr. which is," otherwise, most
comprehensive and complete. Does it not hint at a RPr. other than the
present one ?
4. On TPr. IV. 11. "dvitris&khavisayatve'pi tadasadharanatayopapatteh. ]
tatha bahvycatn ^akalabaskalatmaka^akhadvayavisayam pratigakhyam
prasiddham J " "
The two conflicting views reconciled.
7
refers to a group of Sakhas, (b) that the RPr. pertains both
to Sakala and the Baskala Sakhas (c) and that the examples
quoted by the TPr., but not found in the extant text of the
TS. must be traced in the extinct 3akhas of the Veda. This
is tacitly confirmed by Uvata 1 and the commentators of
other Pratisakhyas. How to explain this conflict ?
The conflict explained.
The "winged songs" of the Vedas, which had been com-
posed at widely separated periods of time and space, were
united at some time in collections, and ascribed to famous
rsis of prehistoric times, preferably to the earliest ancestors
of those families, in which the songs in question were handed
down 2 . And, as may be expected in a time, when there existed
no central authority 3 , and people either did not know how to
write, or if they did, as I think very likely 4 , they did not, perhaps
1 Cp. "inrgyamudaharanam" RPr. vn, 33, "upagatyeti samhitayam na dr?
yate ( vrttavidamudaharanam drstam |i" Uvata on RPr. vn. 33, Cp. also
vn. 51
2, Wintornilz, Gesch, der Ind, Litt. Vol I. (Eng. trans.) p. 57
3 Even AB. VIII, 14. 23 shows how little real empire existed. Cp.
also N, N. Law, Ancient Indian Polity pp 13 ff
4, Bloomfield, The Rel. of the Veda p 21. According to Buhler, whose
theory has been generally accepted, the Brahmf alphabet was of Semitic
origin, and derived ultimately from a Phonecian script. Cf Cambridge
History of India p. 62, Buhler, Indische Paleography (Grundnss d. Indo
at'ische Phil.) Rhys Davids preferred a pre Semitic Fuphratan origin via
Dravidian traders. For the theory of Egyptian origin cp. Lehnmann
Haupt, ZDMG, Lxxm pp. 51 — 79. In Mahenjodaro and the Indian
Civilisation Vol, II, Ch. XXII (pp. 423 - 432) Prof. Langdon makes out
a strong case for deriving the early Brahmi alphabet of India from the
script recently discovered in Indus But according to Sir John Marshall
(Vol I, p. 52) it is no more than a surmise, prompted mainly by resem
blances between the tvo. Prima facie thero is a strong presumption in
favour of the Brahmi alphabet having been evolved, like other alphabets,
from a pictographic script, especially as it is now established that such
a. script had actuiHy been in use on Indian soil. I ira, howoier, inclined
to follow Prof Langdon
8
The origin of the 6akhas.
for secrecy's sake 1 , commit them to writing, the variations
in the arrangement of contents and text, were inevitable. And
since these collections, that presuppose a tolerably elaborate
scheme of priestly practices in connection with the hymns
addressed to the gods 2 , were meant mainly for utilitarian
purposes, the priest must have shaped and reshaped them
according to the requirements of the sacrifice, which naturally
varied with different sets of the priests. Again, the hymns
were, in no way, entirely immune from the phonetic law of
change. A certain number of local varieties in accent and
pronunciation, and in the recital of the hymns, crept in and
became sanctioned by the tradition of different families or
schools. These could not be given up, nor was there any means
of determining which was the ancient and most correct way
of reciting the sacred songs of the Veda. Thus there arose
Sakhas and upasakhas.
We have just noted that sacrifice was the dominant note
of the Vedic life 3 , and just as a priest regarded the ritual of
1. TVinternitz, Gesch. der Ind, Litt. Vol. T. p. 32. Road Chapter on "Die
Schrift und die uberlieferung der Jndischen littoratur" 28-37.
2. Bloomfield, Rel. of the Veda p. 31.
3. (a) Hillabrandt showed (ZDMG. XL. 708) that in a stage earlier
than that recorded, the Rgveda was a definitely practical collection
of hymns, arranged according to their connection with the
sacrificial ritual. Against this cp. Oldenberg, GGA. 1907 pp. 211 ft; Keith,
JRAS. 1908 pp. 224-9; The Rel. and Phil, of the Veda Vol. I. p. 1. cp.
also Geldner, Ved. Stud. Vol. I, "Die Melaphorisohe Bedeutung von
vrjana" p. 144 et seq; Bloomfield, Rel. of the Veda, Chapter "The Hiera-
tic Religion". The Rgveda is, in general, a hymn book for use at the
three-fire ceremonies. They are a hieratic literature in a very extreme
sense. Not only do they reflect the class interests and the class view
point of their priestly authors, but they devote themselves exclusively
to this ultra-hieratic phase of religion, the religion centring about the
three-fire cult. Not only are secular matters not primarily considered at
all, but even those more popular religious performances are ignored,
which did not require this elaborate ritual, and which formed the staple
religion of the great mass of the Aryan people Nearly all of the few
The two conflicting Mews reconciled 9
his school as full of magic and mystic power, &o also he held
the text of his school particularly mystic and all impor-
tant 1 And the time the text of a Sakha was once fixed, num-
erous devices for its purity and preservation were invented,
the chief among them being Pratisakhyas, which like their
basis, the Samhita, must have been distinct for all the Sakhas.
But with the close of the Brahmana period, sacrifice
receded into the background, and speculations of higher sort-
philosophic, cosmic, psycho -physical, and theosophic-grew up,
giving impetus to the tendency for generalisation 2 . The pnest
now began to look for the unity under the veil of the diver-
sity of his gods 3 , of sacrifice, that was no more than a gift to
Rgvedic hymns of which this is not true, are later additions to the collec
tion, as it stands, though this does not necessarily imply that the hymns
themselves are late Cp. Pranklm Edgerton, in Religions of the Past
and Present, p 122 note Cp also Muller, Anc Skt Lit "EarheT; mdica
tions of the ceremonial' pp 489-492 For a more moderate and logical
view cp Keith, The Rel and Phil of the Veda Vol I ' Popular and
Hieratic Religion' pp 55-57
1 s^as"Skhas"rftyamutsrjya paras*akha£rayam tu yah |
kai tumichhati durmedha mogham tat tisya jmtam ||
Karmapradlpa I 3
J Burnell, RT Intr p ^xxiv, Bloomfield, Rel of the Veda p 25
1 For the idea of unity in the RV cp x 129, the most often translated
hymn of the RV See Whitney, JAOS, xl p X, $B X 5 3 1, JB
III 35, 359 The hymn evokes admiration, not so much for the achieve
inent, hut for the thinkers who endeavoured to realize the ultimate
principle of life, and failed to satisfy himself. Deussen (Gesch der
Phil I 1 124, 125) inclines to think that the sages were able to dis
criminate betwean the ultimate principle of life and the phenomenal
«orld See also Radha Krishnan, Ind Phil P 101 where he compares
\nstotle s deity, the unmoved mover. For details cp. my article on
karniaujoana in the Oriental Collage Magazine 1928 See also Keith,
Rel and Phil of the Veda Vol II Ch XXVI pp. 433-39 As for
the Brahmanag, these m \anous places are conscious of higher phol 0 sophi
^ cal truths, which they ignore and turn to ritual purposes Cp Deussen,
Oesch. der Phil I 3/172 80 Keith does not agree with this view and
follows Oltmare who rejects Deassen's view cp L' Histome des idees
theosophiques I 12"
10 The two conflicting views reconciled.
these gods 1 , and of the text that accompanied the act of the gift.
At this stage, he earnestly questioned the duality in all phases
of life, theoretic as well as practical. He no longer felt diffi-
dent to receive from rivals 2 what was wanting in his own, and
also preferred to learn their texts besides his own 3 . Slowly
and gradually he. arrived at that text of a Veda, which seemed
to him as the basic one, and this he adopted, leaving • others
to take their own care 4 . For its preservation he did not require
1. Tylor, Primitive Culture, Vol. II. p. 375. Feist, Kultur der
Indo-germanen p. 351, though he prefers to trace all worship to the cult
of the dead.
2. yan namnatam svasakhayam paroktaniavirodhi yat |
vidvadbhis tadanustheyamagnihotradi-karinavat [\
Karmapradipa I. 3. Cp. Miiller, Anc. Sanskrit Lit. pp. 51, 364-65, 375.
3 vedanadhitya vedau va vedara vflpi yathakramam |
Manu III. 2.
Cp. Medhatithi on it "vedas'abdah s'akhavacano vyakbyatah | tisrah
dakha, adhlyita dve ekam vaikaikasmad vedanna tvekasmadeve | "
4. C p. Miiller, Anc. Skt. Lit. p. 119. The differences between the
various &akhas of the SV. are hardly of any importance, at any rate, not more
than what are found in the different mss. of any ancient author. But with
regard to the omission of y and v the &akhas Actually differed. Already
Saraa&amin pointed out in his TrayTtika (p. 249) that theKauthumas sing ha-u,
while the Ranayaniyas sing hav-u (cp. Caland, JS. Einl. p. 11). I may add
here that according to RT. 108 all fsakhas omit y, when it is followed by a
consonant ; Naigi omits it, when it comes in between the two vowels (159);
but some prescribe the omission of v also, when it is so placed (160). The
Kauthumas, however, prescribe the half omission of y and v (161), and this
may, probably, be the reason for the inconsistency (so ably noted by R.
Simon, PpS. 527) to be found in the SV. mss. with regard to the preservation
or otherwise of y and v. The mss. of North India preserve y, while those
from the south invariably omit it ; and this is significant, because we have
already noted that the Kauthumas spread in later times towards Gujrat, and
south is yet the home of the Ranayaniyas. And the rule 159 suggests that
south was also the home of the followers of the Naigeyasakha.
In the Brahmanic period, when sacrifice occupied the centre of the sta^e.
these minor differences were made much of ; the priests justifying their own
and running down those of others. But with the tide of generalisation all
What is'Samaveda ?
11
more than one Pratisakhya, and the best of the lot he adopted,
with minor modifications, recording therein the chief varia-
tions found in others, as the views of eke, apart, HcarySh
and so on 1 .
And this is exactly what seems to have happened in the
case of our treatise; and although it primarily belongs to the
Kauthuma school, yet it records meagerly, of course, the
views of others.
II
And the fact that Rktantra is a Pratisakhya of the SV.
introduces us to the important question "What it S&maveda 9"
By the SV. we generally take a number of unconnected
verses, nearly all of which occur in the RV. and which modi-
fied in several ways, are chanted mostly at the soma sacri-
fices. The words, together with the chant, are supposed to
constitute a saman, and when the SV. is referred to, only the
Samhita, or collection of words are meant But this is erro-
neous. Scholars of old times understood by a saman, a melody
or chant, independent of the words. The earliest records, avai-
lable at present, bear out the distinction between melody and
words, and treat the first as more important than the latter.
This will be clear from the following:-
1. The distinction was clear in the time of the RV. Cp:-
(a) gayatrena prati mimlte arkamarkena sama traistubhena
vakam I
vakena vakam dvipada catuspadaksarena mimate sapta
vanlh II RV. 1. 164. 24.
was changed, differences which were already nominal, were yet minimised,
till the major Sakha got the better of minor ones. And just as there remain-
ed only the major Sakha or Jsaklifis of a Veda current, so also there remained
only the major Pratis*akhya of a Veda current
1. For details see Whitney, TPr. pp. 432-133, Ludere, VySsaSiksa
pp. 21-22 The discussion on the nature and scope of Pratisakhyas held by
Muller in Anc. Sbt. Lit. pp. 116-146 is yet the most exhaustive
2 Cp. alsoBV. 1 10 1, 5 4. 4. 14, 8 3. 22, Mullei, Anc. Skt.
Lit p 489.
12 The distinction between the Rc and the Saman,
(b) tasmad yajnat sarvahuta rcah samani jajnire I
chandamsi jajnire I RV. 10. 4. 8.
(c) The word 'rclsama' which means 1 'he for whom the
saman is sung upon the rc' occurs eight times in the RV.
2. The distinction was clear in the time of the AV. Cp:~
rcah samani chandamsi puranam yajusa saha I
AV. 11.4. 2. 4
3. It was known to Yaska who says:-
sama sammitamrca I asyatervarca samam mena iti nai-
danah 11 Nir. vii, 12.
4. It was clear to Jaimini who says:-
(a) gitisu samakhya (II. 1. 36) I
(b) In order to press home the distinction, Jaimini devotes
the second pada of the seventh chapter to a discussion
on rathamtara and includes in the end that the word
rathamtara denotes a saman, independent of the words,
on which it is sung.
(c) The distinction is again stressed 2 in ix. 2. 1. 1.
5. It was known to Bhartrhari who states:-
rco va gitimatram va sama dravyantaram na tu I
gltibhedad yigrhyante ta eva vikrta rcah II
Vakyapadlya I. 109.
6. Bhatta bhaskara and Sayana assign different rsis to the
rc and the saman, sung upon it.
7. A saman is sung upon the rk. The idiom is old and
repeatedly occurs in the Brahmanas. Were there no dis-
tinction between the two, the idiom would have been
meaningless.
1. Bloomfiold, Tho god Indra and the SV. WZICM. xvii. 1903 p. 156.
Tho Ro). of tho Toda p. 38. See also JAOS. xxi. 66. Against this Cp. Otto
Bbhtlink in BKSGW. April, p. 7 ff.
•J. samoktibrhadadyuktl gltiiyatnrci kevale I
»3«9 \a gfinti evoti smfiryato saptamoditam n
The origin of the Ssman.
13
It is thus clear from the above, that since the time of
the RV. on to that of Sayana, scholars knew that there was
a distinction between the Rk and the Saman and that the two
were not inseparable. The Saman, in short, was a tune, a melo-
dy, sung to the words, and the SV. was a collection of the
saman.
The origin of the ftilman.
Three things stand out clear in the ganas of the SV:-
1. The ganas are practically strings of "dadas" ha-is
and ha-us 1 .
2. The same words are repeated in them again and again.
3. Words are badly mutilated to suit the melody.
Bearing these points in our mind, we may proceed with
our enquiry thus:-
It was natural for the awakening humanity to worship
the sun and the moon, the vegetation and other natural
forces. 2 To them dawn, sun and moon, sky, thunder and
lightning, atmosphere and wind, earth and fire were all gods,
and they worshipped them for happiness and success, health
and long life. Music, in one form or other, may have accom-
panied this worship.
It has been noted that some of the African tribes dance
and sing more frequently at the time of the 'palm wine
season' and the Bechuanas indulge in singing more specially
at the time of rains and the harvest. 3 Music is, thus, the
natural outlet for the feelings of joy.
1. B. Faddegon, Ritualistic Dadaism, Acta Orienlalm, V. 1926, 177
et seq
2 ltuers, Medicine Magic and Religion p. 57 , AVnltar AVoodburn
Hyde, the Religion of Greece in "Religions of the Past and Present", p 271.
3. Richard WaUshecfc, Primitive Music p. 163 With regard to the
native tribes of Central Australia ep the remarkable reseaiclies of Prof
Baldwin Spencer and Mr. F J, Oillen
14 Shamanism.
When the primitive jnan saw that the .gods (of nature)
were withholding their boons from him, he attempted to in-
fluence them by shouts, beating of tamtams and other frantic
exhortations, 1 and a similar phenomenon may even now be
•noted in the Indian villages, when crops are about to fail for
want of rain. This theory, viz., that self-exciting noises
produce a corresponding outside effect is termed shamanism. 2
1. The fundamental concept bearing on the religious life of the
primitive man is the belief in the existence of magic power, which may
influence tho life of man and which in turn might be influenced
by human activity. This idea of magic power is one of the fundamental
concepts which occur among all primitive tribes. This sympathetic magic,
whereby like is expected to produce like has been discussed in details by
Frazer in Golden Bough, Part I where he describes at length the rights for
the control of rain in pp. 247-311. Op. also Andrew Lang, Myth Ritual and
Religion Vol. I, Chapter IV. That sympathetic magic was at the very root
of Roman Religion has been ably shown by George Depuc Hadzsits "Religion
of the Romans" in Religions of Past and Present p. 319, Traces of this kind
of magic are detected in the Greek religion by Gilbert Murray in his Four
Stages of Greek Religion p. 16. H. Oldenberg in his able book Die Religion
des Veda suggested that in the evolution of thought, magic, as representing
a lower intellectual stratum, has probably everywhere preceded religion. Cp.
Warde Fowler, who insists on the distinction of religion and magic, but
seems to believe that magic precedes religion in order of time. Religious
Experiences of the Roman People pp. 47-9, 188, 223-24. See IT. N. Law,
Ancient Indian Polity Ch. IX. See also Keith, Rel. and Phil, of the Veda. I.
pp. 46-48.
2. (a) The English words shaman and shamanism, seem of Hindu
origin, being the "Western reproduction of the Pali-Buddhist
samana, which is Sanskrit irama$a. cf. Bloomfield, The god Indra
and Samaveda, WZKM. xvii. p. 164; Winternitz, Gesch. der Ind.
Lit. I. 168 n. 2. Comparative study has revealed that shamanism
was "the native religion of the Ural-Altaic peoples from Behring
Straits to the borders of Scandinavia" and "probably of the early
Mougol-Tavtar peoples and others akin to them, for example in
China and Tibet." Evans (Ivon H. N) Studies in Religion, Folk-
lore and Custom in British North Borneo and the Malaya
Peninsula, pp. 217-265. For the practices of shamanism cp. R. 0.
Shamanism as the basis of the SV.
15
The practice of shamanism must have been current in
India, long before the Aryans came and conquered the Dasas.
Here Indra, the rain-god, that splits at the time of the mon-
soon the cloud-serpent, that overlays the sky,' has e\cr been
devoutly worshipped and to help such a god with uild exhor-
tations suits both the underlying event, as well as the primi-
tive man.
And here waited all the rough material, (if the Aryans
had not their own) for the rsifying touch of the Vcdic priest,
in order to be transformed into the SV That this waR so is
indicated by Indra's prominence in connection with the
chant of the saman. Of the 59 decades of the POrvarcika,
36 in the middle of the book are addressed to Indra; 12 at the
beginning belong to Agni; and 11 at the end go to Soma.
Both these divisions are subordinate to the worship of Indra. 3
In the primitive vocal music there need not be a union
of poetry and music. 2 Mr. de Montes recording the text of a
North Indian American song says . —
"At first they sang" "halvet ho ho he" then the general
outcry followed "e", then again ''Egrigna han he hu" and at
last the ominous "ta-meia allelujah tameia don veni han han
he he". 3
Winstedt, Shaman Saiva and Sufi. Chaptor III. "The Malaga
Magician "
(b) The similarity of the words eliamnn and saman 19, however, acciden-
tal. Bloomfiold, "WZIvM, xm p lGi. liio moaning and the
derivation of the word saman are obscure Cut for the word f/ai,
we should not be able to guess at its moaning Op. 'pragltam
mantrav&kjam sfimas'abdonocj ate* quoted in Ind. Stud IV. p. 141
1 The myth of Indra, Vrtra and tho waters "represents a specialised
poetic treatment of a myth of thunderstorm cloud and rain." Bloomfield,
Bel of the Veda p 181. For tho masterly theorj of Ilillobrftndt "that
^rtra represents the frozen winter, while Indra represents the spun" or
summer sun cp Ved Myth, Vol III. p 157 ff. Tor Indra's close connection
■with soma cp E, Sieg, Indra und dor soma nub nach deiu Rgiedi m
BLSVGI. pp 228-239
2. Primitive Music p 174
3. Primitive Music p. 173
16 SV. dadaism compared with N. American songs.
This phenomenon must not be claimed as the monopoly
of North Indian American songs, and the similar can easily
be noted in Indian village songs even to-day. And have we
not noted the monotonous string of "dadas" ha-is and ha-us
in the ganas of the SV. ? And do we not find an order for
singing, similar to that just noted, prescribed for the five
bhaktis 1 of a soman ?
In singing some tribes (N. Am.) use the sounds "he"
"ah", no intelligible words being uttered. Among other tribes
the songs are monotonous chants, extending over but few
notes, varied by occasional howls and whoops in some of the
more spirited melodies. Words are often borrowed from other
tribes without being understood. 2 The Macusi Indians in
Guina amuse themselves for hours with singing a monotonous
song whose words "hai-a" "hai-a" have no further signi-
ficance. 3 And what significance, on earth, do we find in the
so-called stobhas of the SV. which run exactly parallel to the
"hai-as" "hai-as" just noted ? And is not an attempt, like the
one made by CHU. to explain these ha-is and ha-us, hope-
lessly barren of any positive gain 4 ?
1. Divisions of a saman. Cp. Laty. VI. 1. 14; Drah. III. 4. 12; Burnell,
Avbv. Int. p.xxv; R. Simon, PpS. p. 522; his Paficavidhasutra; The Vedic
Chant on the divisions of a saman and iny note on the rule 39.
2. Jeswitt. Narr. p. 87.
3. Primitive Music, p. 173.
4. Cp. Samasramin, Trayisamgraha, where he makes an attempt at
the elucidation of the staubhihagana. He severely attacks Sayana for not
giving the real interpretation of the stobhas and accuses him of the ignorance
of the Samavedic tradition. But the charge, -levelled against Sayana seems
presumptuous and no ingenuity on earth can satisfactorily make out any
sense of the dadaisms, r which are nothing but-a mystic dance on vowels and
consonants and are meant to be an empty adornment to the songs. The sense
of the words can not possibly have been understood in the mutilated form in
which the chants were sung, and this shows that their religious value lay not
in the matter, but in the form, and the samans have been rightly compared
to the revival hymns beloved by the African negro in the new world. Cp.
Shamanism as the basifi of the SV.
17
It is a striking feature of the primitive songs that they
Keith, The Rol. and Phil, of tlio Veda Vol, I p. 10. Bosldes, the anciont
chatulogas adopted these senseless sjllabloi in order to obscure the meaning
of the Rgverses and thus heighten tlio wnctlty of tho samo in the mind o! tlio
^ods, who love the apocryptic. Even today children In Holland sing in
honour of "all tho swimming ducUots" tho empty, tho riming and alliterating
refrain "falde ralde riro faldo-raldo-ra" (B. Faddegon, Ritualistic Dadaisin,
Acta Orientalia V. 192G, p 182) and no serious student lias e\or worried
himself about the meaning of those songs, and I too no reason why tho same
mtiy not hold good in caso of tho SV. songs, more particularly about tho
Channagatui, where thoro is no rk at all but only a string of tho ttolha$. By
this, I do not moan tint the SV. as a whole is meaningless, all that I want to
press homo is this, that tho "dadauinV which form so prominent a foaturo of
the SV, ganas, aro meaningless, that they, as the bearer of tho various
melodies, were current in India long before tho Aryans came hero, that
the Vedic r§is adopted thorn, along with tho tunes, that thoy applied to these
meaningless words the Rg\erses in general, and Yajus formulas in n fow caso*,
and thus ultimately boilt tho flno odifico of tho extant SV And this is not
at all surprising, whon we note that just as Vedic Indian raco was, like others
great in history, tho prodnct of a blond of populations — conquering Aryan
tribes from somewhere in Central Europe settling among tho indlgonous stocks,
(Keith The Re], and Phil, of tho Veda. Vol I jip 12 14.) so also tho religion
of the Vedic India was n product of a blond of tho early Indo-European or
Aryan beliefs with tho older cult, ideas, and practices of the indigenous
peoples, and the same process of blending is not an impossibility in case of the
Vedic music, Ihese two sources continued Interwoven all through the history
of Indian religion and aro discernible in both theology and ritual To disent-
angle them is tho first and the most difficult problem for the historian of| the
Indian life and I regrot I am not competent to undortako tho inquiry into this
at this stage. Eminent scholars like Elliot Smith (Migrations of early Culture),
Fleure in Slater, (The Dravidian Element in Indian Culture), Perry, (Children
of the San), G. "W. Brown (Studies m honour of Bloomfield pp. 7fi ff,), S, Levi
(Journal Asiatifuie ccui 1-56), Hornell (Memoirs of tho Asiatic Society of
Bengal, VII m( 1920) have tried to ascertain, the amountof predravidian and
dravidian influence on Vedic civilisation, but many of tho arguments advanced
by those scholars are of dubious character (cp Keith, Rel and Phil, of the
Veda Vol. II p 633) and they do not cairy us beyond the region of conjee
ture In his admirable book on "Outlines of a Systematic Anthropology of
Asia' Prof, Giuffnda Ituggen has made a laudable effort to determine the
characteristics of the pro dra vidians but we must admit that much of it is
■xgain based on ingenious conjectures alone
18
The SV. i.e. the Arcika.
pay little attention to the grammatical structure of the se
tence and the logical order of words ; and it has been noted
the Andamanese songs, that in them, the words in their poe<
form, are so mutilated to suit the metre, as to be scarce
recognisable. 1 And this is exactly what we find in the gan
of the SV., where the rc are badly harnessed into the servi
of the melody, and words are mutilated beyond recognition
Such was the rough ground on which the Vedic pries
raised their stately mansion of the SV. and we may well cc
elude our inquiry into the origin of the Saman in the £ollo
ing words of Bloomfield : —
"The Samaveda n represents little more than t
secondary employment in the service of religion of popu.
music and other quasi-musical noises. These were develop,
and refined in the course of civilisation, and worked into t
formal ritual of Brahmanism, in order to add an element
beauty and emotion. 4 "
Ill
The SV. i.e. the Arcika.
It has been shown .in details that the word saman <
noted a melody and not the rc, which is sung upon it. But
1. Primitive music p. 174.
2. Some of the verses of the RV. met with in the SV. offer divers
readings; and it lias been supposed that a more ancient text might be recogn
in them (Benfey, SV, Einl. pp. xxvii-xxviii). But Theodore Aufrecht (in
Preface to his ed. of the Hymns of the RV. 2nd ed. Bonn, 1 877 II.
xxxviii ff.) and Oldenberg (Hymmen des RV. I pp. 289 ff.) have shown
details that the SV, variants are mainly due to arbitrary — intentional
accidental alterations — alterations that also occur elsewhere, where words
prepared for music. Cp. Burnell, Arbr. Int. p. x vi; Keith, The Rel.
Phil, of the veda Vol I. p. 1.
3. Gp. also Keith, The Rel. and Phil, of the Veda Vol J. p. 16. Acc
ing to Winternitz, saman probably means "propitiatory song" a means
appeasing gods and demons. The word saman also occurs in the sens<
"mildness j soothing words.' Gesch. der Ind. Litt. Vol. I, p. H6,
i. Eel. of the Veda, p, 39.
The ArciKa.
19
course of time the idea got reversed, and theologians began to
conceive that the melody originated from the rc, giving rise
to the expression that "this ot that saman is sung upon a
particular stanza". The stanza thus ultimately came to be
termed as yom i e. the womb, out of which the melody
came forth. 1 And the SV. 1 e the Arcika (the collection of
rc) is nothing but a collection of 585 yonis, or single stanzas,
which are sung to about double the number of different tunes 2
It is thus only a kind of text book, 3 containing the stanzas,
which are to be memorised for making upon them the
saman melodies
This collection of verses, taken as a whole, came to be
regarded as comprising —
1. (a) Cp Sayana, SV Vol I p 22 'chandonamake granthe nanavidha
nam samnam yonibhuta evaicah pathital ."
(b) e g Sayana in his commentary on the PVB (xu 6. 5) says "prfl
mamhisthaya gajata iti yonavntpannain sam.* pia mamhistha
s*abdayogat pra inaiuhisthayam tadatia tree kartav^am [|
2. Oldenberg W\ 1906, 712 A.
3. The first man to use the suggostive term libretto* for this was
Muller. Cp. Anc Sanskrit Literature p 473. For the relation of HV, with the
SV. cp the very illuminating article of Oldenberg "Egveda-samhita and
Samavedarcikj m ZDMG xxxvill
4 This is also cilled 'geyam' or 'yomganam', bee iuso it records those
chants, which constitute j/ont to those, thit occur in the Uha and Uh^aganas
This is also termed 'Veyagana' or "Ve 0 ana" — dritljani — because it was taught
after the study of Aranyegeya Q ana. Cp Saiuas'ramin SatjaTrata, Trayltika,
p 205 For Avir B ana and Channagana cp Trayltika pp, 205 210 11, respec
tively
5 This is also cilled 'rahasyagana' or 'rahasya' Cp Caland, JS Eml.
p 6, PVB Int p ii, B Simon, PpS p 501
(A)
(B)
Ganas (song-books)
1 Gramegeyagana 4
2 Aranyegeyagana. 3
3 Ohagana
Rc (the collection of verses).
1 . Purvarcika.
2. Aranyaka samhita.
3 Uttararcika.
20
The Utta rare ilea.
4. Uhyagana. 1
The relation between the Purvarcika and the first two
ganas is obvious. The Purvarcika records single verses. With
each of these, corresponds a single saman, which bears a
particular name derived from the rsi who is said to have seen
that saman. These samans are registered in the Gramegeya-
gana and Aranyegeyagana.
The arrangement of the yonis is systematic and the
Arcika is divided into three parts; (1) the first (1-114) is
addressed to Agni, (2) the second (115-466) belongs to Indra,
(3) and the third (467-415) goes to Soma. These again are
mostly sub-divided according to the metre of the text.
Uttai^cika.
The Uttararcika does not register single verses, but is
comprised of triplets' i.e. pragathas. In the Uttararcika the
xc are arranged for the formation of stoma* ; thus the aim of
this collection is purely practical.' On the whole, the first
verse of the triplet occurs in the Purvarcika, 4 which indicates
of , n n r kj \ iS J n " bbreviation of tWhasya. Cp. Bumell, Catalogue
Manu, II. 262 and SamaSramin Trajitlka p. 10.
2. (a) The triplets are known tn tlm nv n« i - t- j-
mZ «v 'r ]l T a,S ° '" Sf bhirM staa sam ™ te »' Ait - m. 23. Against
he e He ' "f^ «™ * «-» ET. I. M. M record
p. 44G. * MaDtralltt6r « 1 '"'. P. 68, and Oldeaberg, ZDMC, xxxriii.
5. Oldenberg, ZD BIG. p. 405
^ <!1 ^X?r » A DeK "> tive C »""0S«e of ,he Sanskn, B1 S ,
Oha and Ohyaganas
21
thit the melody, which belongs to this verse, is to be applied
to the whole triplet For example, the first verse of the triplet
in the Uttararcika (I 1.1 2-32) beginning "ka> a nascitra a
bhuvadutl" occurs in the Pun arcika 1 (2. 2. 3 5-169). Accor-
ding to the Gramegeyagana this re is sung to the tamadevya
sJman On this melody then, the three verses of the Uttara
rcika (32-34) must be chanted at the sacrifice
Ulia and Vhya
These three verses as used at the sacrifice are recorded
in the Ohagana Thus we see that like the Uttararcika, the
aim of the Ohagana, is also purely practical
The Ohagana runs parallel to the Uttararcika and Gra-
megeyagana, while the Ohjagana runs parallel to the Aranye-
geyagana
The names are clear "uhati" me-ins adapts, tht
Ohagana 2 contains the melodies of the Gramege) agana, but
adapting them and working them out, so as thej are chanted
at the sacrifice, and the Ohjagana adapting the melodies of
the Aranyegeyagana, to the verses on which thej must be
chanted at the private sacrifices 3
(b) There is a groat number of \erses in the Uttararcika, that ha\e iu>
correspondent verse in the Puriarcika This is explained by the
fact that these verses, which belong to the ;>io7ah savana are chant
ed on the gayah a melody which is given as an appendix to the
editions >f the Gramegeyagana (SV Vol "\, p C01) On the
other hand, many yonis are found in the Pur\arcika which
have no correspondent verses in the Uttararcika This is explained
by the fact that sunans are chanted not only at the Soma sacrifices
bat on many other occasions as well these siinans were chanted
as solo mostlv by the Prastotr Cp Caland JS Kinl p 5, PVB
Int pp x xi The difficult* was pointed out bj Oldenberg m Ins
brilliant article on Rgveda samhita and Sama\odarcika in ZDMG
xxxvni and was repealed bj VVintermt? in his Gesch der Ind
Lit r p 145
1 JNOT ix 2 1-2
2 Cp N on PfS 87 "uha 0 !lau gritupsej-uat n!i)a D ina irmya^e
yavat | " See also Cahnd JS Eml pp 7-8.
22
Chronology of the SV.
The names of the basic ganas are also clear. The Gra-
megeyagana contains those samans that were studied in the
community, while the Aranyegeyagana' registers those samans
that, because they were too sacred and mysterious, were studied
in the forest, outside the community.
IV
Chronology of the SV.
Little can be said with certainty about the chronology
of the SV. We have rather to work on guess and conjecture.
Scholars are unanimous in showing that sacrifice was the
dominant note of the Vedic life. 1 The Vedic rsi rose early in
the morning to a sacrificial day ; morning, noon and evening
were spent in offering gifts to the gods. The soma was ever
present at the sacrifices.
The Vedic rsi was strictly utilitarian and practical ; and
we know from the researches of antiquarians 2 that in a
1. The poetry and religion of the Veda display in the highest degree
the mark of the sacredotalism. Ludwig, HI. 262; Haug, Preface to Transla-
tion of AB. p. 36. The Vedic concept of the 'rta' is essentially the Tao of
the Chines. It is lofty and very inspiring, but in the hands of the Vedic
priests, it becomes little more than an apotheosis of the system of sacrifice,
around -which the Rgvedic religion centres. For the conception of 'rta' cp.
Bloomfield, Bel. of the Veda pp. 12, 20; Franklin Edgerton in the Religions
of Past and Present p. 1 17; Keith, The Rel. and Phil, of the Veda Vol I
p. 35, 83, 84; Bettey Heimann, Varuna-Rta-Karina in BLWGI. pp. 207-11.
The fact was well known to Sayana, who interprets the Vedas according to
the requirements of the ritual. Cp. his slokas in the Preface to the Snma-
vedn, where he distinctly accords the highest position to the Yajurveda, which
according to Macdonell (Hist, of Skt. Lit. p. 46) shows the exceeding growth
of ritualism. Cp. also Winternitz, Gesch. der Ind. Lit. I. p. 245 ; Schroeder,
Indiens Lit. und Cul. p. 90; Keith, The Rel. and Phil, of the Veda Vol. I. p. 24.
2. Cp. Burnell, Arbr. Int. p. xxxii. With the growth of the persona]
god sprang up the distinctly ethic parts of the creed— those moral laws which,
as 3Ir. Spencer says, are subsequent to the beginning of worship. There is
little moral teaching in the works of nature: the thunder and the lightning
are not bound by the laws which bind us; "the wind blowefch where it listeth;
and it is wasted breath to cavil at the doings of these things". The character
Was the Punarctki or was the Uttararciki older ? 23
primitive sacred literature, the parts most liable to systemati-
sation are codes of ceremonial law and rituals and similar
practically useful parts This has been so always and cv cry-
where, and the **ame ma> hi\e happened in Vedic India, and
although in their rudimentary forms thetwoganas (i c the
Gramegey agana and Aran) egcy agana) may ha\e existed side
by side since prehistoric times, yet the GrSmegeyagana which
being more suitable to an advanced stage in civilisation, came
to be associated with the favourite soma sacrifices, received
the arrangement first and the Aranyegeyagana, that evidently
belongs to an early stage of Vedic civilisation, 1 received the
little arrangement it has, comparatively later
Was the FTne&rcila 01 teas the Uttaruml a oldei 7
And now we come to a very perplexing question, one
which is of the utmost importance for a true perspective of
the historic development of the older SV texts, and for the
correct interpretation of many a passage in the PVB. and
of the earl} O ods is discovered b\ obsomng what the} aro and not by consi
doring what they should bo But when the god has clothed himself in human
guise he has taken therewith the responsibilities of human nature, he must,
in the end, conform to one code of right and wrong For details seo Charles
Francis Keary Primitive Belief pp 48-19
1 Burnell Arbr Introduction p xxxiv The precise nature and
function of the Aranye^ag'ina seems yet undecided May be, this appelta
tion was given to these songs becmse thoy woro too archaic t > be made any
sense of even by tho priests who consequently holding them as mystic and
magical, reserved fot charm* witchcraft medicine and other homely praotices
winch require privacy and are ^onerUly moint fir plainer people, as opposed
to the Soma sacrifices v Inch were meant for the rich lav sacnficerS It seems
that tl e primitive Aryan used these magical songs in order to control and
make subject to his mil spiritual igei tio* which he thru^hl ho could so cont
rol while the more powerful spirits i e the gods ho sought to propitiate
ly sacrifices accompanied b} Grunegeya soiigi thus securing their assistance
by vwnmn 0 their goodwill since lie thou*«l t ho Ind not the power to compel
them Thus while the Gramegeyagnna is meant to be sung at Soma sacrifices
the Aranyegeyagana may have been ouginallr meant to I e sung at the charms
24
The view of Oldenberg and Caland.
kindred texts. The puestion is 'was the Purvarcika or icas the
Uttarwcika the older part ?'■
Now the fact that Uttararcika is a collection of verses
on which the samans had to be chanted, would make it appear
older than the Purvarcika, which is a collection of verses, that
served to register the melodies, on which the triplets had to
be chanted ; and this was the view, which the late Dr. Caland
held, before he wrote Introduction to his monumental work,
the PVB., and to which he, in a different form, of course,
tenaciously adhered up to the last. 1
But here comes one difficulty, and that is this, that the
Uttararcika is nowhere quoted in the Samavidhanabrahmana,
and that Purvarcika alone is mentioned in the vratas. Start-
ing on this clue, Oldenberg 2 showed that the Uttararcika
was much later than the Purvarcika, the Brahmana, the
.Masakakalpa, and 6rautasiitras of Latyayana and Drahya-
yana, and this view has been virtually accepted by Dr. Caland,
only with one reservation, namely, that there existed a fore-
runner to this Uttararcika, which existed even before the
Purvarcika. Caland works out this view in brief as follows :-
PVB. (iv. 4. 1) states that in a certain case a great
number of verses had to be taken direct from the Samhita.
The expression 'sambharya' which denotes a complex of verses
to be taken from different parts of the Voda, does not suit the
1. Purvarcika older than Uttararcika. Winternitz. Gesch. der. Ind
Lit. I. p. 145. Against this cp. Caland, JS. Einl. pp. 4, 9. PVB. Int. p. xiv.
2. For the discussion onthe priority of Purvarcika I have mainly drawn
from Caland JS. Einl., Jaimbr. Einl., PVB. Int. and WZKM. Vol. xxii
p. 436. The brilliant paper of Oldenberg in the JGOS, Vol. xxxviii was not
available in any library of Lahore and I regret I could not profit by it. 1
have also not had the privilege of reading his paper 'De Wording Van der
Samaveda in Verse en Meded. der Kon. Ak. v. "Wetensch Abd. Lett. c4.B.
Deed ix and Caland's ''Over en nit het Jaiminiyabrahmana in the same jour-
nal 5 c. Reeks Deel I p. 5 seq., because both are in Dutch for which I have to
consult the Dictionary at every step, and the material has been . repeated ty
Caland in PVB. with greater clearness and precision.
The view criticised
25
SV, because in the Uttararcika, the \crscs arc given as a
whole, all after one another, and this indicates that the com-
pilers of the Brahmana w ere not aware of the Uttararcika,
and that the chanters Knew the RV. from which they u*cd to
den\e this material Starting on this line Cahnd conclude -
The chanters were acquainted with the RV. Trom this
the> drew their verses, and on them they chanted the lauds
at the Soma "sacrifices In order to facilitate the memorisa-
tion of this materia! a double register was composed, one of
the melodies, and one of the verses, on which the melodies
were chanted The register of melodies was taken up, and the
«amc was consid red as the beircr of the melody. The
'econd regi'ter, iliat of ler'c, tens tin fore runner of 'tltc Utlarftr
nha To the first collection of songs were added later on,
•■ongs of a different Kind, that had to be chanted by a single
chanter at other occasions Besides the c e song books, arose,
at the same time, the --econd register the PQnarcika and
the Aranyaka Thereupon a Brahmana arose Based on
this Brahmana, the Ar^akalpa was composed by Masaka
Based on these two works, the SVautasulras were composed
by Latyayana and Drahya>am Then only the UtlararciKa
was compiled, which contained the verges from the RV.
arranged m their regular order, in which they were used at the
Soma sacrifices
This is, in brief, the trend of thought followed by
Caland But the difficulty, for the solution of which, he took
all this labour, remains yet the same We are yet entitled to
ask him "why there is not the slightest reference to this fore-
runner of the Uttararcika in the Brahmana, ^rautasotras and
the AtharvapanSista, and why the SVbr does not anywhere
even hint at it " We talk of older Rgvedas, 1 and for them we
have some reason, but such is not the case with the Uttarar-
cika
1 Muller, Anc Skt Lit pp 164,463, 403-96, Bonfey, SV Einl pp
xxix-xxx , Bnrnoll, Arbr Int xxxln, Cahnd, PVB iDt p xn
26
Purvarcika is older than the Uttararcika.
Caland seems to think, that from the beginning of the
Soma sacrifices, the chanters used to sing their lauds not on
one verse, but on a triplet, and this is the only reason why, in
one form or other, he makes out the register containing
triplets, earlier than the one containing solo-verses. 1 But this
is erroneous, and although native scholars are unanimous in
prescribing the use of triplets at the Soma sacrifices, yet there
seems nothing to prevent us from assuming, that in earlier
times, when the sacrifice was yet. in its crude form, the priests
sang their melodies on solo verses, and that with the growth
of the ritualism the idea of using triplets arose, the two stages
of development being successively recorded in the Purvarcika
and Uttararcika. That this actually happened so, will be
' clear from the RV. 1. 164. 24, which runs :—
gayatrena pratimimlte arkamarkena sama traistubhena vakam I
vakena vakam dvipada catuspadaksarena mimate sapta vanihll
Sayana raises the following discussion on "arkena sama.''
"arkena sama | uktalaksanena mantrena sama, gayatraratham-
tarasanjnakam sama pratimimlte | nanvekam smna tree kriyata
iti tisnvekam soma vilritamato'rkaih sameti vaktavyam katha-
mucyate' rkeneti na I vastuta ekam smnaikasyamrcyammidham- 1
paicadanyonyam taduttarayorgayaM ityatidehah \ ata ekavacana-
maviruddham II"
Thus the question of the priority of the Purvarcika to
the Uttararcika is settled once for all, and so far we perfectly
agree with Oldenberg. But the assumption that Uttararcika
is later than the Brahmana, Arseyakalpa and the ^rautasutras,
must not go unchallenged. The reasons are as follows
(a) The assumption militates against the general trend of
1. "That from the oldest times on the chanters must have had at their dis-
SoLa'-r r r lleCti ° n0f tristichs a °<* P"*****, that served them at the
l^i^^T™ m6l0di6S;that Action might have
Caland, PVB I nt p ^ Uttararoika ' as lt is kaown to us now-a-days".
Uttararcika is older than the Brahmana.
27
the development of Vedic literature.'
(i) In the PVB., the terms pentastichs, dasastichs and the
like are used. 3 How could \vc know which verses were
intended, unless we assume, that the Uttararcika existed
at the time, when the Brahmana was compiled. Caland
meets this difficulty by assuming that the authors of the
Brahmana allowed here a free choice, while in later
times, the compilers of the Uttararcika fixed these
verses probably in accordance with the Jaiminlya-
brahmana, which states by citing their opening words,
which verses had to be employed. But taking into account
the deep animosity that obtained among the followers
of the different gakhas of a Veda in the Brahmanic
period, it seems simply unreasonable that the Kauthuma
Uttararcika was built on the basis of the Jaimhtiya
Brahmana.
(c) We read in tke PVB. 3 (viii. 8. 26) that the first verse is
a kakup, then comes an usnih, then a pura usnih kaktip.
Now RV. viii. 98. 9 (pura usnih) is not an anuttup, while
SV. II. 62 at the end has four syllables more and hence
tallies with the Brahmana. This addition of four sylla-
bles, as Caland has already shown, seems very old, be-
cause the Jaiminiyas also have it in their Uttararcika.
Must we not infer from this that the authors of the
1. The development of the Vodie litoraturo may bo briofly pat thus:-
(1) Samhitas i. e. collection of hymns, prayers and sacred formulas,
charms for witchcraft, medfeino and othor liotnoly practices.
(2) Exposition of the Bacrifico, illustrated by legonds.
(3) Speculations of the higher sort, growing up in connection with and
out of the simpler beliefs.
(4) A considerable body of set rules for conduct in everyday secular
life.
2. I owe the arguments put as (b) and (c) to Caland's PVB. Int. p. xvi.
3. Cp, Samagramin Satyavrata, Traylparicaya p. 105; Caland, J, S.
Einl. p. 6.
28
Difficulties explained.
Brahmana were acquainted with the Uttararcika ? The
explanation that the compilers of the Uttararcika chang-
ed the Rkverse, so as to bring it in harmony with the
Brahmana seems flat and does not get home.
{d) One thing more. Had the Uttararcika been so very
late, tradition must have had assigned its authorship to
a definite person, or like the Uha and Uhyagana, 1 must
have at least known that the ' same is pauruSeya. But
nothing of the kind is heard with regard to the Uttarar-
cika.
But admitting that the Uttararcika is older than the
Brahmana, how to explain the expression "sambharya" found
in the Brahmana, and how to solve the difficulty raised by
Oldenberg ?
(a) As for the first, we may admit that the three portions,
referred to, may be later addition to the Arcika, presum-
ing, of course, that the text of the Brahmana in the three
places is reliable and refers to the verses in that very
order in which they are found in the Uttararcika.
(6) The solution of the second difficulty may be something
hke this. The real SV. i.e. the melodies were registered
in the Gramegeyagana. With each melody of this gana
corresponds a single verse in the Purvarcika. And be-
cause a single melody of a single verse (of the Purvar-
cika) was chanted on a single triplet of the Uttararcika,
one verse of the Purvarcika was virtually equal to one
triplet of the Uttararcika. And thus holding the Purvar-
cika as the basis of the Uttararcika, scholars preferred to
mention the first instead of the latter. .
Oldenberg will himself admit that (a) the Soma sacri-
nces existed long before the Brahmana, (b) that at them the
neiodies were sung on triplets, (c) that the priest was strictly
mv ' 1C d . utilit ^ian, (d)and that the Brahmana is a
cystic exp 0sl tion of the age-long ritual. If he once * admits
The later Ganas are patirttfci/a.
29
these points, he will ha\e, naturally, to assume that the priest
forthwith registered these triplets into a register long before
he began to think about the mystic details of the rile.
Thus we have seen that the Uttararcika, which wan
certainly later than the Purvarcika was yet older than the
Brahmana and the Sutra works.
Now remain the Dha and Ohyagana It is clear from
their very names that they are later than the two Ganas and
the Arcikas.
Caland" has shown in details that they arc later than
the Arseyak-alpa and Ksudrasotra and the Srauta-sOtras of
Latyayana and Drahyayana. Here his arguments arc backed
by Indian tradition, which is seen reflected in the statement
of Dhanvin, the commentator of Drahyayana-Jrauta-sOtra
He says on "visve deva iti vasisthasya mhavamuhct" (Drah.
x. 1. 11 = L^S. iii. 9. 12) —
'Is not the expression 'uhet' meaningless as its reading is
known (from the Ohagana) ? It is true, but they say "the
uha (i.e. the Ohagana) is made after the time of the expression
(of the Sutrakara". 2
That they were made by men is shown by the JNMV
(ix. 2. 1-2) which reads : —
uhagrantho'pauruseyah pauruseyo'tha vagrimah I
vedasamasamanatvad vidhisarthatvato'ntimah II
The Ohagana is made by the rsis, so far as it contains the
melodies "seen by them, but, on the other hand, it is made
by men, so far as it has been adapted by men." The SVbr
harmonises with this view, where samans arc not cited from
these two ganas, but only from the first two gana 1 !
l JS. Einl pp. 5 6
2. The text runs "nanu ca uliediti vnmnainanailfiakam, tasyfidlija^aua
uddinhat | satyametat | lacanottaralcalarauliali krtali||' Cp Caland, PVB
Iafc p xm, where odlijanao is a misprint
30 Uha and Uhya are older than the PpS.
Caland thinks that the two ganas are later than even
the PpS. This treatise prescribes rules, for adapting the
samans, as they are handed down in the Gramegeyagana and
Aranyegeyagana for practical use. It is just possible, accord-
ing to him, that in early times, amongst the Samavedins
certain rules were formed and handed down by oral tradition
for adapting samans of the earlier ganas, that these rules were
at last collected in a treatise called Pusapasutra, and that at
last, for the sake of ready reference, they were all brought into
action in the form of these two ganas.
But this argument alone is not convincing. We know
that the PratiSakhyas, which teach how to turn the padas
into Samhita, are centuries later than the Samhitas, and the
same may be said with regard to the Puspasutra. In reality
this treatise belongs to the third strata of the Samavedic
literature i.e. the analytic literature, which consisted of
Rktantra, Samatantra, Aksaratantra and numerous other
works. We read in the Puspasutra :—
sandhivatpadavadganamatvamarbhavameva ca I
pra§lesa*Scatha viglesanuhe tveva nibodhata II
Here the Puspasutra seems distinctly referring to the
Uhagana, and this view is supported by Burnell and Simon. 1
The same thing is made quite patent by the colophon in the
commentary of Upadhyaya AjataSatru, the commentator on
the Puspasutra. It runs :—
amahlyavasamadi^rayantlyakrtavadhim I
uhasagaramuddhartum Saknumah phullanaukaya II
This shows that there existed an ocean of the iihaganas
to cross which the bark of the Puspasutra was built.
1. "Dass dem Verfasser des Puspasutra die Ganas bereits ausgearbeitet
vorlagen bewotaen zu den Grnnden, die S. 496-500-1 Z u entnehmen
nnd auch noch besonders die sahlreichen Gana-formen, die der text des
^ ST ^ 6 T ' R ' Sim ° D ' PpS " P' 501 - ^land hoJds that the PpS.
» older than the ganas. Op. JS. PP . 9-10: PVB. Int. p. xiii
The three Mages of the SV
31
Thus \\c ha\e seen, in brief, the three stages in the deve-
lopment of the Sflma\cda; and for each of these there was
created a separate anal>tic treatise ThuR wc ha\c :—
1 Stobhis These were treated in
details in Ak^ratantra and
Si&jftakarani which show the
formation of stobha*
2 Reduction of theganas This was treated in Sflma
to the RV \erscs or, in a re- tantra, which prescribes rules
\erse order, of the \crscs to for turning the \erscs into
the ganas 1 saman, that i", it show*, the
application of the chant to
the %en>c
I On the formntion cf a iinim from *c ^nMrmomin (Jnimini Ix 2
7 2^) sap -
"samatodo saha<niro gityupftyMi | Aim kntamo gltjup1}\ Mmi J
ucjato | gitirnftma kri)A sftbhyanlaraprajittiajmja iiarnWSojapltuabuhpfi
jikl s5ma<abdAbh[lapya j sJt nl} aUiprain^nlyAnjrci fcijnlo | tatsampfldanartlio
yamrgaksaravikaro vi<lo$o \iUr?annnabhjaso urAmah stobha ityoiamA
dayah sarve slmavode satnfiinnajanto II
(1) nk$ara\ikftra — change of sjlliblo is doilt with in PpS % iii 87 sqq
{-) otf»ra\i^Ie5i— dissolution of io«ef contraction, is dealt witii In
PpS vj 103 sqq
akgaraukar?ana — tlio sonant O'o of semivowel* tikargann sam
kar?ana are dealt with in PpS nl 1 sqq
(4) ak?arabhyasa— repetition
(5) \irama^introducing tho rests
(6) stobha— the insertion of difforont sounds and syltablos sometime*
whole sentences or verso* For tho definition of stobha cp JNMV
ix 2 11 18 To thoso wo may add -
(7) lopa--dropping of sounds, treatod in PpS wi-8G sqq
(8) igami—gene rally a meaningless syllable » insorted in any part of
tho radical word, but here tho insertion of a stobhn in tho middle
of a word is specially understood It Is dealt with in PpS wi-184
Cp also Ajita^itru who sap —
' atha bhiUan pra\ak$jfiini pragAnam yair wdhljato (
arcikam shubhikam can a padam vikrijato tu yath [i
32
The three stages of the SV.
3. The adaptation of This was treated in details
saman (occurring in the Gra- in the Puspasutra which con-
megeyagana and Aranyegeya- cerns itself with the modifica-
gana) to verses, other than tion of words and prescribes
those to which they belong in rules for adapting the samans,
the ganas. as they are handed down in
the Gramegeyagana and Ara-
nyegeyagSna, for practical use
at the sacrifices.
4. The turning of padus This was treated in Rk-
of the verses (occurring in the tantra, which prescribes rules
Arcikas) into the Samhita. for turning the SV. padas into
the Samhita, and which there-
fore is a sort of a Prfiti£akhya.
ayitvam prakrtim caiva vrddhani cavrddhameva ca |
gatagatam ca stobhanfitn uccanicam tathaiva ca II
sandhivat padavadganamatvamarbhavamova ca |
praslesa^scatha vis'loBanuho tveva nibodhata II
saipkristam ca vikrstam ca vyafijanam luptainatihrtatn |
abhava^gca vikaraXsca bhavanfihe, bhilaksayot ||
etairbhavaistu gayanti sarvah sakhah prthak prthak |
paficasveva tu gayanti bhuyisthani svaresu tu II
sainani satsu canyani saptasu dve tu kauthumah ||
etc., E. Simon, PpS. 711.
But the CHU. (1) reads:-
"sa ha silakah galavatyascaikitayanam daldhyamuvaca | hanta tva
prcchaniti hovaca | ka samno gatiriti | svara iti hovfica See also BrU. (1. 3.
25) which reads; —
"tasya haitasya sainno yah svam veda bhavati hasya svam | tasya svara
eva svam | "
Sayana in his Commentary on' the SV. (Preface) writes:-' 'sainasabdava-
cyasya ganasya svarupam ygaksaresu krustadibhih saptabhili svarairaksara-
vikaradibhisca nispadyate | "
svaras are musical notations. These are kru§ta, prathama, dvitiya, trtfya,
caturtha, pagcama, and §astha or antya (cp. Bur. Arbr. XLIII) which partly
correspond to the sadja. rsabha, gandhara, madhyama, pancama, dhaivata
and nisada of usual music. Besides these simple notes (prakrti) there are seven
others (vikyti) viz , prenkha, namana, karsana, vinata, atyutkrama, and sain-
prasarana. For details see my note on R. 41.
Who was the author of Rktantra ?
33
And the above shown discussion should make it abso-
lutely clear why our treatise was invariably called "chando-
ganSm vyakaranam" and not a PratiSakhya of the same. The
real SV. consists of the melodies, and with them our treatise
has nothing to do. These were the subject of the first thrct
works, which accordingly deserve that appellation 1 . Our
treatise, on the other hand, is related to the text of the melo-
dies and was therefore, perhaps for the sake of distinction,
called simply a vyakarana, instead of a PratiSakhya. But
because the text book of the melodies is also called SV., wc
can safely give the appellation "PratUakhya" to the Rktantra.
V
IV/io tros Ihc antltoT of Rklanlra ?
Tradition assigns Rktantra to a isakafayana ; and this i*
supported by the colophons of the Mss. and the explicit
statements of Samasarvanukramanl 3 and Nagesa. 3 But
Bhatfoji goes against it and emphatically declares : —
"tatha ca rktantravyakaranakhyasya chandogya!ak*a-
nasya praneta audavrajirapyasotrayat' I"
He is supported by the author of the gloss on Paninlya-
siksa 5 , who quotes from Rktantra in these words "tatha
1. "Das PuspasStra 1st ola oino Art von PratiSakb) a 2nm Uttarag&na
anznsehon" It. Simon, PpS 492 TI10 Mj. U also rails it "SainaprMis'lkhya
PpS. p. 499.
2. ream tantravyakarape paf,casamkhya prapHbakam J
gakatayanadovonfl dvltrimSat khapdak&b smrtnh 11 And so on
3 Cp Footnote on BT. p 3, L. 13.
4 "tatha naradlyagikjayamapi |
anantyagca bhavot pOrvo hyantaSca parato yadi [
tatra madhyo yamasti?tbot savarpab pOrvavarnayoh II
tatha rktantra ..asutrayat |
"anantyantyasamyogo madbyo yamali pQrvasya gupali", l|
gabdakaustubha 1, 1. 4, 143 Cp ItT. p 2 h 14
5 (1) Cp. Pamulyas'iksa, Bonaros 1887 p. 4 "knm khura gum ghuro lti |
anantyantyasamyogo nmdbyo yamab pfirraguns llyandavrajirapi II RT
P. 2 L, 14 "naradandavrajyormatena yamo varnagaroa iti vidhlyate II
34 The four noteworthy points.
caudavrajih." The author of Siksaprakasa also quotes one
passage from the treatise in the name of Audavraji. How to
solve this conflict ?
Before entering into details, we may note the following
points : —
(1) Audavraji 1 is quoted on the rule 59 of the RT.
(2) ^akatayana is quoted in the first line of the first
Prapathaka.
(3) The first Prapathaka looks out of place. It is not
counted as an integral part of the treatise by the
* Ms. B.
(4) The text contains numerous rules, that seem out of
place in a Pratisakhya. They rather belong to the
subject of general grammar.
(2) 'tatha, caudavrajih. "sprstam karanam spars'anam j dusprstatnantasth-
anam i! p. 5 = RT. p. 3. L. 1.
(3) "kathampunaranusvaradvayam | hrasvadirghabhedeneti bruinali | tatha
caudavrajih | "anusvaravam am ityanusvarau hrasvadirghau dlrghfiddh-
rasve varna iti." p. 6 = RT. p 2, L. 15.
(4) "nimesakala matra syadityaudavrajih" p. 10 It is not found in
the RT.
(5) "audavrajirapi" sparsavargasya sparsagrahane ca jfieyam | vargasya gra-
hanam | sthanesvityadhikara iti". p. 12-RT. sutra 1,3. According to this
the commentary also was written by Audavraji himself, which is wrong,
as will be shown later on.
(6) "tatha caudavrajih | ayogavaha ah iti visarjamyah x ka iti jihvamuli-
yah | x pa ityupadhmanlyah | am ityanusvarah | p. 13-RT. p. 2,
L. 12. Note the difference in the reading.
(7) "dvau nadanupradarmu" ityaudavrajih" p. 17-RT. 3, L. 3. Note the
difference in the reading
(8) "Svaso ghosanamtrtiyat prathamanamaghosas'caturthanayugmah sosma-
namit!". p. 18 = RT. 3. 3. Note the great difference between this and RT.
t is very significant that the author of the gloss refers to Audavraji,
ymnaka and Panini alone. The close relation between the three has been
noted by me in details.
1. Cp. also footnote on 60.
The technical terms of the KT and ST
35
Let us remember these points and read the colophon of
the Ms B It runs —
"iti rktantra\>akaranarp fakafayanadibhih krtam"
Does it not clearl> show (a) that iaakatayana \\a« the
chief author of the treatise (It) and that, besides lum, other-
too had their share in it '
It is significant that our trcati«e invariably ends with
the sutra "svaro'nantyah" \uth which the Samatantra begins,
and that the two are generally mentioned together Besides,
there runs a remarkable affinity between the technical term-
of the two This will be clear from the following —
The technical terms of the RT and ST may be con-
veniently divided into three classes 1
(1) Artificial words
(2) Mutilated words
(3) Technical words
(1) Artificial words —
Terms RT sOtras ST sotras,
ad = padamardhlya 112,143 1 10 1
an = padadi 71, 77 III 7 8
khid= padopantlya 145 1 9 7, II 4 10, V 8 9
cu = dirghlbhavati 247, 255 1 10 3
na = padantlya 148 V 4 1
=an = samyoga 27, 49, 269 1 8 4, V 4 3
Such words are found in Samatantra in a larger number
Cp gi, ]i, di, di, bi, as names of the first five notes, ta tnmatra,
nu samprasarana, iil padanta, uii parvanta and numerous
others Burnell has shown that the remarkable peculiarity of
both Rktantra and the Samatantra is that they have no pan-
bh&sa, and hence, it is necessary to gather the meaning of
these terms from the very scanty commentaries, written upon
them
1 I owe the list of words to Bni null, Bl pp LI-LTI
36
The technical terms of the RT. and ST.
A larger class is : —
(2) Technical terms formed by mutilating real words:. —
Terms
RT. siitras •
ST. siitras
ayuk= ayukta
252
ara = aksara
256
ud = udatta '
51. 156
X. 2. 1.
rk = arcika
154
V. 1. 2; VII. 6. 7.
ksa = aksara
282
-
gra = grama
113
gha = dlrgha
50, 93, 103, 112,
1. 7. 3; II. 7. 6; IV.
113, 148
11. 1.
ghu = laghu
236, 237
VII. 3. 8; 63
thya= kanthya
147
V. 1. 3
ti = gati
29. 110
II. 5. 2
da = pada
69. 272
V. 1. 7
bha = stobha
150
III. 3. 9; IV. 10. 6
ma = virama
54
mat = prakrtimat
64
masa= samasa
1. 125
II. 3. 1
yuk = yukta
90
1 8 8- TI 9 5- III
3. 4
ra = para
270
1. 7. 4; 8. 10.
= repha
107
V. 4."3
?, = svara
26, 68, 93,119,169,
II. 8. 3: 10. 1: V.2. 5.
257, 265, 269.
rana= karana
181
rga = varga
13
II. 5. 3; 10. 1; V. 5.1
lup = lopa
83. 156
vat = udattavat
52
vya = talavya
241
VI. 2. 8 " '
san-
dhya= sandhyaksara 95, 8
stha = antastha " 169
sya = rahasya C. 277
sva = hrasva 25, 150
smin= usman 245 '
Audavraji, the author of ST., RT., and PpS.
Tradition and SamasarvanukramanI 1 assign Samatantra
to Audavraji; and the name Puspayasas Audavraji occurs in the
Vamsa brahmana 2 in the list of the illustrious ancients of the
SV. literature. This Audavraji, the author of the Samatantra
may be identical with Audavraji, the originator of the Ek-
tantra.
Now there goes another, very important analytical
treatise on the SV. by the name Puspasiitra, where the word
'puspa' is strongly suggestive of Puspayasas (Puspayasas Auda-
vraji), and the suggestion is strengthened by the colophon of
a Ms which reads "audavrajikrtam puspasutram."
One thing more. Connected with the system of techni-
cal terms and symbols, just noted above, there is the way of
quoting or reproducing samans, which is distinctive of the
SV. analytical literature. In this respect we find a very close
resemblance between the RT., ST., and PpS. To illustrate
the point I append herewith a list of abbreviations from the
PpS.:—
chidra =
achidra.
patya =
apatya.
sita =
asita.
rupa =
vairupa.
leya =
kaleya.
tani =
! samtani.
kranda =
abhikranda.
varta =
abhlvarta.
gostha =
: angirasarn gostha.
I. Samatantra ra prav»k§jami sukliartham samavedmam i
audavrajikftam suksinam sarmglnam sukhavnhsm u
Samasarvanukramanl,
But cp, "Samagramin in the Perface to Ak§aratantra:—
"grantho'yamrktantrapranetah &tkatayanasya samakalikena uuhSniunina
apiiallna proktah | samatantram tu gargyenetysva -> ayamupadi?tali prama
mkaih".
2 Pnspaya^d** auda\rajeh puspa}a^a aud.ivrajih VBr. p. U.
38
Affinity between RT., ST., and PpS.
rupa = anjovairtipa.
arsabha = sakvarsabha.
sistha = ihavadvSsistha.
Here the beginning of the word has been dropped.
There are terms in which the middle portion is dropped.
Such are.: —
janavarta ' = jamadagnerabhivarta.
ksustambha = ksullakavaistambha.
dvihimkadevya = dvihimkaravamadevya.
There are words of which the beginning and end both
are dropped :—
clneda = pratlclnedaka§ita.
tamasa = dlrghatamaso'rka.
mahl = amahiyava.
There are words of which sometimes the beginning is
dropped and sometimes end : —
anupa or vadhryasva = anupavadhryasva. 1
andhl, ndhigava or gava. = andhlgava.
TV pi ^ r t d6tailS CP ' R> Sim ° D> PpS ' 5 ° 3 - 506 ' Bnrne «. Arbr. p. XXX-
IV ; Kl. pp. LI, LIII. That PpS. also belongs to the pre-Paniniyan school of
Sanskrit grammar has been shown by Burnell in "On the Aindra School of
banskrxt Grammarians pp. 27-48; Arbr. p. XXIII. R. Simon holds the same
view. Cp. PpS. p. 503. See also Belvelkar, Syst. Skt. Gr. p. 11.
(b) Just as in RT. ra represents para, svara, and repha, so in the
p gava -andhlgava, but also ganfigava ; tamasa = dlrghatamaso'rka, but
a so daxrghatamasa and so on. It is noteworthy that in the three treatises the
use of such dipped words is not very consistent, the full word is often used;
and we also have more than one abbreviation of the same word. The RT. and
he commentary also present a number of technical terms, which are, more or
Such a 7eT! t0 S5matantra ' the P-tisakhyas and some grammars.
nistha r J k?aia ' afi8 °' abh y asta > abhinidhana, upasarga, ekavacana, namin,
8parfa',vn r i tyaya,matra ' l0pa ' varna , vibhakti, sandhyaksara, saoiasa,
Aindra Sch! ?* Accordin S *° Burnell these words belong to the
on noint 1 T^"" Md theSQ COU P Ied * itb *e evidence, shown later
' P ° mt t0 an earJ y origin of our treatise.
The h> pother-
39
a£u or bhatgava* SSubharga\a
id mam or simUira = idanlm sarnK^n
gaurf, rlv iti or \ ita = gaurt\ ita
satra or sahl>a = sitrasahl} a
Thus the close similarity of technical tcrm«, occunng in
the three treatises, arid the identit\ of the names of their
authors, coupled with the statement of Vl3r lead us to assume
that the three analytical works were composed, in their
original form, b> PuspayaSn Auda\rajt
Starting on this clue, we ma> formuhtc our h> pothers
regarding the authorship of the RT as follow s -
1 The original Rktantra was composed b> Auda\raji,
who also wrote Samatantra, PuspasQtra and a grammar on
bhasa, which had a distinct set of Pratjahara** 1 , is is shown
by the first Prapajhaka of the RT
1. Cp "s*mni\e;onyah, pratyahaMrthah" HT p 3 I i On Mah/lbli*
$ja (1 1, 2 1 10) Na,,e** makes an important statement "pire tu parnhftkarlbh*
topi "o ityova sutram I A r yam prMMUhjndiprasiddh^hnladipratyahari»Iddh
yartham". There are no PratjMiaras in anj tf the PrMMakhya, excepting
ours that rotors to the Pratj&h&ra ol "ra"and * ha Cp ' pratyftharo rahayor
vargasatyfiS. « p 3 L 10 Hat in the miin hodj of the text v-o do not (tnd
my pratyaharfl even In tho HT This indicates that the original text wasdifT
erent from the presont one nnd tho eamo wa* bisod, more or loss, on tho
system of PratyShans This Prapathaka also refers to tlie Brahmftrjiji, which
is supposed to be prehistoric Cp Nfige<a (MBIi I 111 2 132) - asyRgarasi
inamn&yasya vfigvya^aharajanakasya nn ka<cit kart&stjo\imo\a\oda p^raropar
yena smaryam&nam [ ' Hari quoted bj Nft B o<n According to tho tradition
these were repealed by God 3h a himself by sounding Ins tabor Tho doUco
at anuhandhas or signification endings, so advantageously usod by Piipini is
also found here, which shows that the device olroidy existed and PAnini
only utilised it to its nttnost limits Cp Pat on VII 1 18 athaifl pur\a<iu
tranirde<o jam. | pOr\asutre ye' nubandhA tia tairihetl aryftni kriynnte' Cp
Belvelkar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p 23 AjlUitru the commentator
onPpS (Benares 1922 p 170) attributes a statement to Aud&uaji which is
not found xn the RT. 'ovam hi sawatyaudavrajih | n&myan.tadupa$arg&ccet>e
karah t the quotation may be from Audavrajis grammar on bM?l which is
not available it present
40
The three stages of the RT.
2. Ssakatayana, who may have been a follower of
Audavraji, revised Audavraji's work, both in RT., where he
quotes him by the name (53), as well as in grammar, where
the former's work was superseded by that of the latter. The
main sphere of 6akatSyana's activity lay in grammar, hence
it is futile to hunt all his doctrines in the RT.
3. Yaska refers to ^akatayana, and traces of ^akata-
yana's analytic grammar are detected in Yaska's Nirukta. To
this we shall come later on.
4. Panini drew from Saktayana ; and it unfortunately
happened that his work acquired by its great merits such a
celebrity as to supersede almost all that had been written on
grammar before him, so that except the names and some
particular rules of former grammarians, we have little left of
this branch of literature ; except what occurs occasionally in
the Pratisakhyas. That Panini knew Prati§akhyas had been
indicated long ago by Bohtlink and Miiller ; and it has
been proved now by a comparison of Panini's sutras with
those of the Prati§akhyas, that Panini largely availed him-
self of the works of his predecessors, frequently adopting their
very expressions, though he quotes their names only in cases,
where these have to serve as authorities for certain rules.
In all the sutras, that are found parallel in RT. and Panini,
the latter may owe a debt to the former.
5. Simultaneously with Panini 2 or a bit later than him,
there occured the third and the final redaction of our treatise
1. For details cp, Miiller, Anc. Skt. Lit. p. 150-51.
2. For the date of Panini cp. Colebrook, Asiatic Researches VII (1801,
Essays ed. Cowell II p, 4) ; Bohtlink II p. XIII; Both, zur Literatur und
Gesch. desVedap 16;Reinaud, Memoires de 1' institute de France XVIII. p.
88; Weber, Indischen Literatur Geschichte p. 199; -with Weber agreed Julien
and Miiller ; Westgaard, tiber den altesten Zeitraum der Indischen Geschi-
chte p. 72 ; Goldstucker, Panini pp. 225-227 ; Benfey Geschichte der Spracb
^issenschaft p. 48 ; Bhandarkar, Ind. Ant. I p 16 ; Burnell, Aindra School,
p. U; Pischel, ZDMG. XXXIX p 95: Peterson, Detailed Report (1883 and his
The third stage of the RT. 41
and the authors of this stage expressly quote £aka|ayana'.
It was probably at this juncture, that a good many rules,
rules that have little to do with the SV. or any other Veda,
were showed into the text 5 . These are not referred to by
Sauristou in his Laghurktantrasangraha.
6. The authors of the third stage drew their new
material, possibly from Panini, who had borrowed this from
sSakatayana and other predecessors', or more probably from
Sakatayana himself, whose work may have been partly known
to them. This becomes clear from a minute comparison of
RT. 189-211 with Par/mi VI. 1 135—157, the latter being
much more systematic and comprehensive. To cite only
some. RT. 209 provides for "rathasya" alone, while the cor-
responding rule in Panini (VI. 1. 15. 7) covers as many as five
examples, the word "rathasya" being included in them. Panini
VIII. 3. 48 is a clear improvement on RT. 128. RT. J5G-157
have been reduced to one sOtra (VI. 1. 138) by Pilnini. The
results of such a testing will be found scattered through the
notes, and these need not be summed up here.
There also occur a few rules in the RT,, which are
clearly meant for bhasa, and for which Panini has no corres-
ponding rules, while Katyayana has. Cp. 9G, 97, 98,99, 103, 106
with their notes. Some of them seem to be an improvement
upon Katyayana, but can be explained otherwise as well.
Take, for instance 96, which reads "bhasayam nlparayoh."
paper on Ao.city8Iafik5ra of IC$emondr» (1885) ; cp. also Bombay Sanskrit Series
31 p. 51; Sylvian Levi, Journal Asiatiqao 1890 pp. 334-240; Liobicb, Pacini
p. 108 ; Wjnternik, Gesch, der Ind. Litt, Ill p. 383 ; Bolvalknr, Syst. of Stt.
Or, pp. 13-18 : Intermediate Proso Selections 1924 on Nir, 29; Schroodor
ZDMO. 33. p. 177 fi ; 49 p. 145 ff. (169) ; HiUobrondt, Dm ABwUMsngra
uber das Alter des Bgveda ZDJIG. 1927 pp. C7-08.
1. In the beginning of the text "gvfiso nfida jti gakatayanah"
2. Cp. BT. 189-211 and others with my notes. Cp. 107-109,
3. Generations of grammarians must have precodod Pfipini, Cp. Kiel-
horn, Der Grammat&er Panini, NGGW, 1885 p. 189; Llobich, Pacini p. 10.
42 RT. as a whole is prior to Panini and Katyayana.
This would apparently imply that there are many instances,
where the a is followed by 'ni' and that the rule prescribes
vrddhi for them. Katyayana, on the other hand, limits the
scope of the sutra to three words i.e. "svairl", "svairinl", and
"aksauhinl", because these may have been the only words to
which the vrddhi phenomenon was applied. A similar expla-
nation can be offered for 106, which reads "vatsataradfnamrni."
This also would, prima facie, imply that there are many in-
stances to be covered by the rule. There may have been many,
but since in Katyayana's time these were only six, he incorpo-
rated them into a vartika, and thus made the scope of the sutra
precise. And the comparison of the sutra with the ^rtika
strongly suggests that the author of the former was
not at all acquainted with the vartika. Had he known it, he
would have, for brevity's sake, begun the sutra with pra, which
comes first in the vartika, and not with vatsatara, which stands
second in the vartika, and is also a larger word.
In fact, this kind of comparison seems no safe founda-
tion for any chronological edifice, and we must accept its •
results with the utmost caution. Such similarities are bound
to occur in any class of works, and they need not be more than
an ancillary to the chief argument, otherwise corroborated.
Were we to rely solely on them, we shall be forced to admit
that Yaska was later than Panini and even Katyayana 1 . The
sutras of Panini nowhere make any provision for the formation
of words like "aparna", which occurs in Nirukta (III. 2), nor
did Panini know Yaska's explanation of "siirya" (RV. X. 85. 20)
by "suryasya patnl." Panini, must therefore, have preceded
Yaska, else how to account for such an omission in Panini ?
Katyayana removes the last defect by prescribing the vartika
"suryaddevatayam cab vacyah" (IV. 1. 48). We shall have to
1. Yaska was prior to Panini. Cp. Liebicb, Panini p. 19; Zur Einfuh-
rung in dio Indische einheitnische Sprachwissenschaft II p 28 ff. For details
see Both, Nir.J. 17 p. 38; Hillobrandt, Die Anschanngen uber das Alter des
Rgvoda. ZDMG. Vol. 81 pp. 68-69.
The three stages of the PpS.
43
presume that the author of the vartikas came after Yaeka and
utilized his material. But the first omission is not rectified
even by Katyayana, who explained "prarna" and "rnarna" etc.,
but not "aparna" of Yaska. This would lead us to assume
that Yaska came after Katyayana". But this is all fallacious,
and none would entertain this even for a moment.
The utmost, that we can conclude from such similari-
ties, is this, that these rules may have been taken from Panini,
and Katyayana into the Rktantra, but the former too borrow,
ed them from Sakajayana and others. Thus the process is
reduced to this : —
!§3ka$3yana
I
Panini and Katyayana
Ftktantra.
and although Rktantra may owe some rules to Panini and
even to Katyayana, yet both of them Btand indebted to
Sakatayana, and 6akafayana was the author of Rktantra.
The hypothesis does not cause surprise, when we note,
that exactly the same thing happened with regard to the
authorship of the PuspasOtra.
Nothing was definitely known about the authorship of
the PpS. The Ms. C, used by R. Simon ascribes it in the
end of its fifth and sixth chapters, to a Gobhila 3 , while the S.
Indian Mss. distinctly attribute it to Vararuci*. One Ms.*
however, connects the treatise with Audavraji and this is signi-
ficant. Weber 1 threw out a suggestion that the extant PpS.
is not the work of one man, but is a sort of collection done by
1. Cp. Belvalkar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p. 7.
2. Muller, Anc. Sanskrit Literature p. 210; R, Simon, PpS. p. 19,
3. Burnell, Arbr. XXIII ; B. Simon, PpS. p. 495.
4. Cp. A Catalogue of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Adyar Library,
Vol I. p. 51, 25 e. 11 Grantba character.
5. Akad. Vorlesongen uber Ind. literaturgeschichte 1876. p. 91.
44 Pratisakhyas have suffered extensive modifications.
several hands. R. Simon, has beautifully, shown the succes-
sive stages, through which the work has passed 1 .
Now the name Puspayasas 2 seems strongly suggestive
that the work originated with Puspayasas, a renowned acarya
of the Samavedins, and was successively revised by Vararuci,
Gobhila and others.
The same thing is told about Samatantra, of ' which
thirteen Prapathakas are commonly known. But one Ms. -has
two additional chapters called Sanjnaprakarana, and Burnell
reports that two more, called Parvaprakarana are known in
the Gujrat 4 .
And it is very doubtful whether any one of the Pratisa-
khyas has escaped extensive modifications, by alteration, inser-
tion, and addition, since its first substantial construction. The
fact that in the RPr., all that is essential to make out such a
treatise, is contained in the first half, or chapters MX, is strong-
ly suggestive of the accretion of the later chapters ; and the
character of more than one of them lends substantial sup-
port to this suggestion 5 . That the VPr. has suffered interpo-
lation and addition is the opinion of Whitney, and the same
may be held with regard to the TPr. and CA. It has been
suggested: that some of the many citations of authorities
found in the TPr. G have been interpolated in the Pratisakhya,
1. R. Simon, PpS. 499.
2. unadisphutikaranaya vararucina prthageva sutrani pramtani | tadyatha
"krvapajio". Vimalasarasvati, the auther of Rupainala, quoted by Belvalkar,
Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p. 27.
3. The practice of using half names is common.
4. Burnell, Arbr. XXIV,
5. Whitney, CA. p. 580.
6. For the list cp. Whitney, TPr. p 430. According to Whitney all the
metrical rules (TPr. XVII. 8 , XXII, 14, 15, XXIII. 2, 14, 15, 20, XXIV
5, 67) are to be taken as unauthentic.
They are found in other parts of the Pratisakhya literature. In the same
category may also be included the seventeenth and eighteenth chapter and
all that follows the Wentyfirst on the score of the content alone. For details
see Whitney, TPr. pp. 432-433.
The three stages of Nirukta
45
after the latter ceased to be a mere body of practical rales
for the guidance of a school, and in virtue of its thoroughness
and comprehensiveness, gained more the character of a phone-
tic treatise on the Black Yajurveda, and was used in other
schools than that which originated it.
And a similar story is told about Yaslca's Nirukta. Dr.
Lakshman Sarup, who has based his edition of Nirukta direct-
ly or indirectly, on the evidence of sixty-five manuscripts',
has beautifully shown the three 5 stages of interpolation's
in the Nirukta, where the successive interpolations from
one family to another, are invariably the amplifications of the
text of a shorter recension, and arc thrust between sentences,
wherever the text could be so enlarged with impunity, as, for
instance, in multiplying the number of etymologies and attri-
buting them all to Yaska'."
The same thing was suggested by Goldstucker' v. ith regard
to the Unadis of Panini. The list of Unadis was first drawn
up by Panini on the basis of Sakatilyana, 5 and was afterwards
modified and corrected by Katyayana. The extent of the
1. Samp, Nirukta, Introduction p, 23
2 Sarup, Rirukta, Introduction pp. 19-20 The. throe stages are ;—
(a) D, l, o tbo commentary ot Durga, wntton botoro lbs addition ot
Panamas and embodying tho wlmlo toxt ot the Nirukta, roprosonts
the earliest period, I o. about the thirtoontii contury A. D.
(i| S i e the Mss. of the shorter rocension, roprosonts a poriod later
than D , when the Pari'is^s, woro added, but not divided m yet
into different chapters and whon the old orthography was still
prevalent
(c) A i o. the larger recension, roprosonts a still later ponod, whon
the Pans'istas had been divided into chaptors and old orthographj
had gone out of use.
3. Sarup, Nirukta p 22 An analogous example is furnished by Latin
literature ; the text ot Sorvius, tlio commentator of Virgil, Bbr.ws a similar
threefold amplification
4. Panini, his place and c, pp 170, 181 (reprint 130, 139).
5. Cp "namanyakhyatajanlti s*akatayano nairuktasamaya$ca,"Nir, I 13
Cp Nagela, £s. on P. II. 3, I. Goldstucker does not notico this
46 Do we find any trace of Sakatayana's views in the RT. ?
changes introduced by Katyayana into the text, was so
great, that ultimately popular tradition came to credit him
with its sole authorship 1 . And this is exactly what we have
noticed with regard to RT. Here also the tradition has practi-
cally forgotten all about the real author of the text, and has
, consequently credited Sakatayana with its sole authorship.
vr
But assuming that Sakatayana was the' chief author of
the RT. the question arises "do we find any trace of his opinions
in it f
Before we attempt an answer to this, let us see, what
works Sakatayana wrote besides the RT.
1. Sakatayana wrote a treatise on the pada text, pre-
sumably of the SV. This is shown by the remark of the
commentator on CA. (preface to the IV chapter) which runs :
samasavagrahavigrahan yathovSca chandasi Sakatayanah I
tfnam V n k?yami CatU? - ayaip padaip n5 makhyatopasarganipa.
2 Sakatayana wrote an analytic grammar. This is
shown by the following
(a) Yaska 3 says
"namanyakhyatajaniti sakatayanah I"
(b) Katyayana 4 puts the same thing as :—
"nama ca dhatujamaha nirukte vyakarane sakatasya
catokaml"
atha krval^r^*"^^ vara ™^ prthageva sutrani pranltani | tady-
kar W te T [Z^™^ ™*<>r of Rupamala, quoted" by Be J
Ear, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar p. 27.
di S ranotinl' A8 f &ka f 7ana hM S6t f0rth £o1 ' Ved0 ' the °°mbination, division, and
IT n ol-f ™ r^' S ° WfflI set f ° rthtt ° quadruple word, nonn,
verb, prepos ltlon and parties Whitney in the preface to the IT. Ch.
3 ' Nir 1. 12,
4. On Panini TTT q i ,.
from a verbal root. discussing that every word is derived
References to Sakatayana's treatise on P/ionetics 47
(c) Patafijah 1 says : —
"3akatayana was an analytic grammarian, as opposed
to the etymologist."
3 £akatayana wrote a treatise on phonetics The
following are the references to it —
(a) CA. 11. 22 states that according to Sakafayana final >/
and v, are uttered with a slighter effort* The same thing
is ascribed to him by Panini'.
Now Rktantra, while treating the loss of y and v, re-
cords the view of Naigt in 159, of other teachers in ICO, and
at the end states, that the half of y and v is omitted, which
is another way of saying the same thing. This view is not
attributed to any particular teacher. Does it not show that
the treatise represents, in the main, the doctrines of Ssakata-
yana, and belongs to a school, which denv es its name from him?
(6) RPr (VIII. 16) states that according to £akatayana, in
the diphthongs, e and ai, a forms the first half, and i the
second ; in o and au, « forms the second half. The
view is implied in 15. Cp note on it
(c) VPr III 9 states that according to 3akatayana, tisarja-
■niiya becomes a sibilant before a sibilant 5 The pheno-
menon is prescribed by 177
(rf) VPr.HI. 12statesthataccordingto§akatayana,i!(«rr|an7!/a
becomes jihvamullya before gutturals and upadhmamya
before labials 6 . This is, in a way, covered by 177.
(e) Parum VIII 4. 50 attributes to §akatayana the view,
that duplication does not take place in a group of more
1 On PSmm III 3 115. Cp NogeSa, S§ on Panmi III 3 1
2 "le&vrttiradhlspar&im gaka^ayanah OA II 24
3 "Vyorlaglmprayatnatarah ^katayanasja Panini VIII 3 \Q
4 "sandhj-esiakaro'rdhamilc-ira nllaram yujornkara ill <akatayanali'
RPr XIII, 39
5 "pratyayasavarnam mudi liakatajanah ' VPr III 9
<S "jftvaumliyopadhmaulyan ^UtayanA VPr III 12
48 References to ikkatayana's treatise on Phonetics.
than two consonants 1 . The phenomenon is indirectly
prescribed by 169. Cp. note on it.
(f) VPr. III. 86 states that according to ^akatayana 2 the n
of "pari nah" becomes "n". In SV. "pari" is followed by
"nah" only twice (SV.II.560; 11.247). The former is cover-
edby274, but the latter is not; and this seems exactly the
reason why 3aurisunu specially cites "pari nah Sarma-
yantya" as an example of cerebralisation in his Laghu-
rktantra sangraha 3 . It is just possible, that a rule to
that effect existed in the RT., which somehow or other
fell out of it.
(<?) VPr. IV. 5 states that according to Kasyapa and 3aka-
tayana, m and n are dropped, when they are followed by r
and a sibilant 4 . In the note on 112, 1 have shown in details
that n, when preceded by a long vowel, is reduced to
visarjamya, and the same, when preceded by a, becomes
y by 117, only to be dropped by 158; but when preceded
by other long vowels, it is reduced to r by 115, and an
anusvara is inserted by 185 between the vowel and r.
The VPr. seems to refer to this phenomenon.
(h) RPr. 1. 16 states that according to 3akatayana, the first
of a class can only be a final 5 . Rule 172 moves against
it and the reason is shown later on.
(i) the commentator on CA. (IV. 30) cites a verse 0 which
according to Whitney means "3akatayana mentions five
cases m which ya suffers separation by avagraha ; it is
1. "triprabhrtisu f&katayanasya" Panini VIII. i. 50.
2. "pari na iti gakatayanah" VPr. Jjj t gg
3 Benfey has in both the places "pari nah". But RV. and JS. read
pan nah'. Cp. Caland JS. Einl. p. 34.
4. "lopam kagyapa Sakatayanau" VPr. IV. 5.
"prathamara 6akatayanah" RP r> i jg
pancaivavagrahanaha ya gabde ftkat&yanah I
antodattah padatvarp ca vibhaktyarthe bhavettu ya „
5.
How is it that Panini stands indebted to 6akatayana. 49
accented as final, and stands as an independent element,
when used as a case ending. The examples cited by the
commentator are not found in the SV., and there being
close affinity between ^akafsyana and Jsaunaka^Sakata-
yana may have laid down such a rule in his treatise on
pada text, more or less, applicable to both the SVPp.
and AVPp.
Thus barring one or two cases, all the views, attribnted
to 6akafayana, that concern phonetics are easily traced in the
RT. And it was rather presumptuous on Burnett's part that
he, without instituting a searching enquiry into the matter,
hastily pronounced 1 : —
"But of all his (iSakatayana's) distinct and peculiar
opinions, there is no clear trace in the text. The text is attri-
buted to sSakafayana, but so far as we know the teachings of
that old grammarian, there is no adequate reason for suppos-
ing this ascription to be correct."
VII
Bote is it that Panini stands indebted to S&katltyana ?
While discussing the authorship of the RT. I stated
that, with regard to the statements which are similar in RT. and
Panini, the latter may owe a debt to the former. It has been
shown in the notes, that the rules 189-21 1 of the RT., are found
virtually in the same form in Papini VI. I 135-157. These
rules have no bearing on the SV., and this suggests, that the
same were added to the text later on. Here one would argue
that the followers of Sjakatayana borrowed these sutras from
Panini and not vice versa. This may be true, but the ques-
tion in that case would amount to this : —
"Are these sutras of PB.nini,his own, or hashe borrowed them
from an earlier grammarian ?'
I. Burnell, RT. p. X.
50 Panini has closely followed the implications of the SVPp.
In the note on 210, I have shown in details, that it was
beyond the ken of Panini to show the formation of those
words, which he regarded as underivative, and that, wherever,
he, in order to make his work encyclopaedias has introduced
their formation into it, he has obviously followed £akatayana;
and this view is emphatically endorsed by Katyayana, Pata-
fijali, Kaiyata and Nagesa. 1 And if we once assume that
Panini borrowed 210 from £akatayana, there is nothing to
prevent us from assuming that, in all the statements, that
concern underivatives, and are found similar in £akatayana
and Panini, the latter owes a debt to the former.
And this is not at all surprising. We have just noted
that Sakatayana wrote a work on the pada text, presumably
of the SV; gave etymologies, that sounded peculiar to others,
and also wrote a work on phonetics. The first two works are
not available, and the extant pada text of the SV. is generally
ascribed to Gargya 2 . Inspite of that, the same forms the basis
of the RT. and exhibits unmistakable traces of £akatayana's
system. Now if we could only show that Panini in his
Unadisutras has closely followed the implications of the
SVPp., we shall have automatically demonstrated the later's
indebtedness to the former.
It is a rule in SVPp. that it does not divide the root
and the suffix, and does invariably separate the prefix: from the
body of the word. Panini has closely followed in his Unadi 3
1. On Panini III. 3. 1 For details cp. Nagesa, on this sutnt.
2. Cp. Durga on Yaska (IV. 4)
"bahvrcam mehanetyekam padani ] chandoganam trlnyetani padani
"ma iha na" iti tadubhayam pasyata, bhasyakarenobbayoli sakalyagargyayo-
rabiprayavatranuvihitau" | Durga lived about the beginning of the 14th
century (L. Sarup, Nir. 29) and as he quotes here the old commentator i.e.
Skandasvamin as his authority, his statement is entitled to consideration
Cp. also Sama-Sramin, Preface to the Aksaratantra.
3. I have already pointed out that Sakatayana was the chief founder
of the Unadiprakriya. Unadis may have existed even before him, but it was,
Psnim has closely followed the implications of the SVPp. 51
the implications of this practice. This will be clear from the
following
SVPp. Pamni.
panthah patastha ca 1 (656).
anikah anihrsibhyarp kicca (626).
isirah isimadU (595).
sthavirah (but
stha t vinh) ajirasi** (595),
vidatham 2 rudividibhyam nit (622).
patangah 3 paterangac (600).
uktham patrnudivaci* (604).
no donbt, he, who at first put them into a systematic form, ag is shown by the
clear statements of Yaska, Katy&yana and Patafijah, Panini, who came some
centuries later, overhauled this list and made definite improvement upon
Sakatayana, The extant UnadiS exhibit unmistakable marks of Panini upon
them. They use saiijnas such as hrasva, dlrgb, pluta, udatta, upadha, lopa,
samprasaraua and abbyasa in the same sense in which Panini uses them.
The elliptical words i.e. anubandhas of the TJnadis are also similar to Pacini's.
Kfityayanft, who came later than Panmi, improved bis work, and the
extent of the changes introduced by KatySyana into the text was bo great,
that ultimately be came to be regarded as the sole author of the Unadis. Cp,
Belvalkar, Syst. of Skt. G r . p. 27.
All the lists o! UnadiB have not yet been published We have only
PafichapadI in the Siddhanta KaumudT, A Dasapadl has been edited by my
friend Pt, Brahmadatta and is now m the press at Benares, The publication
of the complete bst of Unadisutras will open a new and fascinating field for
researches on Indian Grammar.
1. The reference is to SK of H. M, £ivadatta
2 On vtdatha cp. Muller, SBB 32, 350, Bloomfield, JAOS. 19, 2, 12
fi, Geldner, ZDMG. 3 52. 733-61 , "Wackernagel, Altmd. Gr. 1, 108 and
Macdonell, Vedic Gr, p, 23.
3 I do not see any reason why "patanga" has been included in the
bst "samndradi" (CA. IV 40} which negatives the division. Note that
"samudra" is divided into sam [ udra m the SVPp. The Padapatha of
the AV. has been edited m full by Shankara P. Pandit in bis AV, The
Padapatha contains serious errors both in regard to accentuation and the
division of compound verbal forms, as well as in other respects Macdonell,
Vedic Gr, p 4, Cf, also Luders, on krdyota, Vya«afi"ikga p. 55.
52 SVPp. Yaska and Panini, all the three agree.
Panini.
bhrmrdrsio (621)
rsivrsibhyam kit (622)
ubjerbale balopagca (639)
a£eh sarah (619)
bhfmrdrsi* (621)
kameh kidiccopadhayah (623)
inastaSan ta£asunau (624)
These words are not separated in the SVPp,, and ac-
cording to Panini, they consist of only two elements i.e. the
root and the suffix. Now let us see some specimens, where
SVPp., Yaska, and Panini all the three agree : —
SVPp.
haryatah
vrsabhah
• • •
ojah
aksarah
parvatah
kumarah
etagah
SVPp.
atithih
Panini.
rtanyanci* (607)
atma 1
Yaska.
"abhyatitogrhan bha-
vati I abhyeti tithisu
parakulaniti va i"
(nir. 4. 5), The first
derivation accords
with the SVPp.
"atmataterva i apter-
va I api vapta iva
syat I yavadvyapti-
bhfitaitir , (nir.l3.15).
"parsuh sprsateh"
(4. 3).
"parjanyastrpeh i ad-
yantaviparltasya '
tarpayita janyah i
paro jeta va i paro
janayita va i prar-
jayita va rasSnam i
l. For the discussion on tman = atman cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I.
61; Maedonell, Vedic Gr. p. 11. Muller, Anc. Sanskrit Lit. p. 23. note.
parguh
parjanyah
satibhyamaninmani-
nau (637).
sprgeh svanSunau pr.
ca(642). '
parjanyah (prsu seca
ne) (621).
Differences noted
53
SVPp.
naksatram 1
(yajatram)
(vadhatram)
aminaksiyajivadhipa-
tibhyo 'tran (621.)
Panini. Yaska.
(10. 10.) The first
derivation accords
with the SVPp.
"naksatrani naksater-
gatikarmanah i (III.
20) amum sa lokam
naksate i tannaksat-
ranaip naksatrat-
va'mi" (T.B.I. 5.2.
5.6).Butthederiva-
tions"nemani ksatra-
nlti ca brahmanam"
(SRV. 1. 50. 2) and
"na va imani ksatrS-
nyabhuvanniti"(TB.
II. 7. 18. 3) are not
favoured by SVPp.,
and hence are not
followed by Panini.
"ahirayanat i etyanta-
rikse i ayamaplta-
ro' hiretasmadeva i
nirhrasitopasargahi"
(II. 17). The der-
viationfrom\/han+
ais not favoured by
the SVPp. Were it
acceptable to Pp.,
the prefix a would
have been separated.
There are instances, where Yaska has deviated from
the SVPp,, and Panini has followed him instead of the former.
1. MaodonoU, Vedic Gr, pp 38, 74
ahih
ahantlti 1
54
Differences noted.
aksa (sal ksa) aSerdevane (616)
asurasya 1
( = a 1 surasya) aseruran (594).
To cite only a few instances : —
SVPp. PSnini. Yaska.
aksi ( = a I ksi) asernit (624) "aksi casteh i anakteri
tyagrayanah i" (1.9).
Both the deriva-
tions move against
the SVPp.
"aksah I agnuvata enfi-
niti va i abhyasnuva-
taebhiritivai"(IX.7).
"asurah i asuratah"
( na+su+ra+tah).
This accords with the
SVPp. But "stha-
nesvastah I sthane-
bhya iti va I api vasu-
riti prananSma i as-
tah garlre bhavati I
tena tadvantah i" go
against the SVPp.,
because in that case
a will not represent
negation, and hence
would not be sepa-
rated.
viprah (vi I prah) rjrendragra* (607)
PSnini dirives the
word fromVvip.
"putrahi puru trayatei
punnarakam i tatas-
trayataiti vai"This
accords with the
SVPp. Bufnipa-
3. Tho word cannot reasonably be connected with assur, either »s
source or result. Cp. Thomas JRAS. 1916 p. 364.
putrah
( = put i trah)
puvo hrasvasca (637)
Panini rejects SVPp. and Yaska.
55
SVPp.
Panini. Yaska.
ranadva i" militates
against it, and the
same has been fol-
lowed by Panini.
Instances are not wholly wanting, where Panini wavers
between SVPp. and Yaska. To cite only one :—
SVPp.
mitram
( = mi I tram )
Panini.
amicimidUibhyah kt-
rah (637).
Yaska.
"medayaterva"(X.21).
But"mitrahi prami-
tes trayateh i sam-
minvano' dravatlti
vai" accords with the
SVPp.
amitram amerdvisati cet. (638).
(a i mitram) Here Panini derives
the word from V mi
with "tra" as suffix
and not a second
word. ThusPanini's
inconsistency in the
derivation of mitm
and amitra is ob-
vious.
Instances are not wanting, where Panini has rejected
both the SVPp. and Yaska, and has offered his own derivation.
To quote only one : —
SVPp.
usra (u i sra)
Panini.
Panini derives the
word fromyvasand
thus the word is in-
divisible. Cp. "spha-
yi tanci»" (605).
Yaska.
"utsravino syam bho-
gah" Nir. IV. 9.
This reading is adop-
ted by Sayana on
RV. III. 31. 11; bat
56
Panini rejects Yaska and follows SVPp.
SVPp.- Panini. Yaska.
Dr. Sarup adopts
"usravino' syam."
Instances may be found, where Panini has rejected the
SVPp. and has accepted one (which is inferior) of the many
derivations, given by Yaska. To quote only one : —
SVPp. Panini. Yaska.
utsam (ut i sam) udigranthiku£ibhya§- "utsah i utsaranadva i
ca (618). Panini pre- utsadanadva i utsya-
fers to derive the ndanadva i" These
word from V ud, well accord with
which he does not SVPp. But "unat-
consider as prefix. ter va" (X. 9) goes
against it, and the
same has been ac-
cepted by Panini.
Instances are not wholly wanting, where Panini has
rejected Yaska and the authorities quoted by him, and has
accepted the view of the SVPp. The following is most signi-
ficant : —
SVPp.
"agnim" this is
not divided by
the pada text.
Panini.
Panini derives the
word f romVanj. Cp.
"anger nalopagca"
(608).
Yaska.
Yaska offers five
derivations of the
word : —
"agnih kasmat I agra-
nlr bhavati i agrain
yajnesu pranlyate >
angam nayati sarp-
namamanah ' ak-
nopano bhavatlti
sthaulasthivih i na
knopayati i na sne-
hayatiitribhyaSkh-
Panini accepts Yaska only partly.
57
SVPp. Panini
Prathamah prathermasca (645) "prathamah prata-
(Notseparated in the Pp.) mo bhavati" II. 22
There are instances, where Panini accepts Yaska only
partly. To cite only one : —
SVPp. Panini. Yaska.
ahah (a i han) nafii jahateh (603). "ahah kasmSt I npaha-
Panini regards a as rantyasmin karma-
representing nega- nii(,II.20).Yaskade-
tion and not as a rives the word from
prefix. ( = na hlyate, V nr+a which is re-
tyajyata ityahah). jected by Panini.
The derivation ac-
cording to the SVPp.
would be, perhaps,
"na hanyata itya-
hah", which seems
better, as it reflects
the popular conti-
nuity of the cycle
of day and night.
Thus the difference
between the three
grammarians, with
. regard to this word, -
seems to have been
great.
Yaska.
yatebhyo jayata iti
gakapunili i itat i
uktaddagdhiidva I nl-
tat" Nir. VII. 14.
Now in all these de-
rivations, the word
must be divided.
58
Yaska tacitly follows the SVPp.
There are instances, where Yaska offers numerous deri-
vations for a word, but Panini accepts only one, which
accords with the SVPp. To cite only one : —
Yaska offers the following derivations for the word
indra 1 : —
"indrah \ iram drnatiti va i iram dadatiti va \ iram dadha-
• * * • • •
titi va i iram darayata iti va 1 iram dharayata iti va i indave
dravatlti va i indau ramata iti va i indhe bhutanlH va i tadya-
denam pranaih samaindhamstadindrasyendratvamiti vijfictyate i
idam karanadityagrayanah i idam darsanadityaupamanyavah i
indatervaisvaryakarmanah I indanchatrunam darayita va I ada-
rayita va yajvanam u" Nir. X. 8.
Of all these derivations only two, (a) "indhe bhutani"
(b) "indatervaisvaryakarmanah" accord with the SVPp., which
does not divide the word ; and the latter of the two has been
actually accepted by Panini, who forms the word with the
Vidi + ra. Cp. "rjrendragravajra* (607).
That Yaska tacitly follows the SVPp. need no longer
be doubted, and I cite here only one or two specimen instances
to illustrate the point : —
SVPp. Panini. Yaska.
purusa 2 . Yaska offers three
(Not divided in the SVPp.). derivations for the
word : —
"puri sadah i puri
sayah « purayater-
vaipurayatyantah"
(l.£3).
The last derivation
accords with the
SVPp.,and has been
accepted by Panini.
1. Cp. Wackorxiagel, AUind. Gr. I. 157. note.
2. puru?a = puru8a = pur?a. Cp. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I. 51-52.
59
SVPp.
Yaska tacitly follows the SVPp.
Yaska.
Cp. "purah kusan :
(630).
suryah
(Divided only once).
adri
(Not divided in the SVPp.).
hiranya
(Not divided in the SVPp.).
Yaska offers three
derivations : —
"sarterva i suvaterva I
svlrayaterva i"
(XII. 14).
The last ( V'r+su )
derivation accords
with the division.
Yaska derives the
word : —
"adriradrnatyeva I
api vatteh syat"
(IV. 4).
The latter harmo-
nises with the SVPp.
and has been follow-
ed by Panini. Cp.
"adi sadi bho subhi-
bhyah krin" (629).
Yaska states : —
"hiranyam kasmat i
hriyata a yamyama-
namiti va i hriyate
janajjanamiti va i
hitaramanam bha-
vatiti va I hrdaya-
ramanam bhavatlti
va i haryaterva syat
prepsakarmanah i"
(II. 10).
60 SVPp. Yaska and Panini, all the three agree.
SVPp. Yaska.
The first two and the
last one accord with
the SVPp.
Now, let us see some words, which are separated by the
SVPp. and have been accordingly derived by Yaska and
Panini. Such are : —
- SVPp. Panini. Yaska. •
svasti (su i asti) savaseh (638). "svasti i su astlti"
(III. 21).
candre mo dit (641). "cayan dramati I can-
dro mata i chandram
manamasyeti va t"
(XI. 5).
adi bhuvo dutac (642). "ad bhutam i idama-
pltaradadbhutama-
bhutamivanyasya i"
(1. 67). The word
is omitted in the
Index by Dr. Sarup.
"duram kasmat i dru-
tarn bhavati i dura-
yam va i" (III. 9/.
"uccairuccitam bha-
vati" (IV. 24).
candramah
(candra i mah)
adbhutam
(ad i bhutam)
durat (duh i at) durlno lopasca (606).
udi cerdaisih (642).
(for uccaih)
vatapramih ( 625 ). " vatapyamudakam
(which is similar). bhavati i vata eta
ucca 1 (ud i ca)
vatapyaya
(vata i apyaya)
1. Cp. avyayanam CA. (IV 71) which negatives the division of indecli-
nables. The commentator cites "ucca, meat". But cp. Macdonell, Vedic Or.
P- 30. In other respects there is a close resemblance between the Padapathas
of SV. and AV. For instance "prtanasat" is not divided in SVPp, it is also
indivisible in AVPp. Cp. "sanavadante" CA. IV-70. "vispatim" is not divided
in SVPp. p . 19^ j fc is alsQ nofc SQparatod . in A yp p Cp q a jy go, Cf. also
Whitney 1084 a.
Burnell reputed
61
SVPp Pantm Yaska
dapyayayatt i"
(VI 28)
durona (duh i ona) "durona lti i grhana-
ma I duhkha bhava-
nti i dustarpah i"
(IV. 5)
osadhi (osa i dhi) "osaddhayantitt va I
osatyena dhayantlti
v5 1 osam dhayantlti
va ." (IX 27)
upama (upa i ma) (upamirmte'naya) "upamimlte"(III 13)
gavyBti 1 (go I yQti) "goryutau chandasyupasamkhyanam"
a vartika on Panini VI 1 79
sakhi (sa i khi) "samane khyah sa codattah" (635) See how
closely Panini follows the Pp
udaram (u i daram) "udl drnaterajalau pQrvapadantyalopsca"
(642) This is most significant, and makes it
unmistakably clear that Panini has closely
followed the SVPp
These are some of the typical instances, which provoked
Dr Burnell to remark —
"These specimens of the Padapatha of the Kauthumas
are not calculated to give a high opinion of its author or
outhors, who were not even consistent in their treatment of
the words"
But how beautifully cogent and charming does it ail
look, when read in the light of the comparison with Yaska
and Panini ?
It is clear, at any rate, from the above shown compari-
son, that there is a remarkable affinity between the denva-
1 Bulitlmk and Roth analysis gau-uti. Cp also SlacdoneU, Vedtc
Or p 05
62 Contrast between the SVPp. and RVPp.
tions implied by the SVPp. and those given by Yaska and
Panini.
Granting this, let us now proceed with the authorship of
the SVPp. Now, the most glaring feature of contrast between
the SVPp. and RVPp. is this, that, while the former invariably
separates the prefix from the word, the latter, as a principle, does
not do so. This will be clear from the following : —
SVPp.
RVPp.
narTna si -
L> CL L k X i O.'JL "~
Pd.II 1 lldbl
pannasi
durSt :
UUI1 I d.1
aurat
aurone =
J "L. .
= dun i one
durone
utsah :
= ut i sah
utsah
samudram =
= sam i udram
samudram
samatsu s
= sam i atsu
samatsu
samidbhih =
= sam i idbhih
samidbhih
visuvatah =
= vi i suvatah
visuSvatah
sunrtSvati =
= su i nrtavatl
sunrtasvatl
samanam :
= sam i Snam
samanam
pranah :
= pra i anah
pranah
duronayuh :
= duh i onayuh
duronaSyuh
upamSm =
= upa i mam
upamam
samicine =
' sam i icine
samicine •
This shows that the SVPp. regards the prefix as a
virtually independent element, and hence invariably separates
it from the word, while the RVPp. holds the prefix as a mere
ancillary to the word, and so, nowhere makes the like separa-
tion. Bearing this in our mind, when we read in Yaska :—
"na nirbaddha upasarga arthannirahuriti §akatayanal? »
uccavacah padartha bhavantlti gargyah i tadya esu padarthah
prahurime tarn i" (1.3)
we are. irresistibly driven to the only conclusion that the
author of the SVPp. was none else, but Gargya, who was the
chief exponent of this peculiar doctrine. And this assump-
Is the SVPp. in toto the creation of Gargya ? 63
tion is confirmed by the tradition, recorded by Durga in his
commentary on Nirukta IV. 4.
These indications ought to have made Burnell pause
before he wrote down his dictum : —
"Were it possible to conclude that we have in it (SVPp.)
the work of one of the earliest of the grammarians, such as
Gargya, it would deserve the minutest consideration, but
there is not the slightest reason to give credit to the tradition
as reported by Durg5c5rya, nor is there sufficient reason to
suppose that this pada text is even an old work of the kind."
(RT. XXI.)
What a terrible disregard for the tradition ? All that
was based on tradition was torn to tatters, so much so that
the winged words of the Veda, Epics and PurSnas were
shown as no more than a poetic myths Little did the early
Indologists know that a careful comparison of these literary
remains of our forefathers with their monumental inscriptions
would one day help in placing the universal history on a
firmer foundation than before 1 . By this I do not imply that
all Indian traditions are correct and trustworthy, nor do I
think that that claim can be made on behalf of the traditions
of any other country in particular. All what I want to press
home is that the traditions of a country, despite the embel-
lishments which they invariably receive at the hands of the
mythmongering bards, are the bearer of its history and there-
fore must not be, in toto, rejected, unless there be sure
grounds against them.
But admitting that the extant SVPp. did originate with
Gargya, can we emphatically say "It is, in toto, the creation of
G&rgya."
1. Waddet, Makers of Civilisation m Race and History. Preface pp.
XXI, XXIII. though be very often makes sweeping remarks and is not
reliable otherwise as v/ell
64
Anomalies in the SVPp noted.
The answer will be No. And the : reasons are patent.
The word "surya" occurs, in its different forms, 38 times in the
SVPp. Out of 38, 37 times it is not divided, but on p. 80 -
we find "suryasya" split up into "su i uryasya." The fact seems
significant, because this division occurs in the commentary on
the rule 93, and it may indicate that this solitary "su liiryasya"
is an intrusion in the SVPp. from the side of £akatayana.
"samatsu" is not divided on pp.12. 36, but it has been split up
into "sa I matsu (on pp. 47, 177, 199, 222) which militates against
the usual way of analysing prefixes, and Benfey actually
notes "sam I atsu 1 ." "aditya" has not been divided in the pada
text but the derivation offered by Yaska 2 requires separation,
and Burnell has actually noted one case, where the word has
been rightly split up into "a i ditya 3 ." "pari srava" is not divided
(on p. 154), and so is "upamanam 4 "on p.l59."svastyayanlh"isnot
split up, but "svastibhih" has been rightly divided into "su I asti-
bhih." "ucca" is divided into "ut i ca", a division accepted by
Yaska and Panini, but "nlca" is not split up, though Yaska and
Panini require it 5 , "avadyat" is not analysed, though a here
represents negation, and Panini accordingly analyses it as
"a-vad-ya 0 ". "asikni" is not analysed, though Yaska's derivation 7
1. Benfey SV. Einl. LIX.
2. "adityah kasmat J Sdatte rasan | adatte bhasam jyotigam |
adlpto bhaseti va, J adite£ putra iti va | " Nir. II. 13.
3. ET. XVII.
4. Whitney (CA. IV 53) has given quite a list of compounds and
derivatives, the division of -which may -plausibly be supposed to have been
neglected by the authors of the AVPp, from uncertainty of etymology, ano-
maly of forms, difficulty of restoring the original constituents, or the like.
He has also noted the discordance among the pada texts of the Vedas in details.
Significant, however, is the difference in noting "samvatsara". The RVPp.
never divides the word, while the AVPp. invariably writes sam ] vatsara.
5. "nicairnicitam bhavati". Nir, IV. 24; "nau dlrgbagca" SK. p. 642
6. * <kutsite vadernani yat." SK p. 644
7. "asita | sitamiti varnanama | tat prati?edho' sitam | " Nir. IV. 26.
Do we find any trace of Sakajayana in the SVPp. ? G5
favours it. "sambaram" has been split up into "fcim i baram",
though the later authorities regard "£mba" as one word',
"nijaghnih I nijaghnih" may be, obviously, explained as, a "-lip
of printing 3 .
Such are the many anomalies in which the Patla text
abounds. Some of them may be the whims of the original
author, some may be attributed to the ignorant scribes 3 and
yet others to the printers.
But the question of vital concern to us, here, is : —
Do ice find any trace of §QhaiHyana in it ?
The answer is Yes. We have already suspected £aka(3-
yana's hand in the solitary "su i Oryasya" in the SVPp. RPr.
I. 3 states that according to Giirgya, the third consonant of
each class is to be used as a final. Instead of following this
rule, the Pada text, adopts the contrary, viz. that of Sakata-
yana, that the first of a class can only be a final 4 . Some of the
derivations, which arc found alike in the SVPp. and the RT.,
may also be attributed to ^akafayana.
One thing more. Yaska states that ^aka(3yana 3 did not
1, 'Mimba iti \ajranaina | fi"atna)atona | e"ata}atona | " Nir. V, 21.
"*iuier6an". SK 631 See also "s*amorZiufc ca" (sambukah G26 and "janorbufc
jambukah 628). In such words the origin of b is obscure Most of tboso pro-
bably coins from a foreign sonrco, Cp Maedonell, Vodic Or. p 3G,
2, Owing to tho ignorance of scribes mistakes crept in the RVPp,
Cf Macdonoll, Vedio Grammar p. C7 (74a).
3, A striking instance of such a slip occurs in tbe commentary of PpS
VII 288, where tbe MS. reads "madhynmayavfirum" for "sandhyamayavaya-
vam (RT. Ill), where R. Simon pots a query mark Cp.R. Simon, PpS. p. G76.
RT. 117 is also (rooted on this sutra of the PpS
1 "tasmadantyamavas&ne trtfyam gargyali spargam." RPr, 1, 15 "prath
mam gaka^ayanah RPr, I. J 6. But cp 172, which presumes tho finals in the
SVPp, as third of tbe series, and not the first The rule camo into ^aka^a-
yana's treatise from the side of Gargya, This will show how difficult it is to
ascertain the value of the discordant facts recorded pellmell
5. "na uirbaddha upasarga arthannirahunti Sakfltayanah" Nir I. 3
66
The Age of the RT.
consider the prefix as an independent element, but the RT.,
based as it is on the extant SVPp., regards it as an indepen-
dent element. Thus, we find a Pada text, attributed to Gargya
and a PratiSakhya attributed to ^akatayana, but in neither
case, the peculiar doctrines, attributed to them, are fully
found. How to explain this ?
While discussing the precise scope of a Prati§akhya, we
noted, that, towards the close of the Brahmana period, the
tendency for generalisation arose, which slowly and gradually
reduced the numerous 3akhas of a Veda to the minimum, and
subsequently led to the unification of the different Pratisakhyas
of a Veda into one. Stretching this argument a little further,
we may assume, that, both the SVPp. and the RT. were much
modified in later times, to suit the then current views of the
Sanskrit grammarians, particularly Samavedins ; and it was,
probably, during that process of give and take, that the fol-
lowers of ^akatayana sacrificed their distinct treatise on the
Pada text 1 , and the followers of Gargya forwent their Prati§a«
khya, thus ultimately effecting the virtual unity of the rival
schools 2 .
VIII
The Age of the RT.
The above-shown arguments make the question of the
age of the RT. a little easy. To start with, the author of
Gobhiliyagrhyakarmaprakaslka 3 and the commentator on
Puspasutra quote its 4 siitras ; and Kaiyata 5 , though not quite
1. ^The followers of ^akatayana went so far as to actually incorporate
one of Gargya's rules into their treatise. Cp. rule 172.
2. That such a thing happened in the case of the AVPp. was suspected
by Whitney. Cp. C.A. IV. 74.
3. Cp. "atha vaco vrttim vyakhyasyamah; idara vaiyakaranaya" GGKP.
P. 122.
4. OnPpS. 787.
5. On Panini IV. 2. 60 "uktharthamiti samalaksanam pratisakhyam
sastramityarthali [ " The reference is not explicit to justify the identification.
Cp. Weber, Ind. Lit. Gesch. p. 91 note. Burnell, Arbr. Int. XX.
RT. is not later than other PratiSakhyas. 67
explicit, refers to it. CaranavyDha' mentions Rktantra and
Samatantra. The £iksa 5 , which is supposed to be the fore-
runner to the Pratisakhya', quotes it, (in the name of Auda-
vraji), and the author of Rktantravivjti 4 , a comparatively late
work, of course, explains the word "smrtah" occuring in the
Naradasiksa as "rktantrakaradibhih smrtii ityarthah." Coupled
with these indications, the assumption, that the author of the
above-named treatises, together with the PuspasDtra, whose
authorship has been till now quite uncertain, was Puspayafas
Audavraji, who is mentioned by the Vamsa-brahmana 11
among the illustrious ancients of the SV., (backed by Caland's
hypothesis' that PuspasDtra is earlier than the Oha and Ohya-
ganas), makes out our treatise, in its original form, older than
other Pratisakhyas. And this does not cause any surprise,
when we note, that, while the Pratiiakhyas are devised to
preserve the text of the Samhitas, and arc, therefore, in a way,
theoretic, the Samatantra and PuspasDtra were created to
turn the re into samans, that were sung at the Soma-Bacrificcs,
which existed long before the Pratisakhya literature arose.
Thus, Rktantra, in its original form, is not later than other
Pratigakhyas.
1. "tatra kecit rnnartktantran] samatantram sa&ifladhatulaks.an&mK.L
vidhlyante | " Saunaklyacarapavyuba IT. On Safijuadhfitulak^apa cp. Caland
PVB. Introduction p. VII. On tko Caranavyfibas cp. Wober. Ind. Lit. Goscb,
105, 157; Bnrnell, KT. p. XIII. note; Mullor places those FarUiftas lator than
the Sutra period. Cp. Anc. Skt. Lit. p. 249.
2. Cp. footnote on CO.
3. The Sik?&s are primitive. Hang, TJber den "Wesson pp. 53,63-4 They
belong to PSniniyan school of 8anskrit grammar. Burnell, Arbr. p. XX. eiik-
;aa are modrn. Kilborn, Ind. Ant, V, pp. 1 41 et eeq., The TPr. is oldr
than the Vyasa &°iks.a. Luders, Vy&sas'ik?a, Einl. p. 3-4, 16. Siks.as are fore-
runner to the Pr&tis'&.khyas. 8. Varma, Critical Studies pp. 13-14.
4. Printed in the end; the author refers to8ayana, Cp, notes on Vivrti.
5. "pngpayagasa audavrajeh pngpayaSa andavrajih" Vamfiahrahmana
P. 11.
6 I bave quefltioned its accuracy.
68 Analysis of the RT.
In its second stage, i.e. as the work of Sakatayana, it is
not later than other Pratisakhyas. Sakatayana is quoted by
RPr. VPr./and CA.
In its third stage, the work may be later than Panini 1
and even Katyayana.
IX
Analysis of the RT.
i
1. Introductory and explanatory.
(1) The origin and general mode of production of articulate
sounds.
(2) Enumeration of. vowels and consonants ; definition of
terms (visarjanlya, jihvamullya, upadhmanlya, anuna-
sika, yama and anusvara).
1. And this is exactly what Westergaard concluded about other Pra-
tisakhyas. Cp. Tiber den altesten Zeitraum p. 67. Burnell egrees with it. Cp.
11T. p. LVI. But Burnell rightly adds that all the Pratisakhyas, in their
original form, existed before Panini, In his essay on the Aindra School of
Grammarians he concludes "Aindra was the oldest school of Sanskrit gra-
mmar and that Aindra treatises were actually known and quoted by Panini
and others, and that Aindra treatises still exist in the Pratis'akhyas, in the
Katantra and in similar works, though they have been partly recast or correc-
ted," And again. "The Aindra treatises belong to a system older than Panini's,
though here is perhaps reason to believe that not one of them is, as a whole,
older than the grammar of the last "
I may add, that Audavraji was perhaps one of the greatest exponents
of Aindra School of grammar, who had the three analytic works of the SV.
to his credit; and it seems significant, that the majority of the acaryas, quoted
by TPr., belong to the Samaveda, because their names occur in the $rauta
sutras of Latyayana and Drahyayana. Itseems that grammar was the favourite
subject of the Samavedins ; and they, in this sphere, commanded the respect
of the followers of other Tedas, as is evident from the close relationship, in
which GA. stands to it; and the fact was apparently known to the authors of
the gloss on PaninTyagiksa, who very often cites the authority of Audavraji,
Nnradufiksa and other Samavedic works, to the virtual exclusion of others.
Analysis of the RT.
69
(3) IcUra forms names of letters; a forms name of consonants;
epha forms name of r ; mode of formation of alphabetic
sounds. Different order of letters for the sake of pra-
tyahUras.
it
(1) General provision for the irregular sandhis in com-
pounds.
(2) Mode of utterance of vowels and consonants. 2-10, satn-
svcida and nigara have no particular sthctna 11; mode of
utterance of nUsikyas 12; varga, with first mute, forms
names of series 13; sonants 14-16 ; the last of the series
is nasal 17; final simple vowels nasalised 18; long i nasa-
lised 19.
(3) Division of syllables 20-26.
(4) samyogasaajiia.
(5) ' Quantity of consonants, 28 ; gati 29 ; e and o 30.
(6) vrttis-i.e. druta, madhyama and vilambitu 31-33.
(7) Pause between two individual sounds 34; between two
vowels 35; in the pause 30; at the end of the half of a
verse 37; in gathas 38; in saman 39.
(9) The length of a short vowel 40; definition of arm 41;
standard of a long vowel 43; of vrddha 44; in vais-
varya 45.
(10) Definition of absara 46; a consonant also is akSara 47-48;
a short vowel is equal to a long one, if followed by con-
junct consonants 49; a long vowel is called guru 50.
(11) Accentuation 51-60.
Hi
(1) Prescription of ekatruti after a circumflex 61 ; there is
only one main accent (udatta) in a pada 62 ; padas are
the basis of samhita 63 ; euphonic alteration takes place
in the padas 64 ; 65 there is only one main accent
72
Peculiarities of the RT.
Under the head of the conversion of Pada text into the
Samhita, the Pratisakhyas differ only on minor points, or in the
treatment of special cases, pertaining to the text, with which
each of them has to deal.
These are the subjects, which every Pratisakhya must
tackle, and these are the only ones that are found in our
treatise. In these matters our Pratisakhya bears a close
affinity towards the CA. and Whitney has rightly observed the
close relationship between the two. Both the treatises make
extensive use of the ganas in the construction of their rules.
The three Pratisakhyas, in order to show the precise ken of a
particular sandhi, register long series of examples, while these
. two Pratisakhyas catch hold of the minute principle underly-
ing them all, and with its help, cover in one rule, what takes -
so much space in others. It is this, which has enabled them,
while including so much, to be at the same time, so much the
briefest. These, and the like things approaximate them to "
the character of the general Sanskrit grammar,' as principally
and finally represented by Panini.
Whether these peculiarities, will help - in any way, to
determine the chronological relation of our treatise to the
other Pratisakhyas, is very doubtful. The discussions held by
Burnell, on this point, have yielded nothing positive. Those
were based, more or less, upon the assumption, that the
appearance in a Pratisakhya, of a phase of grammatical treat-
ment, or its phraseology, is an evidence of its later composition.
"But the fallacious nature of this argument was long ago
shown by Whitney, and it carries, indeed, absolutely no weight,
so far as our treatise is concerned, in which, composed as it
is, by an acarya, who was himself a great grammarian, the
introduction of such characteristics was quite unavoidable.
Other Pratisakhyas, including, of course, CA., treat the
construction of pada text, krama text, and sundry other
RT. is less comprehensive then the RPr. 73
things 1 . The SV. has no Krama text ; there may have been
supplementary treatise on the SV. Pada text, and tradition
actually ascribes such a one to the author of the RT. himself.
~ The construction of Krama text is not touched upon in
TPr., and the portions of RPr. and CA. which concern it, may
be later accretions in the text. The construction of the Pada
text, receives still more scanty notice, being entirely passed
over in the TPr., and represented in the VPr. only by a few
scattering rules, relating to the special cases, analogous with
those, found in the earlier chapters of the CA. The VPr.
alone, treats the subject at large. Of matters, that are more
or less, akin to the substance of the PratiSakhyas, yet
omissible without detriment to their completeness as Prati-
iakhyas, Whitney has given a detailed comparison, and the
same need not be recounted here.
It is, thus, seen that the Rktantra does not materially
differ in its range of subjects from the other treatises of its
class. That it often oversteps the limits of the subject, which
it is treating, or of the sphere of such a work, as we claim it
to be, or in which it contemplates euphonic combinations for
words, that are not found in the SV., has been shown at large
in notes. I have also shown in details in the notes, that
this treatise, like the CA., is less comprehensive than the RPr.
I would, however, refer to the phenomenon of the elision of a
after e and o, which I particularly reserved for this place : —
In the Benfeyin text of the SV. this sandhi may be
tabulated as follows : —
A. a retained after e or o 463
B. o elided after e or o 145
Total 608
1. For details 6ee "Whitney, TPr. 429 ff.; Luders, Vyasas'jks.a 23 ff. ;
Rafigacarya and Shama Sastri. TPr. Int. p. 35 fi. As for the ATramn path* in
TPr. cp 'LudetB, VjMai*S& p. 35 S ; Yfhltmy, TPr. p. 4M.
74
ahhinihita sandhi in the SV.
For (a) cf. I. 5, 6, 11, 13, 24, 29, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 43,
45, 51, 52, 53, 58, 61, 67, 75 (3), 82, 87, 93, 100, 104, 107, 108,
111 (2), 133, 142, 143, 148, 151, 155, 159, 174 (2), 179, 185,
194, 200, 203, 230, 237, 252, 259, 263, 274, 279, 283, 284, 290,
296, 298 (2), 304, 306, 320, 323, 324, 326, 339 (2), 341, 348,
353, 357, 358, 362, 365, 367, 376, 378, 385, 389 (2), 397, 399,
417, 419, 421 (3), 422, 426 (2), 435, 439, 448, 449, 461, 463,
475, 482, 484, 485, 488, 491, 496 (2), 499, 502, 510, 511, 512,
513, 514, 522, 525, 526, 529 (3), 531, 532 (2), 533 (2), 534
(2), 538, 543 (2), 545, 546, 547, 554, 555, 557, 558, 559, 562,
565, 577 ; II. 8, 25, 27, 37, 43, 47, 50, 51, 53, 64, 75, 85, 88,
89, 98, 99, 100, 103, 105, 108, 117, 118 (3), 125, 150, 156, 158,
160, 168, 171, 173 (2), 181, 188, 196,200, 210, 222, 223, 225,227,
228, 229, 231, 236, 237, 239, 24 ', 252 (2), 258, 262, 263, 270,
274, 279, 281, 282, 286, 287, 288, 303, 305, 311, 312, 315, 316,
324, 330, 331, 333, 338, 365, 367, 370, 371, 372, 373, 383 (2),
384, 385, 390, 391 (2), 393, 412, 428, 430, (3), 439 (2), 442,
443, 449, 456 (2), 457, 464, 467, 470, 477, 478 (3), 479, 480,
482, 490, 491, 497, 500, 504, 510, 511, 512, 526, 535 (2), 543,
557, 560, 561, 566, 568, 569, 572 (2), 573, 574, 576, 577, 579,
581, 587 (2), 588 (2), 592, 601 (3), 604, 609, 612, 627, 629,
632, 633, 634, 639, 640, 643, 647, 649, 654, 661, 662, 664, 665
(2), 666, 668, 669, 671,- 673, 675, 678, 686, 689, 690, 691, 693,
699, 700, 701, 702, 705, 706, 707, 711, 716, 719, 720, 723, 727,
729, 735, 736, 737, 740, 745, 749 (2), 758, 760, 762, 764, 766,
767, 772, 773, (2), 776, 778, 787, 795, 801, 803, 805, 806, 825,
826, 831, 848, 852, 853, 857, 859, 861, 866, 873, 874, 875, 885,,
888, 890, 893, 894, 897, 898 (2), 902, 908 (2), 909, 913, 916,
917,919,928,937,938,953 954, 956,957, 958,961,963,964
(2), 965, 967, 970, 973 (2), 974, 976 (2), 996, 998 (2), 1007,
1022, 1032, 1042, 1043, 1067 (2), 1072, 1074, 1078, 1085,
1092,1093 (3), 1094 (2), 1095 (2), 1100, 1101, 1102, 1104,
1105, 1108 1109, 1111, 1113, 1115, 1119, 1128 (2), 1129, 1132
(2), 1133, 1134, 1136, 1138 (2), 1139, 1152, 1153, 1155, 1160,
abhinihita sandhi in the SV.
75
1161, 1162, 1172, 1175, 1177,1197, 1199. 1200 (3), 1206,
1207, 1213, 1221 1224 and 1228.
For (b) cf. I. 7,49 84,88, 97, 98, 132, 146, 219, 233,
239, 246, 250, 263, 272, 279, 302, 304, 305, 314, 326, 342, 351,
352, 371, 402, 408, 411, 412, 413, 414, 425, 466, 478, 503, 510,
519, 521, 523 542 (2), 548, 555, 563, 584 ; II. 2, 9, 27, 30, 43
(2), 55, 58, 103, 114, 126, 138 148, 163, 182,221,226,232, 243,
271, 276, 281, 298, 318, 329, 332, 341, 344, 352, 353, 380, 382,
415, 450, 451. 463, 501, 541, 547, 549, 568, 569, 599, 603 (2),
605, 609, 617, 622, 625, 630, 645, 662, 692, 699, 700, 723, 769,
773, 774, 783. 788, 791 (2) 792, 805 ( 2) 827, 839, 888, 894,
902, 919, 920, 922, 930, 949, 955, 958, 972, 997, 1044, 1065,
1071, 1077, 1090, 1106 1108, 1134. 1155,1156, 1177,1180,
1195, 1202, 1208 (2), 1215, 1224 and 1225.
It will be clear from the above-table that the common
custom with regard to this sandhi in our Samhita is to retain
a; the retention being to the omission as 3 J-l. In the interior
of a pada, it is practically always retained, excepting of
course, passages, where a is followed by v (not joined with
consonants that make it liable to doubling), in which case the
omission in inevitable, so much so, that, while in the RV. 7. 32.
27 we read 'ma givaso avakramuh' noted as a counter example
on RPr. II. 40, the text in the SV. has 'ma sivaso' vakramuh'
(II. 105); thus showing that the tendency of omitting a before
v, which had stray exceptions in the RV., became a universal
law in the S V. This kind of elision occurs 19 times in S V., though
in all the passages the metre requires retention of a. In SV.
I. 584 ; II. 318, 447, 622 the a is elided, not because it is fol-
lowed by v, but because here it stands at the beginning of a
p5da. in which situation omission is certain, barring, of course,
a few cases noted in 77 and 82.
According to Whitney's counting the proportion of
omissions to retentions in such a situation in the AV. (cf.
76 abhinihita sdndhi in the SV.
CA. II. 54) is 5 to 1 ; and' in the Rgveda it is still larger 1 ; and
there may be very few instances in the earlier portions 2 of
that text, where the custom of omission of a at the beginning
of a pada is not followed. The practice is scrupulously
observed in SV; and our treatise notes only I. 450 'citro agni-
rmarutah', where the a, standing at the beginning of a pada, is
not elided.
As for the instances, where a standing in the interior of
a pada is elided, it notes (a) SV. I. 466 = RV. 2. 22. 4, noted by
RPr. II. 42; (b) SV. I. 519 = RV. 9. 107. 6 not noted by Uvata,
but covered by RPr. II. 37. But here comes one difficulty, and
it is this, that, if we interpret, the word "nyune" (RT. S.76) in
the way, we have already done, this rule (RT. 78) becomes super-
fluous, because in both cases the metre requires omission, as in
'pado 'sya' (ArS. 34, 35), and if we understand by the word only
"antahpadam" and no more, then we have no provision in our
treatise for several omissions. Leaving aside SV. I. 413, 414,
425; II 1090, 1108, which seem of one and the same metre, and
where a stands at the beginning of the second or third pada,
we take SV. II. 773, which reads : —
"te asya santu ketavo' mrtyavo,' dabhyaso janusl ubhe
anu i = RV. 9. 70. 3.
1. ( a) In the RV. it is elided in about 75 percent, in the AV. in about
66 percent of its occurences. In the RV. it must be pronounced in 99 percent,
in the AV. and the metrical parts of the YV. in about 80 percent of its occu-
rences. Cp. Macdonell, Vedic Gr. for Students p. 23.
(b) The- few instances (70' out of 4500) of the elision of a in the RV.
are the forerunners of the invariable practice of post Vedic Sanskrit. Cp. Mac-
donell, Vedic Gr. p. 66. The frequent elision of the a in the written text com-
pared with its almost invariable retention in the original text of the RV.
indicates a period of transition between the latter and the total elision of the
post Vedic period.
2. Cp. Arnold, (Vedic Metre) who divides the collection into five lay-
ers. Against this cp. Keith, JRAS, 1906 pp. 486-90; 1912 pp. 726-9; the Rel.
and Phil, of the Veda. Vol I pp. 3-4.
abhinihita sandhi in the SV.
77
It is a tristubh stanza, the commonest in the RV.,
consisting of four verses of eleven syllables, divided into
two hemistichs; and as the a of "amrtyavo" does not stand
at the beginning of a pada, it should not be elided in RV. ac-
cording to RPr. II. 35 and in SV. according to 76. But while
RPr. II. 37 (Uvata does not note this example there) provides
for the usage in RV., our treatise leaves it entirely unnoticed.
Similar is "ye no amho'tipiprati" II. 700 = RV. 7. 66. 5 (noted
by RPr. II. 42) and "samkrandano' nimisa ckavlrab" II. 1202
= RV. 10. 103. 1 (RPr. II. 41). Then, there is II. 462, which
is incomplete and reads "pravo'rcopa»". The full mantra must
be anything but "pra vo mahc matayo yantu visnave" I. 4G2 ;
and "pra vo mahe mahe vrdhc" I. 328 = 11. 1146. It is not
"pra vo mahe mandamanayandhaso" RV. 10. 50. 1, because
here we have "upa", while the third pada in RV. runs "indra-
sya yasya somukham." At any rate, the a in "pravo'rcopa" is
not a padadi one, and its elision is not noted by our treatise.
Again SV. II. 1224 runs :—
andha amitra bhavata§Irsano' haya iva ■
tesam vo agninunnanamindro hantu varam varam u
The stanza is wanting in RV., but is found in AV. in the
following form : —
modha amitrascarata Strsana ivahayah i
tesam vo agnimodhanamindro hantu varam varam n
Well, if the reading of the text be correct, the example is not
noted by our treatise. Then, there is SV. II. 1225, which
runs : —
yo nah svo 'rano ya§ca nistyo jighamsati »
This occurs in the RV. (VI. 75. 19) with a :—
yo nah svo arano yasca° n
"svo'rano" has been noted by isaurisunu in his Rktantra-
sangraha; and this leaves for us no option but to assume that
the example is not noted by our Pratilakhya.
* 78 RPr. is' entirely free from all over sights.
With regard to this phenomenon, the RPr. seems thorough,
and as far as I have been able to examine the text of the RV.,
I have found that the PratigSkhya covers almost all the cases
of retention and omission. The following examples are not
noted by Panini, but are covered by the RPr. : —
yo'ti 8. 2. 34 = RPr. 11.47; dipsavo'da°7. 104. 12 = 37;yo'
dhvanah 1. 71. 9 =47 ; manaso'dhi 7. 33. 11-47 ; no'dhi 8. 96..
20 = 46. samkrandano'nimisah 10. 103. 1=41 ; yo'nayat 7 = 18.
7 = 47 ; agne'pa° 7. l. 7 = 47 ; agne'bhi* 1. 71. 11 =42 ; gave
'§va° 8. 30. 4 = 37; abodhayo' him 1. 103. 7 = 37 and so oh.
Cp. Benfey, SV. Einl. XXXI.
Thus, there are, to be sure, here and there, points, in the
text of the SV. which are not coverd by the rules of our
treatise, but we have reason only to wonder, that in executing
so immense and intricate a task, as that undertaken by our
treatise, which has strictly boycotted the device of enumerat-
ing individual examples, so frequently used by the RPr. VPr.
and TPr., there should have been so few oversights. Such
oversights have been noted by Whitney in TPr. and CA., and
the same may be found in the VPr., if a thorough examination
of the same is carried out. The only Pratisakhya which
seems free from this defect is RPr., which from the point of
view of dignified style, and the mastery of the material with
which it deals, occupies undoubtedly the first rank in the Prati-
gakhya literature. The results of such a testing with regard
to the RV. and RPr. will be found scattered in the notes on
. the RT., and they need not be recapitulated here. As an
example I would however, refer here to the phenomenon of
lengthening of the final vowels in the RV., which has been
treated in the VII and VIII chapters of the RPr., and which,
upon a minute examination, has been found entirely free from "
all oversights. I append herewith, the full list of the cases of
lengthening in the RV., putting against- each example, the rule
of the Prati§Skhya, which covers it : —
1. Cp. Whitney, TPr. p. 426 and CA. 580-581.
Lengthening in the RV.=RPr.
79
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
P
S..
M.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P. S.
S.
M.
P. S.
18.
4
=
8.
15
32.
5
=
8. 36
1.
9
=
7. 56
21.
2
8.
39
33.
13
=
8. 36
2.
1
8. 49
22.
4
=
7.
45
34.
1
=
7. 22
2.
2
=
7. 6
22.
15
=
7.
33
35.
2 2
=
8. 36
4.
3
=
7. 33
23.
8
=
8.
39
35.
4
9. 6
4.
4
8. 38
23.
11
=
8.
39
35.
11
=
7. 33
5.
1
=
8. 32
23.
13
=
7,
31
36.
2
=
7. 33
5.
10
=
8. 39
24.
15
=
7.
33
36.
13
=
8. 1
6.
6
=
7. 6
25.
7
=
7.
41
36.
13
7. 33
7.
6
=
7. 55
25.
8
=
7.
41
36.
14
=
7. 10
8.
9
=
7. 33
25.
9
=
7.
41
37.
4
=
7. 31
9.
2
=
8. 39
25.
19
=
8.
49
37.
11
=
8. 15
9.
3
=
7. 33
25. 19
=
7.
22
37.
15
=
8. 15
10.
3
=
7. 12
26.
3
8.
15
38.
2
=
7. 33
10.
9
=
7. 33
26.
5
=
8.
39
38.
13
=
7. 6
10.
10
=
7. 12
26.
9
=
7.
33
38.
13
=
7. 31
10.
11
=
8. 16
27.
2
=
8.
15
39.
3
=
8. 39
lb.
=
8. 4
27.
4
=
8.
1
39.
4
7. 26
10.
=
7. 35
27.
5
=
7.
33
39.
7
=
7. 5
11.
3
=
7. 33
27.
7
=
7.
50
39.
7
=
7. 33
13.
11
=
7. 31
29. 1-6
=
8.
16
39.
9
=
7. 33
14.
10
=
7. 33
29.
3
=
8.
31
39.
10
8. 36
14.
12
=
7. 12
29.
7
=
7.
33
40.
1
=
8. 39
15.
2
=
8. 15
30.
6
=
7.
30
40.
3
=
7. 6
15.
4
=
7. 33
30.
8
=
8.
15
40.
6
=
8. 32
15.
5
=
7. 33
31.
5
=
8.
36
41.
6
8. 38
15.
10
=
8. 15
31.
17
=
7.
24
41.
1
=
7. 26
16.
7
7. 33
31.
18
z.
33
41.
5
8. 39
17.
8
8. 39
31.
18
8.
15
41.
6
7. 6
18.
3
7. 33
32.
4
8.
36
42.
1
7. 33
1. This stands lor MapdaK. S=Sutra ; *M = Mantra ; P = Patala ;
S =SQtra.
2. For reasons cp. Macdonell, Vedic Gr, p. 63 o, 1
80 Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S.
M.
P. S.
S.
M.
P. S.
s.
M.
P. S.
42.
6
7. 33
61.
12
8. 40
81.
3
7. 33
44.
1
7. 24
61.
16
=
7. 33
81.
6
8. 35
44.
3
7. 33
61.
16
7. 5
81.
8
7. 12
44.
4
7. 6
62.
2
7. 46 .
81.
8
7. 33
44.
6
7. 33
62.
12
*s
7. 33
82.'
1
8. 39
45.
1
7. 14
62.
13
7. 5
82. 1-5
7. 18
45.
3
8. 39
63.
9
*~?
7. 27
82.
4
—
8. 15
45.
5
mZ
8. 40
63.
9
cz
7. 5
84.
5
8. 39
45.
9
ZH
8. 39
64.
1
8. 39
84.
20
8. 36
48.
1
7. 33
64.
7
*z
8. 38
86.
1
7. 53
48.
5
8. 15
64.
9
8. 15
86.
2
8. 39
48.
16
7. 33
64.
13
7. 26
89,
8
7. 33
49.
2
7. 37
64.
15
7. 33
86.
9
7. 33-
50.
6
7. 46
64.
15
aw
7. 5
86.
01
zz
7. 33
51.
1
8. 15
65.
4
-
8. 29
86.
10
7. 30
51.
8
77*
8. 11
69.
2
=
8. 29
87.
2
*
8. 15
51.
12
8. 15
70.
3
8. 48
87.
4
7. 33
52.
1
8. 13
71.
3
=
7. 6
88.
1
8. 15
53.
1
7. 26
72.
8
—
7. 46
89.
2
8. 38
54.
3
=
7. 33
73.
4
—
7. 33
89.
9
-
8. 34
54.
5
7. 22
73.
9
_
8. 28
90.
5
=
7. 33
54.
7
=
8. 15
75.
2
_
7. 33
91.
8
=
7. 33
54.
9
=
8. 33
75.
5
_
7. 33
91.
15
— •
7. 33
54.
9
=
7. 33
76.
2
8. 40
91.
16
7. 33
54.
9
7. 33
76.
3
_
7. 33
91.
17
— .
7. 33
55.
5
7. 33
76.
3
_
8. 15
91.
19
—
8. 9
56.
2*
=
8. 38
76;
5
—
7. 33
92.
3
=
8. 36-
57.
3
8. 36
77.
2
=
8. 1
92.
15
■Z
7. 33(2)
58.
1
7. 26
77.
2
—
8. 32
93.
7
=
7. 33
58.
9
=
7. 33(3)
79.
7
7. 51
94.
1
8. 36
59.
"6
7. 26
80.
2"
7. 45
94.
2-14
8. 36(2)
60.
5
7. 5
80.
3
8. 39
94.
4
8. 36
61.
12
7. 27
80.
4
7. 33
94.
8
8. 38
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
81
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
P. s.
94. 9
7. 33
94. 12
-
7. 33
95. 11
=
7. 33
96. 9
- '
7. 33
96. 7
=
7. 33
97. 8
=
8. 14
101. 1
=
8. 3C
101. 8
=
7. 6
101. 8
=
8. 15
101. 9
—
8. 36
101. 11
=
7. 31
101. 11
=
7. 33
102. 3
8. 15
102. 4
=
8. 36
102. 5
=
8. 15
102. 6
=
7. 33
102. 7
=
7. 33
102. 10
7. 33
103. 3
=
7. 25
103. 5
=
8. 15
103. 6
=
7. 7
104. 1
7. 7
104. 2
=
7. 26
104. 5
=
7. 5
104. 5
8. 15
104. 7
7. 33
104. 9
8. 36
105. 9 = 7. 49
105. 15 = 7. 42
105. 18 = 7. 7
106. 2 = 8. 31
107. 1 = 8. 34
108.I;6-I2= 7. 33
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
y. b.
c
o.
r. o.
108. 3
—
7. /
3
Q IE
109. 2
=
o. 34
1 90
4
n cn
/. 3U
109. 2
*j 55
1 90
5
o. 4
109. 5
7. /
1 90
Q
O
/. jo
110. 3
8. 36
i ?n
1
/. 0
110. 8
**
8. 31
o
£>
**
n 33
/.
112. 1-23
8. 1
C
7. 0
111. 2
—
7. 14
1 50
1
i
8. 34
113. 1
—
7. 33
1 a.9
1
8. 36
113. 4
7. 7
1 3.9
5
O
8. 15
113. 11
*~
8. 1
1 ^9
A
*T
7. 33
113. 17
n 55
7. 3J
i ao
*T
8. 11
113. 19
—
7. 33
i ao
C
J
7. 6
114. 2
7. 33
i 5a
J 30,
o
7. 7
114. 6
=
7. 53
1 JO,
u
=
8. 35
114. 9
7. 52
133.
7
8. 15
114. 10
=
7. 33
134.
3
8. 29
115. 2
=
7. 45
136.
1
-
7. 19
115. 6
8. 15
136.
1
=
7. 26
115. 6
8. 15
136.
2
=
7. 33
116. 24
=
8. 36
138.
4
8. 1
117. 19
=
7. 33
139.
1
=
8. 4
117. 21
8. 36
139.
1
=
7. 6
119. 9
=
7. 33
139.
7
8. 5
120. 8
=
8. 15
139.
8
7. 33
122. 5
7. 6
139.
10
—
7. 33
122. 11
=
8. 30
140.
1
=
7. 27
123. 4
=
7. 6
140.
1
=
8. 28
125. 1
7. 7
140.
4
—
8. 1
127. 3
7. 23
140.
13
=
7. 44
127. 9
8. 15
142.
4
7. 6
128. 5
8. 15
142.
13
8. 39
129. 2
8. 15
145.
1
8. 15
82 Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S.
M.
P.
s.
S.
TV IT
M.
P.
S.
s.
M.
P. S.
2
=
7.
33
169.
4
o
8.
16
191.
6
=
8. 39
1 A O
148.
3
8.
4
169.
5
=
8.
15
i £ i
151.
7
=
7.
6
169.
8
—
7.
33
II
156.
, 1
7.
33(2) 170.
3
=
7.
12
i />»• «
161.
8
=
8.
32
171.
2
8.
15
2.
9
=
7. 33
161.
8
=
8. 15(2) 171.
4
=
8.
"15
2.
10
—
8. 36
161.
11
=
8.
40
171.
8
=
7.
33
3.
9
=
7. 33
161.
11
—
8.
40
173.
6
=
8.
48
4.
8
—
7. 26
161.
13
=
7.
16
173.
11
=
7.
*
7
5.
6
7. 33
162.
4
7.
33
173.
12
=
8.
5
5.
7
=
7. 54
162.
7
=
8.
39
173.
12
=
8.
15'
5.
8
=
8. 15
162.
18
=
7.
7
174.
1 .
=
7.
33
6.
1
=
" 8. 39
162.
19
=
8.
40
174.
9
=
7.
33
8.
1
—
8. 39
162.
20
=
8.
38
174.
3
=
7.
33
11.
1
=
7. 52
163.
4
=
7.
45
177.
4
8.
15
11.
6
=
7. 33
163.
5
=
7.
33
178.
2
=
8.
15
11.
18
7. 56
163.
7
=
7.
33
178.
4
=
7.
33
11.
21
=
7. 32
163.
13
=
7.
6
178.
4
=
8.
38
12.
5
=
8. 15
163.
13
=
7.
33
179.
5
8.
15
13.
1
=
7. 5
164.
21
=
7.
45
179.
2
=
8.
1
14.
1
-
8. 15
164.
38
=
8.
40
180.
7
8. 15(2)
14. 6,7
7. 19
164.
33
=
7-
33
180.
10
=
7.
22
14.
8
8. 36
165.
7
—
8.
36
182.
1
8.
50
14.
9
8. 33
165.
12
=
7.
7
182.
5
=
7.
33
14.
10
—
8. 15
165.
12
8.
36
184.
2
=
8.
1
15.
1
7. 18
165.
13
=
7.
6
185.
8
=
8.
15
15.
4
7. 7
166.
, 6
=
7.
45
186.
1
8.
38
15.
9
7. 7
166.
8
7.
33
186.
10
7.
6 .
15.
10;
166.
8
—
8.
15
187.
8
7.
33
16.9
166.
13
—
8.
48
189.
2
7.
30
17.9
167.
2
7.
6
189.
2
7.
33
18.9;
167.
9
7.
52
190.
1
7.
25
19.9
168.
8
7.
33
190.
8
7.
33
20.9
7. 33
Lcngllicninp in the RV. ■= RPr. S3
RV.
RPr
T
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
P. s'.
S.
M.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P. S.
17. 4
7. 33
34.
9
-
8.
3S
13.
G
-
7. 32
17. C
7. 4G
35.
3
=
8.
1
14.
4
—
7. 33
18. 7
_
7. G
35.
10
s
7.
7
14.
5
=
S. 3G
IS. 7
_
8. 3G
3G.
2
c
7.
7
15.
3
7. 10
19. 2
=
7. G
3G.
2
=
6.
3G
15.
5
=
7. G
20. 5
M
7. 42
3G.
4
=
8.
3G
IG.
2
—
8. 3S
19. 7
=
7. 33
3G.
4
=
7.
33
17.
1
-
8. 50
19. 8
_
7. 33
3G.
4
=
6.
0
17.
3
=
7. 33
23. 7
-
8. 38
3G.
G
7.
G
17.
5
—
B. 3S
23. 9
_
7. 31
37.
3
_
8. 3S
17.
5
=
7. 33
23. 13
_
8. 3G
37.
3
_
7.
7
18.
1
-
7. 33
27. G
_
8. 38
37.
5
_
7.
33
IS.
4
=
7. 33
27. G
_
7. 33
37.
G
8.
35
18.
3
-
7. 33
27. 14
8. 15
41.
7
_
8.
I
19.
2
=
7. G
25. 7
8. 4
41.
10
7
41
22.
3
7. G(2)
29. 2
_
7. 33
41.
13
_
7
J J
23.
1
7. 33
29. 2
_
8. 30
41.
15
_
o.
24.
2
—
8. . 5
29. 3
8. 1
24.
4
8. 39
29. 3
_
.8. 3G
m
25.
1
_
7. 33
29. G
7. 22
2G.
1
=
7. 7
30. 3
7. 33
1.
1
_
7.
0
2S.
2
8. 15
30. G
_
8. 4
1.
G
_
7.
33
28.
5
=
7. 33
30. 4
7. 33
1.
15
_
7.
33
29.
3
8. 3G
30. 10
7. 27
3.
1
_
7.
33
29.
5
_
7. 33
31. 2
_
8. 15
4.
2
8.
38
29.
5
_
8. 3G
31. 4
_
8. 39
4.
3
_
7.
G
29,
G
7. 33
33. 2
8. 3G
G.
3
_
7.
33
29.
8
7. 33
33. 4
8. 3G
8.
1
_
7.
33
29.
10
_
8. 30
33. 7
7. 43
9.
8
—
7.
14
30.
4
_
8. 30
33. 11
7. 33
10.
3
_
8.
15
30.
G
_
8. 5
33. 8
7. 33
10.
5
8.
39
30.
16
7. 10
33. IS
7. 33
10.
8
7.
29
30.
1G
8. 3G
34. 9
8. 39
13.
3
7.
33
30.
17
7. 33
84 Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S.
M.
p.
S.
s.
M.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P. S.
30.
20
ZZ
8.
33
42.
6
ZZ
7.
12
56.
6
ZZ
8. 36
31.
2
zz
7.
33
42.
6
ZZ
7.
33
57.
3
zz
7. 6
31.
6
zz
8.
8
42.
7
zz
7.
7
57.
4
zz
7. 6
31.
12
ZZ
8.
36
45.
5
—
7.
33
57.
5
zz
8- 33
31. 20
zz
7.
5
46.
2
zz
8.
33
58.
2
zz
8. 15
32.
1
zz
7.
7(2)
46.
2
zz
8.
36
58.
5
7. 23
32.
2
7.
33
47.
1
zz
7.
33
'58.
6
~
8. 40
32.
2
ZZ
8.
35
48.
4
=
7.
7
60.
4
8. 36
32.
2
8.
36
49.
1
-
7.
33
60.
5
8. 38
32.
3
7.
33
50.
1
=
7.
7
60.
5
7. 33
32.
5
ZZ
7.
33
50.
2
=
7.
33
61.
5
7. 6
33.
2
2*7"
7.
6
50.
4
zz
8.
33
62.
1
=
8. 15
33.
3
=
7.
6
50.
4
2Z
8.
36
62.
8
8. 39
33.
5*
ZZ
7.
6
51.
5
zz
7.
33
33.
9
ZZ
8.
4
51.
10
******
7.
13
IV
33..
10
zz
8.
36
52.
7
8.
15
35.
1
zz
7.
33
53.
3
7.
33
1.
8
8. 50
35.
1
zz
7.
7
53.
5
8.
35
1.
10
.8. 16
35.
1
zz
8.
35
53.
5
=
7.
45
1.
19.
7. 6
35.
6
zz
7.
7
53.
6
—
7.
45
2.
14
7. 33
35.
8
7.
7
53.
11
=
8.
36
2.
14
8. 15
36.
1
8.
1
53.
11
—
7.
33
2.
15
MM
7. 33
36.
2
zz
8.
36
53.
14
—
8.
39
3.
2
8. 35
36.
3
zz
7.
33
54.
2
—
8.
36
3.
8
7. 33
36.
3
zz
7.
33
54.
8
—
8.
10
3.
10
8. 15
36.
9
7.
12
54.
5
—
7.
6
3.
14
7. 33
36.
9
-
8.
16
54.
13
—
7.
53
4.
3
7. 33
38.
1
=
8.
36
54.
15
_
7.
7
5.
5
8. 36
39.
1
7.
6
54.
15
7.
27
5.
13
7. 6
40.
1
—
7.
33
54.
17
8.
38
5.
14
7. 33
40.
5
7.
33
54.
22
8.
38
6.
1
8. 1
41.
1
8.
16
55.
2
8.
5
6.
6
8. 15
41.
6
7.
12
55.
3
7.
6
6.
7
7. 33
Lengthening in the RV.
= RPr.
85
KV,
RPr.
RV.
S. M.
P.
S.
S.
M.
6. 7
7.
26
18.
13
6. 11
8.
1
19.
1
7. 2
7.
15
20.
5
8. 2
8. 29
20.
9
9. 7
7.
55
20.
10
10. 1
7.
55
21.
3
10. 2
7.
15
21.
10
10. 3
7.
33
22.
5
10. 7
8.
50
22.
6
12. 4
8.
15
22.
6
12. 4
7.
10
24.
8
12. 6
7.
16
25.
3
15. 5
8.
15
26.
1
15. 7
7.
6
26.
7
16. 1
8. 36
27.
2
16. 9
7.
6
28.
a
16. 16
7.
5
OR
c
3
16. 17
8.
15
29
16. 20
7.
26
29.
A
16. 21 ;
30.
J
17.21;
30.
g
19.11;
30
03
20.11;
31.
a
21.11;
31
Jim
A
23.11=
7.
26
31
Jim
e
16. 17
8.
15
31
Jl .
0
16. 18
8.
15
31
D
iS
16. 20
7.
33
31
Q
O
18. 2
8.
15
31
o
O
18. 3
8.
36
31.
J}
18. 4
7.
10
31.
13
18. '5
7.
10
32.
1
18. 9
7.
33
32.
10
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P c
IT. O.
7.
33
32.
15
c an
7.
33
33.
6
8. 36
7.
6
34.
3
7 n
7.
33
34.
8
O. OD
7.
27
35.
4
7, 33
7.
5
35.
8
Q ac
0. 35
7.
33
36.
4
7. 33
8.
16
36.
5
8. 30
8.
16
36.
7
o. 15
7.
33
36.
8
8. 39
7.
6
36.
g
8. 38
7.
22
36.
g
8. 38
8.
36
38.
5
/. D
7.
33
38.
8
Q it
o. 15
8.
15
39.
3
8. 36
7.
23
41
^i .
a
J
=
7. 33
7.
33
so
n
y
7. 33
8.
15
43
^Jm
a
7. 5
7.
43
a
8. 15
7,
30
43
D
=
8. 1
8.
15
44.
1
1
=
7. 22
7.
33
44.
3
=
7. 22
7,
43
44
=
7. 6
7.
43
4fi
1
7. 32
8.
33
no.
2
=
7. 52
8.
15
o
7. 33
8.
15
J LP.
p
o
8. 36
7.
26
CI
Jl,
0
8. 1
8.
15
51
JL.
=
7. 46
8.
29
51.
7
8. 15
7.
55
54.
3
8. 15
8.
16
55.
6
7. 33
8.
36
56.
3
7. 33
86
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV. RPr.
S. M. P. S.
58.
2
=
8.
36
58
JO.
o
4
Q
O.
3fi
V
1.
A
4
o
o.
1 J
1.
C
J
Q
o.
30
4.
7
Q
o.
1 A
10
o
J.
7
7
04
A
4.
e
=
7
7
c
J.
4
7
<07
4/
7
4
7
JJ
7
4
Q
0.
1 J
7
j
7
J J
7
7
o
O.
i J
n
y.
7
p
jy
1U.
A
0
7
/.
aa
JJ
1 j
7
4U
i a
10.
1
7
/.
q •?
jj
1 A
ID.
4
n
/.
00
1 a
10.
e
=
7.
00
1 7
1/.
4
7.
33
1 7
17.
c
5
™"
7.
33
no
42.
1
™ "*
7.
33
no
44.
4
mm
7
38
oo
42.
2
7.
33
O 3
4 J.
1
~"
8.
39
23.
4
8.
15
24.
1
8.
36
24.
1
7.
6
24.
3
8.
39
24.
3
7.
33
25.
1
7.
6
RV.
RPr.
Q
M
T"> O
P. b.
26
7
7. 00
26.
8
7. 33
27
•J
7. 33
40.
•3.
j
8. 36
a
*j
8. 15
2Q
8
0
—
7. 33
3n
7
8. 4
3D
7
—
7. 33
01.
1 3
—
7. 26
39
04.
A
U
—
7. 7
39
J4.
1 9
1 4
=
7. 33
33
J
—
7. 33
'33
J J.
7
/
—
7. 33
35
7
/
—
8. 39
35
S
O
—
f> /in
8. 28
38
1
X
7. 33
JO.
5
j
—
7. 26
4-1
7
—
8. 28
41
X J
—
7. 33
4-1
14.
7. 6
4.1
17
1 /
—
7. 33
T"4.
A
U
=
8. 36
4.9
t4.
1 1
11
7. 56
4-9
1 3
IO
8. 4
42
15
1 j
7. 6
4-3
TO.
8. 35
4.3
TJi
Q
O
—
7. 6
4.4.
Q
y
7. 45(2)
4.5
*r j.
A
4
—
8. 15
a e
45.
5
=
8. 36
45.
6
8. 32
45.
6
8. 36
45.
9
7. 6
RV.
RPr.
s
M
P. b.
49
5
0. 40
51
5
7. 33
51.
13
7. 22
52.
1
H Ol
7. 33
52
3
7 ai
/. ji
52
5
7. 30
52
11
X X
7. 33(3)
52
13
X J
•~
7. 33
52
15
X J
7. 33
S2
lfi
xu
— •
7. 33
j j.
5
j
8. 15
54
7
X
—
8. 15
54
5
8. 36
54
<j
7. 33
54
A
u
- •
8. 31
54
10
X *J
—
8. 36
54
15
X J
7. 46
54
1 5
l J
8. 38
55
5
j
8. 31
j j.
7
8. 38
55
j j.
Q
O
—
8. 36
j j.
in
1U
7. 6
57
0
4
— •
8. 40
57
7
—
8. 38
57
j/.
p
0
8. 38
JO.
/l
T"
—
8. 36
5«
JO.
Q
a
—
8. 38
5Q
oy.
1
1
7. 33
5Q
jy.
j
8. 38
59.
6.
- '
7. 6
61.
1
8. 15
61.
8
8. 15
61.
14
7. 45
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr. 87
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
P. S.
S.
M.
P. S.
66. 4
=
7. 33
1. 6
8. 36
16.
18
—
7. 33
73. 1
=
7. 23
1. 9-
8. 36
16.
30
7. 33
73. 4
=
8. 1
2.- 9
=
7. 55
16- 41
=
7. 19
70. 4
=
8. 28
2. 2
=
8. 15
16. 43
7. 33
73. 8
=
8. 1
2. 7
=
7. 33
16. 44
=
7. 6
74. 1
=
7. 33
2. 11
7. 6
16. 44
8. 40
74. 3
=
7. 6
3. 2
=
8. 35
16. 45
=
7. 33
74. 5
=
8. 8
3. 3
=
7. 33
16. 48
7. 46
74. 6
=
7. 33
4. 1
=
7. 33
17.
1
=
7. 33
74. 9
=
7. 17
4. 8
=
7. 33
17.
3
=
7. 33
78. 8
=
7. 33
5. 4
=
7. 33
17.
13
=
7. 33
79. 3
=
7. 33
6. 1
=
7. 6
18.
8
=
8. 36
79. 8
=
7. 24
8. 1
=
8. 40
18.
8
=
7. 26
79. 9
=
7. 33
8. 7
=
7. 33
18.
11
=
7. 26
82. 4
=
7. 33
9. 6
=
8. 31
18.
13
7. 22
82. 7
=
7. 22
10. 5
7. 33
18.
13
=
7. 23
83. 1
=
7. 6
11. 6
=
7. 33
18.
15
=
7. 33
83. 7
=
8. 36
12. 5
=
8. 7
19.
12
=
8. 11
83. 8
=
8. 36
14. 6
=
7. 6
19.
12
=
7. 15
83. 10
=
8. I
15. 1
=
7. 17
20.
8
=
8. 36
85. 1
=
8. 36
15. 5
=
8. 39
20.
12
=
8. 33
85. 5
=
7. 17
15. 9
=
8. 15
21. 10
=
8. 49
85. 6
7. 17
15. 13
=
8. 10
22.
5
=
7. 25
85. 7
=
8. 15
15. 15
7. 51
22.
8
=
7. 33
85. 8
=
8. 15
15. 18
=
7. 56
23.
7
=
7. 33
87. 5
=
7. 46
16. 2
=
8. 40
23.
8
=
7. 52
87. 8
=
7. 33
16. 3
=
7. 54
23.
9
=
8. 15
87. 6
8. 39
16. 43
=
7. 31
24.
2
=
7. 33
87. 9
7. 33(2)
16. 6
=
7. 24
24.
9
7. 17
16. 11
=
7. 30
25.
1
=
7. 17
VI
16. 12
7. 6
25.
2
8. 34
16. 16
7. 17
25.
3
8. 36
1. 2
7. 33
16. 17
7. 49
25.
7
8. 15
88 Lengthening in the RV. - RPr.
xv V .
T?Pr
Jtvlrr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr
S. M.
P. S.
S.
M.
P.
S.
s.
M.
P. s.
25. 7
8. 36
45. 27
7.
52
63.
10
_
8. 36
25. 9
7. 33
46.
3
7.
33
65.
4
8. 36
25. 9
8. 36
46.
9
7.
33
65.
6
7. 33
26. 1
7. 39
46.
10
8.
15
66.
5
7. 5
27. 7
7. 17
46.
11
8.
15
66.
5
7. 26
28. 6
8. 36
46.
12
8.
15
71.
3
7. 33
29. 6
7. 33(2)
47.
7
7. 33(2)
75.
8
7. 49
30. 2
7. 33
47.
14
7.
53
75.
11
7 45
30. 3
7. 26
48.
17
8.
35
75.
17
7 36
30. 4
_
7. 6
48.
19
7.
50
32. 2
8. 36
49.
4
7.
6
VII
V X X
32. 4
7. 6
49.
10
7.
25
33. 5
7. 33
49.
11
8.
36
1.
4
7 45
36. 1
8. 36
49.
15
7.
33
1.
20
7 33
36. 4
MM
8. 36
50.
7
8.
15
1.
25
7 33
37. 3
7. 26
50.
9
7.
33
1.
24
8 "36
38. 3
7. 42
50.
11
8.
36
2.
1
7 33
38. 5
7. 33
50.
15
7.
33
3.
3
7 6
39. 5
7. 33
50.
15
8.
40
3.
8
7 33
40. 1
8. 36
51.
3
7,
6
6.
5
7 7
40. 1
7. 33
51.
5
s
3R
7.
1
7 33
40. 4
7. 33
51.
6
o
O.
jD
7.
7
7 33
41. 5
8. 36
51.
6
8.
15
8.
7
7 33
42. 2
7. 33
51.
13
7.
10
9.
5
7 6
42. 2
_
7. 40
51.
14
7.
10
10,
3
7 6
42. 4
8. 39
51.
15
8.
15
10.
4
8 39
44. 9
7 33
51,
15
7.
33
11.
3
7 33
44. 15
7. 6
52.
7
7.
33
11.
4
7 33
44. 17
7 10
/ • x w
56.
2
8.
15
15.
1
8 39
44. 18
tit \j
8 15(2)
56.
6
7.
33
15
X U •
13
7 32
45 1 1
O. ti7
59.
1
8.
29
15.
14
7 ?Q
45. 14
8. 39
61.
6
7.
50
16.
8
7. 33
45. 23
8. 15
61.
6
7.
33
18.
17
8. 36
Lengthening i:
RV.
RPr.
RV.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
18. 21
=
7. 33
30. 4
18. 24
=
8. 3G
31. 2
18. 25
=
7. 33
31. 2
20. 3
=
7. 33
31. 4
20. 0
=
7. 26
31. 10
20. 7
=
8. 40
31. 12
21. 1
=
7. 33
32. 7
21. 0
=
7. 54
32. 7
21. 9
=
8. 15
32. 8
22. 1
=
7. 33
32. 8
22. 3
=
7. 33
32. 9
22. 4
=
8. 59
32. 24
22. 4
=
7. 33
32. 25
22. 4
=
7. 33
32. 25
22. 8
=
7. 2G
32. 20
23. 1
=
8. 36
33. 2
23. 4
=
7. 6
34. 19
24. 3
7. 6
33. 4
24. 6
=
7. 33
36. 9
26. 4
=
7. 33
37. 5
26. 5
-
7. 33
39. 7
27. 1
=
8. 35
40. 7
27. 2
=
7. 55
42. 2
27. 2
=
7. 33
42. 5
27. 4
-
7. 26
43. 5
28. 1
=
7. 42
45. 3
28. 5
8. 38
46. 1
29. 1
=
7. 33
48. 4
29. 2
7. 17
48. 4
29. 3
-
7. 33
54. 1
29. 4
8- 15
55. 7
30. 1
: 7. 33
56. 1
30. 2
: 8. 40
' 56. 7
i the RV." RPr. £9
RPr. RV. RPr.
P. S. S. M. P. S.
= 7. 33 56. 15 = 7. 5
= 8. 15 56. 21 = S. 36
= 8. 10 50. 22 = S. 15
= 7. 13 57. 4 = 8. 30
= 8. 9 57. 7 = 7. 6
= 10. 40 58. 1 = 8. 36
= 7. 33 60. 3 = 8. 15
= 8. 39 GO. 10 = 8. 38
= 7. 33 01. 4 = 7. 33
= 7. 33 G2. G = 7. 33
= 8. 3S G3. 5 = 7. 45
= 7. 43 G3. G = 7. 33
= 8. 39 G7. 1 = 7. G
= 7. 33 G7. 10 = 7. 33
= 7. 33 G9. 2 = 7. 32
= 8. 36 G9. 2 = 7. 33
= 8. 48 G9. 8 = 7. 33
= 8.36(2) 72. 3 = 7. G
= 7. G 74. 4 = 7. 5
= 7. 33 74. 5 = 7. 33
= 7. 33 75. 8 = 7. 33
= 7. 33 77. 4 = 7. 10
= 7. 33 77. 4 = 8. 36
= 7. 10 79. 4 = 8. 36
= 7. 33 83. 2 = 7. 45
= 8. 15 83. 5 = 8. 15
= 8. 36 83. 5 = 7. 33(3)
= 7. 33 88. 2 = 7. 15
= 7. 38 88. 5 = 8. 36
= 8. 38 88. G = 8. 15
= 7. 37 89. 1-4 = 7. 33
= 7. 15 89. 3 = 8. 39
= 7. 33 90. 1 = 7. G
90
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S.
M.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P.
S.
s.
M.
P. S.
90.
1
=
7.
33
2.
28
7.
6
12.
3
=
7. 46
92.
3
7.
6
2.
41
=
7.
33
12.
17
8. 36
93.
6
7.
26
2.
32
—
7.
23
12.
19
=
7. 33
93.
7
=
7.
6
2.
>4 St
42
=
7.
33
12.
22
=
8. 36
96.
1
=
8.
o s-
36
3.
1
7.
33
13.
3
=
7. 33
97.
7
7.
33
3.
1
—
7.
33
13.
5
8. 13
97.
8
=
8.
36
3.
8
—
7.
33
13.
7
8. 39
98.
4
=
7.
33
3.
9
—
7.
46
13.
7
7. 33
100.
*
I
7.
33
3.
10
=
7.
46
13.
7
8. 36
102.
3
=
7.
35
3.
11
=
7.
53
13.
14
8. 1
103.
2
=
8.
36
3.
12
=
7.
53
13.
14
7. 33
103.
3
=
7.
33
3.
13
=
7.
10
13.
20
8. 32
103.
15
7.
33
3.
17
7.
33
13.
25
7. 52
103.
15
8.
36
* 3.
18
=
8.
39
13.
25
8. 36
4.
1
7.
33
15.
6
7. 22
VIII
4.
1
7.
23
15.
6
—
8. 36
4.
4
=
7.
7
15.
12
8- 13
1.
1
8.
15
4.
8
=
8.
40
15.
13
8. 36
1.
12
7.
33
4.
10
=
7.
33
16.
1
=
8. 15
1.
16
7.
33
4.
11
=
8.
32
16.
10
7. 6
- 1.
17
7.
33
4.
12
=
7.
45
16.
12
8. 33
1.
19
7.
32
5.
33
7.
6
16.
12
=
7. 6
1.
21
8.
15
6.
18
8.
39
17.
1
8. 39
1. 25
7.
13
6.
32
8.
39
17.
1
—
8. 39
1,
30
8.
15
6.
39
7.
52
17.
4
—
7. 33
2.
1
7.
33(2)
6.
39
7.
33
17.
10
—
7. 46
2.
15
7.
33
7.
9
8.
39
17.
11
—
8. 39
2.
21
7.
12
7.
11
—
8.
16
18.
10
8. 36
2.
23
7.
33
7.
12
8.
15'
18.
11
7. 54
2.
22
8.
15
7.
13
7.
33
18.
22
8. 5
2.
22
8.
1
7.
20
7.
33
19.
1
7. 7
2.
23
7.
33
12.
1
7.
46
19.
20
7. 46
2.
26
8.
15
12.
2
7.
46 •
19.
20
7. 52
Lengthening in the RV. = RFr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
P. b.
19. 23
=
7. 33
24. 25
=
7. 46
41. 2
7. 17
19. 24
=
8. 40
25. 15
8. 15
42. 2
7. 33
20. 1
=
7. 31
25. 21
=
8. 36
42. C
=
7. 33
20. 1
=
8. 36
26. 1
=
8. 1
44. 23
8. 32
20. 3
=
7. 12
26. 20
=
7. 12
45. 1
-
8. 15
20. 6
=
7. 45
26. 23
7. 52
45. 8
7. 33
20. 19
=
7. 17
27. 3
=
8. 5
45. 13
7. 12
20. 21
=
8. 15
27. 4
7. 33
45. 20
=
7. 33
20. 23
=
8. 36
27. 4
=
8- 15
45. 22
-
8. 39
20. 24
=
8. 32
27. 5
—
7. 33
45. 22
=
7. 16
20. 26
8. 36
27. 9
=
7. 26
45. 35
7. 33
20. 26
=
7. 37
27. 10
—
7. 5
45. 38
=
7. 33
20. 26
=
7. 33
27. 14
=
8. 15
45. 38
—
8. 39
21. 6
=
7. 6
27. 18
=
7. 10
45. 40
=
8. 39
21. 7
=
7. 26
30. 2
8. 36
46. 4
8. 15
21. 7
=
7. 33
31. 15
=
7. 5
40. 11
-
7. 33
21. 8
=
7. 33
32. 7
=
8. 15
46. 11
=
7. 26
21. 10
8. 15
32. 17
=
7. 42
46. 25
8. 15
22. 1
7. 33
32. 19
8. 4
47. 1
=
7. 54
22. 4
=
7. 6
32. 23
7. 33
47. 2
=
7. 33
22. 10
—
7. 5
32. 24
=
7. 33
47. 11
=
8. 31
22. 13
=
8. 8
33. 3
=
7. 5
47. 15
=
8. 15
23. 1
=
7. 33
33. 13
=
7. 6
47. 17
7. 33
23. 10
7. 5
33. 17
=
8. 15
48. 6
=
8. 9
26. 1
8. 31
33. 18
=
8. 15
48. 8
=
8. 35
23. 27
=
7. 39
34. 3
=
7. 33
48. 9
=
8. 36
24. 1
=
7. 17
34. 11
=
8. 39
48. 14
=
8. 38
24. 6
8. 15
36. 1-6
=
7. 33
50. 1
=
7. 33
24. 7
=
8. 1
37. 1-6
=
7. 33
51. 3
=
7. 6
24. 11
.=
8. 32
37. 5
=
7. 33
51. 5
=
7. 12
24. 16
7. 33
38. 9
7. 33
52. 8
8. 49
24. 23
7. 33
41. 1
7. 17
53. 4
7. 45
24. 24
7. 54
40. 1
8. 15
53. 6
8. 4
92
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr
RV.
RPr
S.
M.
P.
S.
s.
M.
P. s.
S.
M.
P. s.
53.
6
=
8.
30
75.
13
=
7. 33
93.
21
=
7. 43
60.
2
=
7.
6
75.
16
=
7. 12
95.
2
—
7. 13
60.
6
=
7.
33
75.
16
=
7. 33
95.
3
—
7. 33
60.
11
=
7.
53
76.
7
=
7. 33
95.
4
8. 49
60.
12
=
7.
33
79.
7
=
7. 33
96.
2
8. 36
60.
14
-
7.
39
80.
6
=
7. 50
96.
12
7. 33
61.
3
=
7.
12
80.
10
—
7. 5
97.
7
_
7. 33
61.
4
—
7.
5
81.
1
_
8. 16
97.
8
8. 6
61.
5
—
7.
17
81.
2
—
7. 12
97.
8
„,
7. 35
61.
8
=
7.
23
81.
9
—
7. 5
98.
7
_ .,
7. 33
61.
12
—
7.
40
82.
2
7. 33
98.
11
MB
7. 33
61.
17
=
7.
56
83.
7
—
7. 33
99.
2
7. 33
62.
1
=
7.
19
83.
9
—
8. 15
100.
2
7. 33
63.
5
7.
17
83.
9
_
7. 33
100.
7
8. 39
64.
10
=
8.
39
84.
3
—
8. 39
101.
10
7. 33
64.
ir
=
8.
39
84.
3
_
7. 33
102.
7
7. 6
66.
2
=
7.
7
84.
6
7. 56
102.
14
8 39
66.
7
—
7.
33
85.
9
7. 33
103.
2
7 6
66.
9
—
7.
17
86.
3
8. 15
103.
9
7 6
66.
10
=
7.
17
88.
2
7. 5
66.
11
=
8.
15
89.
4
8. 13
IX
X *
66.
13
=
8.
15
89.
7
8. 36
66.
14
—
7.
33
90.
2
7. 7
1.
5
7 6
67.
6
—
7.
37
90.
3
7. 42
4.
1-10
7 33
69.
16
—
8.
1
92.
9
7. 33
4.
1
7. 33
69.
16
=
7.
32
92.
9
7. 51
4.
2
-
7. 30
70.
9
—
7.
17
92.
18
7. 12
6.
9
7 33
70.
15
7.
7
92.
26
8 15
7.
7
7 33
71.
7
_
7.
33
92.
28
7 33(3)
-9.
7
7 50
71.
10
7.
6
92.
29
7 33
9.
8
7 33
74.
11
8.
39
92.
30
7. 33
9.
8
8. 39
75.
1
7.
12
93.
11
7. 26
9.
8
8. 39
75.
2
7.
6
93.
12
7. 33
10.
1
8. 39
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
93
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
P. S.
s. ;
M.
P. s.
10. 5 =
8. 39
04. 1G
7. 6
87.
9
= 7. 33
14. 2 =
8. 8
G5. 17
=
7. 33
88.
7
= 7. 5
14. 4 :
7. 33
65. 19
7. 33
90.
4
= 8. 36
15. 2 :
7. 23
65. 28
-
7. 22
90.
6
= 7. 33
15. 3 =
7. 33
66. 11
-
7. 6
91.
4
= 7. 33
19. 1
8. 13
66. 12
=
7. 6
91.
6
= 7. 33
20. 2
=
8. 15
67.
6
=
7. 33
92.
2
= 7. 6
21. 5
7. 38
68.
1
=
7. 6
93.
5
= 7. 5
29. 3
=
7. 33
68. 10
7. 33
93.
5
= 8. 40
29. 5
7. 33
69. 10
7. 33
96.
2
= 8. 34
30. 6
-
7. 33
70.
2
=
8. 40
96.
11
= 8. 40
31. 2
7. 33
70.
2
=
7. 33
95.
12
= 7. 33
31. 4
=
7. 33
71. 10
=
8. 36
96.
17
= 8. 40
35. 3
7. 33
72.
2
=
7. 33
97.
3
= 8. 7
40. 3
=
7. 33
72.
8
=
8. 1
97.
3
= 8. 7
40. 5
=
8. 39
72.
9
=
8. 16
97.
12
= 8. 36
41. 6
=
7. 33
75.
5
=
8. 14
97.
15
= 7. 33
45. 4
8. 1
79.
5
=
7. 33
97. 20
= 8. 26
46. 4
=
8. 29
80.
1
=
8. 36
97. 21
= 7. 33
47. 4
—
7. 33
80.
4
—
8. 36
97. 22
= 8. 8
48. 5
=
7. 33
81.
2
- '
7. 6
97. 25
= 7. 33
50. 1
=
8. 39
81.
2
=
7. 33
97. 27
= 7. 33
51. 2
=
7. 33
81.
3
8. 32
97. 36
= 7. 33(2)
53. 2
=
8. 15
81.
3
7. 33
97. 38
= 8. 1
57. 1
=
7. 6
82.
4
8. 36
97. 39
= 7. 46
61. 3
7. 33
82.
5
=
7. 33
97. 44
= 8. 36
61. 15
7. 33
84.
1
7. 10
97. 44
= 8. 36
61. 15
7. 33
84.
5
=
8. 13
97. 48
= 7. 33
61. 19
: 7. 37
85.
4
=
8. 39
97. 49
= 7. 43
61. 26
: 8. 39
85.
8
=
8. 40
97. 49
= 7. 33
61. 28
= 7. 10
86.
6
7. 33
97. 51
= 7. 44
61. 30
= 7. 33
87.
1
7. 6
100.
1
= 7. 43
62. 21
= 7. 53
87.
6
: 8. 15
100.
3
= 7. 33
94 ' Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPir.
b.
M.
P.
b.
S.
1\ IT
M.
P.
b.
b.-
t\/t
M.
P. S.
1U1.
3
7.
A O
43
9.
14
7.
17
25.
4
7. 33
101.
■t i
13
7.
54
9.
14
=
8.
3d
n c
25.
7
8. 39
103.
1
=
7.
27
9.
14
=
7.
33
26.
1
=
7. 6
104.
2
=
7.
53
11.
4
=
7.
33
27.
9
=
7. 33
104.
3
7.
33
ll.
9
8.
35
28.
7
=
7. 33
104.
A
4
=
8.
7
ll.
9
=
7.
33
28.
8
=
7. 45
104.
4
8.
36
12.
2
7.
33
29.
8
—
8. 15
104.
4
8.
39
12.
3
8.
8
30.
1
=
8. 36
107.
1
=
8.
39
12.
5
=
8. 15(2)
30.
3
—
7. 33
107.
12
=
7.
6
12.
9
=
8.
35
30.
5
=
7. 6
107. 24
=
8.
1
14.
2
=
7.
45
30.
8
=
7. 33
108.
2
=
7.
6
14.
7
=
7.
45
30.
11
=
7. 33
108.
4
=
7.
46
14.
10
7.
33
30.
12
8. 36
108.
7
=
7.
32
14.
13
=
8. 39
30.
14
■ =
8. 36
108.
10
7.
33
15.
4
=
8.
15
32.
5
7. 6
110.
1
7.
1/
15.
4
=
7.
33*
32.
5
8. 39
110.
4
=
7.
6
15.
6
=
7.
7
33.
3
7. 33
111.
2
=
7.
45
15.
11
—
7. 33(2)
34.
4
=
8. 31
16.
3
=
8.
36
34.
8
=
8. 36
X
16.
13
8.
39
34.
14
8. 38
18.
5
=
7.
33
35.
1
7. 33
1.
2
=
8.
36
18.
14
=
8.
33
35.
2
7. 22
•4.
6
=
7.
33
20.
10
=
7.
33
35.
10
7. 30
4.
7
=
7.
33
21.
4
8.
36
35.
11
8. 40
5.
5
=
8.
36
22.
10
=
8.
8
35.
11
8. 36
6/
4
7.
6
22.
11
=
7.
5
36. 2-12
=
7. 33.
6.
7
=
7.
33
22.
15
=
7.
10
36.
10
—
8. 15
6.
7
=
7.
.7
23.
" 3
=
7.
33
42.
1
=
7. 27
7.
1
=
7.
33
23.
6
=
7.
12
42.
2
—
8. 36
7.
6
=
7.
33
23.
7
—
7.
12
42.
3
8. 36
8.
6
7.
45
25.
1
7.
33
42.
3
8. 38
9.
1
8.
15
25.
2
7.
33
42..
4 -
7. 33.
9.
4
8.
15
25.
3
7. 33(2)'
42.
6
8. 15,
Lengthening in the RV. = RPr.
95
RV. .
DP-
RV.
S. M.
P. S.
S. M.
42. 3
= 7. 35
Gl. 21
43. 10
= 8. 30
61. 22
43. 1
= 7. G
61. 24
43. G
= 8 15
61. 27
43. 2
= 7. 33
Gl. 27
43. 2
= 8. 28
G3. 2
44. 4
= 7. 33
G3. 3
45. 2
= 7. 33
63. 4
47. 1
= 7. 33
63. 8
47. 1
= 7. 12
G3. 8
47. C
= 7. G
63. 10
48- 5
= 8. 38
G3. 13
48. 7
= 7. 43
63. 14
49. 11
= 7. 33
03. 17
49. 5
- 7 5Q
64. 10
51. 7
= 7. 33
f\4 17
U*t. 1 /
= 7. 33
fifi 1 d
UU. IH
53. 2
- 3 # 35
67. 5
53. 6
= 8. 28
67. 6
53. 8
= 8. 36
67. 11
55. 5
= 7. 33
68. 3
59. 3
- 7_ iq
AD C
UO- J
59. 4
- 3 37
59. 5
= 8. 36
uy. t
59. 6
= 8. 35
uy. 3
60. 8
= 7. 33
7ft ft
60. 9
- 7 ^
7f\ T A
61 9
— 7 5
72. 6
fit in
— 7 1
= /. J
72, 7
61. 11
- 7 5
77 1
61. 13
= 7. 33
78. 8
61. 14
= 8. 35
81. 5
61. 20
= 7. 5
81. 7
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
P.
S.
S.
M.
P. S.
7.
33
82.
2
7. 45
7.
33
S3.
3
7. 27
7.
33
83.
7
=
7. 29
7.
17
83.
7
=
7. 33
8.
30
84.
5
—
7. 33
8.
39
84. 27
=
7. 33
8.
14
84. 29
=
8. 39
7.
33
88.
0
=
8. 1
7.
33
6S.
14
-
7. G
8.
14
88.
17
—
7. 45
8.
14
69.
1
-
8. 15
8.
30
89.
17
7. 33
8.
14
93.
4
=
8. 15
7.
33
93.
9
_
7. 10
7.
33
94.
1
_
8. 30
7.
33
94.
14
_
8. 29
8.
38
94.
14
_
6. 4
7.
7
95.
2
8. 30
8.
36
95.
13
8. 15
8.
30
95.
14
7. 33
7.
7
90.
12
_
7. 33
7.
7
97.
2
7. 33
8.
36
98.
8
_
8. 30
8.
36
99.
12
7. 33
7.
29
101.
2
8. 36
8.
15
101.
7
8. 36
8.
36
101.
8
8. 36
7.
33
101.
10
8. 1
7.
33
101.
11
_
8. 4
8.
15
102.
3
_
8. 39
8.
30
102.
• 6
8. 15
7.
33
103.
4
8. 36
7.
33
103.
11
8. 36
96
The Commentary.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
RV.
RPr.
S.
M.
p.
S.
S.
M.
P.
S.
s.
M.
P. S.
103.
13 =
= 8.
40
126.
8
= 8.
36
147.
5 =
= 7. 5
103.
13 =
= 8.
31
126.
8
= 8.
40
148.
5 =
= 8. 49
104.
1 =
= 8.
36
127.
6
= 7.
33
149.
2 =
= 7. 45
107.
3 =
= ' 7.
33
128.
4
= 8.
36
149.
' 5 =
= 7. 33
107.
11 =
= 8.
40
129.
4
= 7.
7
152.
4 =
= 8. 39
108.
3 =
: 7.
33
129.
6
= 7.
33
152.
5 =
: 8. 39
108.
9 =
= 7.
33
130.
2
= 8.
1
156.
.3 =
= 8. 39
111.
2 =
= 8.
36
132.
3
= 7.
33
156.
5 =
: '7. 31
111.
4 =
= 8.
36
135.
1
= 7.
33
158.
2 =
= 7. 33
112.
3 =
= 8.
36
136.
3
= 8.
39
166.
3 =
= 7. 33
112.
6 =
= 7.
33
136.
7
= 8.
15
176.
1 =
= 7. 33
112.
10 =
= 8.
35
137.
1
= 8.
39
176.
2 =
= 7. 19
113.
10 =
= 8.
39
137.
1
= 8.
39
178.
1 =
= 7. 17
115.
1 =
= 7.
33
138.
1
= 7.
45
178.
1 =
: 8. '40
116.
1 =
= 7.
33
139.
4
= 7.
16
180.
1 =
= 8. 36
116.
5 :
= 7.
7
139.
5
= 8.
15
180.
2 =
= 8. 36
120.
3 :
= 8.
38
140.
1
= 7.
6
181."
i =
= 8. 36
120.
9 =
= 7.
33
143.
1
= 8.
39
182.
1 =
= 7. 33.
126.
2 :
= 7.
46
143.
3
= 7.
33
182.
2 =
: 7. 33
126.
2 :
= 8.
34
143.
5
= 7.
6
182.
3 =
= 7. 33
126.
6 =
= 7.
17
145.
3
= 7.
33
XI
The Commentary.
Turning now to the special consideration of the com-
mentary on the text we may note the following points: —
1. It is extremely curt and concise and is written virtu-
ally in a sutra style. At places, it leaves us entirely at the
mercy of guess and conjecture. Cp. 73. 76, 168, 246 and 280,
where the commentator, in some respects, is more obscure and
concise than the text 1 .
1. Cp. notes on thse sutras. On 116 he says 'trirakrantagrahanat.' Here
:, trih" means trivaram=tbree times. Similar is "trirdvik" on 280. It was only
by a stroke of good fortune that I hit at the right meaning of these mystic
utterances.
Peculiarities of the Commentary.
97
2. The text has not come down to him as perfectly au-
thoritative and sacred and he rightly questions the validity of
some sntras 1 , prescribes vartikas 5 , and finally provides for its
deficiencies*.
3. He makes extensive use of the adhikaras and this
shows that he knew the tradition of the Samavedic grammar
exceptionally well. These adhikaras are of two kinds, i.e.
adhyaharas, where the thing is not said in the text, but has to
be implied, as in 1. 133,116, 146, and 236, and the adhikaras,
which are supplied by the text, as in 20, 22, 28, 46, 54, 56,
59,61,67, 86,96, 107, 109, 110. 115, 146, 185,237, 238, 242,
243, (2), 244, (2) 247, 255, 264, 281, 282 and 284.
4. He seems to be well acquainted with the Ganapntha
of Panini. Cp. 128 with note.
5. Here and there he oversteps the limits of a Prali-
Sakhya. Cp. 225 where he cites examples from Samavedic
literature and then draws one from RV. and another from
Aitaraya brabamana.
6. In citing examples he uses the following methods: —
(i) He cites the opening of the verses, though the
real example lies somewhere on in the stanza.
Cp. note on 279.
(ii) He names the melodies. Cp. 112, 1 13, 150, 162,
181, 260, 283, 284.
(iii) He names the verses. Cp. note on I.
(iv) He cites the neighbouring word in a verse.
Cp. 76, 116.
(v) At places he gives the half of a word as an
example. Cp. 148.
1. Cp. 157 and 280.
2. Cp. 143, 229, 243 245
3. Cp 159, 226, 256, 238, 272.
98 Who was the author of the Commentary ?
7. At places the commentary seems incomplete-
141, 150 and 239. The last portion of the commentary
these sutras seems to be lacking in something. That there ■
another, and possibly a larger recension of the commentarj
indicated by the Ms. B. on the 116, where the extra readi
not found in Burnell, has been given in the footnotes. 1
fact is confirmed by the author of the gloss on the Vivrti 1 , \
on the rule 56, clearly draws from a recension of the cc
mentary, larger than that available to us.
XII
Who was the author of the Commentary ?
For determining the personality of the commentator,
have no data whatever, except that the author of the gloss
Paninlyasiksa once quotes from the commentary in the na
of Audavraji 2 , which is clearly wrong, as has been aires
shown.
About his place we know absolutely nothing and for
period we have only references, which though too few i
indefinite to yeild any unchallengable result need to be ]
here. Our commentator cites on the rule 90 Nakulamuk"
carya, who is unfortunately nowhere mentioned in
Sanskrit literature, nor in any Worterbuch or list of Mss., £
he is the only authority whom our commentator cites a
that two only once.
But there is a ray of hope. Simon 3 has shown tl
UpadhyayajataSatru, the commentator on Puspasutra, In
about 950 A. D., and we know from his work that he utilii
the ancient commentary of Bahukacarya or Bahuka bhas;
kara 4 , who must have been a fairly ancient scholar. T
1. Cp. Rktantravivrti on rule 56.
2. "Audavrajirapi Vspargavargasya spar£agrahane ca jfieyam" p. ll.
it with RT. 13.
3. Simon, PpS. p. 499.
4. Simon, PpS. p. 498.
Can we improve the test of the SV. ?
99
Bahuka, on PpS. 7. 288 quotes from our commentary 1
md this makes so much certain, that our commentator
is older than Bahoka and may have flourished about the
beginning of the Christian era.
One thing more. Our commentator cites cxmplcs from
the two Arcikas, the two Ganas, Mahanamnis, the two 3rauta-
sQtras, the Brahamanas, but nowhere from the later Ganas i.e.
the Oha and tlhya ganas, which are supposed "pauruseya."
This may be significant, but we cannot infer any statable
result from this.
XIII.
Can we improve the text of the SV. with the help of the
Pr&tisakhya ?
The question is of the utmost importance, but the RT.
and the Commentary offer little help in this matter 5 , isauri-
snnu, the author of Laghuiktantrasangraha, whois more exhaus-
tive than either, registers some cases, where the text of Benfey
is at variance. I shall concern myself here only with one rule,
which prescribes the omission of visarjanlya, when followed
by s in conjunction with a consonant. iSaurisunu registers the
following examples of this rule : —
Sanrisunu SV. Benfey.
vacastuse I. 87 The same
visa stavetatithih I. 85 do
para dusvapnyam I. 141 • do
sakhaya stoma" I. 164 ' do
ya sma srutavarman I. 89. do
jagata svardrgam I. 233 jagatah svardrsam
1. It runs "atra hi" gatiscantasthamapadyate (cp. RT. 110) iti yaknrfi-
pattih 1 "ramadhyo" (RT. 159) iti Iopah pnnaranena vacanona bhogapakaram
bhavatiti esta bahuka bhasyakareua vyakhyanam krtam | asmadguravastn
bruvate | " Simon has confaBed here the Butras ot Rt. Cp. PpS. p. 676 n. 2.
2. Cp. however, "udag nyag va" Benfey SV. 1. 279, while the rule 173
and the Commentary require "udau nyag il,"
100 Ben'fey at variance with Saurisunu.
a bhara svarvan
T
I.
254
a bharah svarvan
vaca stotram
T
1.
Add
vacan stotram
1 11 _
bodha na stomam
I.
313
The same.
mataya svaryuvah 1
T
1.
3/3
matayan svaryuvan .
vlra stavate
1.
385
i he same
sakhaya stomyam
I.
387
do
tamu va stuse
I.
A 1 /"\
410
do
sacetasa svasare
I.
457
sacetasah svasare
—li * i i
svadhya svarvidah
I.
508
svadhyah svarvidah
gomata stotrbhyo
T T
II.
179
The same
mdava svarvidah.
T T
II.
566
* 1 1 • _3 1
indavah svarvidah
esa sya dharaya
Tt
II.
584
The same
naki svasva
II.
300
nakih svasva
prthu svaruh
II.
687
prthuh svaruh
hi stha svah patl
T T
II.
Off
351
hi sthah svah pati
yukta stotrbhyah
T T
II.
435
The same
pavamana svardrsam
T T
II.
134
pavamanah svadh-
varan in II. oil
—i _ • i i
rityapa svarvidah
II.
676
ntyapah svarvidah .
ya snlhitlsu 2
II.
728
yah snihitisu
maghona sma
II.
1030
maghonah sma
usasa sva 3 rgah
II.
1225
usasah sva 3 rgah
ma na starabhimataye II.
770
The same
svadiya svaduna
II.
835
svadlyah svaduna
radha stuvate
II.
836
The same
svado svadlyah
II.
834
svadoh svadiyah
revata stota
II.
1157
The same
balavijfiaya sthavirah II.
1206
balavijnayah stha-
virah
1. The Mss, A. and B. both read "matayarvidah" (= mataya svarvidah)
which is not found in the SV. It however, joccurs in BV. 10. 43. 1. which
reads : — /
"acca ma indram matayah svarvidah", for which SV. has : —
"acca va indram mataya svaryuvah."
2. Mark "snlhitesu" in A. and B., where Benfey has "snihitisu."
Need of a fresh edition of the SV.
101
yonasvo'rano II. 1225 The same
arepasa svadhya svar-
vidah (2) II. 451 arcpasah svadhyah
svarvidah
It will be clear from the above-shown table that, out of
37 times, Benfey observes the role of the SUmacedic grammar
only 17 times and violates it 20 times, without showing any
reason whatsoever. Other anomalies 1 may be found upon a
minute examination of the text; and the same will be treated
in detail in the introduction of the Laghurktantrasangraha
and Samasaptalaksana, the publication of which may necessi-
tate a fresh edition of the Samaveda.
^LX?2™;:t 117 sv - 247 and *■■«• wwt
CP BV. 8. „ 5 . 9 . 5 ! 6 U ■ ( ™ » * re q u,re V „ „„,,■
oi, IB etc, Jb. and my noto on RT. 274
[ m s w ]
farmer sf=rj ^f^q^r 3tR?r^t ssrngr <Md£k$ii<b
^f^ii ^ri^cnu $ tJ^t 'Tr^nr f^nrnir ^^jtct cra^H^t W«ti
1 Is wanting m A B 0 Bar has
'•Mitl-MI'M.JjHt
2 is wanting in Bur 3lf *m
3 '-ft 5Wt W | W( tRt STrT SRT
ITWR I C
4 0 and Bar. add \to ^, while A B
D omit it
5 ^ is wanting in A B
C "M!<UlGl« B
8 *T is wanting in D
9 ftS^tF 3 ? B MiMD
10 B
11 i fr l ifl j A r %A WftHftl%B wft-
12 *ipil+ Bur i
13 SPf is wanting in Bur
s^rfe^c^rs^Rf ^3^Rf cu^inr ^farmr ^^um snRn^wr
rv_Vv rs rv rv rv fN a 0 , Cv. rs rs r-v rs c\ !P .
r^TTcT TTRT T^RT TsTRf ^PXi I T^TRT T^lcT TcTTcT UfJTcT T^TRf I
T^RT T%T% f^T T%% Serf: I T%RT f^T%%% T^'ftft cR* I
10 fq%T% f^TRT WTcT T*TRT *m*tl I ^TcT I W%IT?ctem I T^fcT
15 ^rq^Y^T II R H
1 ; 3^r^<> c.d.
2 sq^sr 51° c.
3 RUM*l I Bur. C. D.
4 Visarga om. in A. wfat B.
5 mt: ^mm.-- SWT: D. After this C.
6 A and C read— W fft WT 1 t
^f%. B.C. omit ^ ffa *| |f%. XT ^
9 Is wanting in A.
10 f^Rf is the last in Bur.
11 ^TPRIir: is -wanting in Bur.
12 ?fcT A.B.D.:^ C.
13 ^fcf A.B.D. :? 1% C.
14 °=TIT^Rr: A.B.D. %Hc^Wr%^C.
15 is wanting in Bur.
16 After 1^TT%C has ff^W: I Wf%-
^F^TFc^o Bur.
^ |fcf ^Tf %fo fc^rr^T 5I ^r% s 17 W: is wanting in A. and Bur.
.^r feft ^ ^ ^ra d.
7 wprri^rf?Rr^A.WRriif%|^Bur.
8 Wll*. and so on D.
18 Bur. and C; perhaps a
mistake for l^ft S«TR<> A.
19 W3° is wanting in A.B.
20 o^ifhfTO 0 A.
^ Kf-mum, i fH<<<H*i<*>ft+i^*i<i*!!iH. 1 ! &iat CWnw, i
st: i5r:xqr^<iT: i t 5 ^ 5 s ^ it %Mn<!ii y'Uj^tmji
'rarenrt 37g&m qs^ra^- tim^t ss^ftrft^ftnft srcscrsrrq'
^resent 5sPtwt ^fftrifi mtu^y ufl^««<tf«i«rawliMH^ i
. Tgf^TTTff M^l^^itKlRlRi^" =ET ritit<lPllR^> ^ II « II IS
ft%^BT5T B. STCTW 'J'fert'Sra; c.
2 So B. ft^l -q^I. A.C.T). una Bur.
3 S0A.B.C. °3S^WRT.D. -IKIdH<Mrq.
Bur,
4 W§I <Jt<nnn>T.. A.O.D. Bar.
B A. B. Bar. puts tullstop
after anubandhah.
6 flHdHdl 0.
«r?trJT?rq[A. tr^r^sn^j q
i. 3! S 5 3 ST T T *T =T ® etc. C.
S t ? T 5t 5 etc. Bur.
8 SrffT^TRT is wanting in A.
0 IMIfild A.B.
10 •dWWW" D.
11 B.D.
12 R-idlHI" A.O.
13 Is not repeated in B and Bur. cf.
HageSa.LgS.SaiSjAp.p 7-"*tjM-
5i(l+<.<J) HII+iWHlsfa SspRJTCt-
^rftrftfa" ll
H B. reads — ?fcT »<UlftlJI<W: WTTff: I
Bur.-has— ^«T5OT%: • spR-JlmMf:
WIH: 1 Ahas-STtpSWIi*: I C gives
II
[ m f$$\w> m\z& ]
^W^cT! I wmw *t*it m^crqr few*', i hi^t: ( m
snjcrer (*.^). Ot (LRU).
(t«o^).^Rngfrr: 1 <Ffcgftr £<\w&
(KMX)' weftferT^r^Ct^ 5T?^rfHRj<). 5fff: 'sraTS^p*
(t^*). fST^r etc.). l^Pj: ftBSfir* Sh&jdW
1 5T^cT B. while both B and Bur. have SRftft
2 5r I^frR^r° B. TFTTJJ,
3 Is wanting in Bur. 8 l^U^. B.
4=JU is wanting in B. 9 Ri%fl^B. In SV. 1. 563 (
5 After sttrimtft B. reads ^R^T W°) occurs FTf%^ while in 1.551
■which is -wanting in Bur. and 560 occurs
6 b. io wr^far b.
7 SV. 1. 223 reads-W?fn| ^T^rfeR^ 11 B.
t%sj: (!.«=). a^n^(^.«\s). yiWuftg^ri'Tt'ntn (?.^a). Sff^r.
(WBs). i ^tpr^nf r ' g-i gtnrr (?.\s\s). Tn^ft.waJ.^id.wt).
t.a^sngr^). g^wq^ (u«0- 1
(^^m: Msc°). s^^m^s^gcr ( ). srar-imr jHdifijj c
(l.Mw#v9^.VJ-S5g<nO. *Fg<rrilrcin(WW). ma'TO^O-^)-
a-^ijl ^ (m« -.ii<fi < te<0 - 'ffn srer firer (l.W)- 'J^T-
(UW- l^^wi^ ). $&mt l (srr.u. ?a— 1%^). <wjih i
(iW- ^siq). to g rffogHftw^ d.^v)- m i dgut (wr.tf.— i*). 10
£p*&raft (t^s=). f%icr: (?.«<>{.). ^i^^v ra; (*.aH3). ^
ft Run (l.avrt). »r iW i ww I ftfisi:). Owe),
sn?^: totS (stt.h. ?*). ^rf^mricT^: (mtf. u) t^sj
h^t (^wi). sTSiuft (tW). tt.m). aft- -
# Jifen (*.m). i%rqT Osrofto 1 *.*.?.). Ki^pSK «
(ta=w). s**35*(*.w*). if
St: IR II
3Tfff Ny^wl^f ^TT II ^ II
ftfU^tr'x <£lltfll
1 I.e.Ar.S 46-8 (=RV.X.18!>) ;in 47 6 B reads
SlWIil. occurs. Cf . Sayana on it ^Wf I
2 Bar.s^iW B. 7 So correct. "tlTO B.
3 Bur. Bays 'what is intended by this 8 After the Vivrti, B lepeats every
is not clear'. But cf.SV.l, 341, where Sutra.
W!W SpSicnt. occurs * 9 B. reads3tt% qT
4 Is wanting in B. 10 ftfFJyfl^ B. faSIHslHh A. C.
5 fotiW. B.
^Tlftf II* »
fftf II * H
5 ^ 11 \9 II
?ft# 3 sttx^H a II
T%^^I^Td X II ?<> II
^5T4^t ^H:^ II 1 II
ii ?? nwf^^ TOKft4uy n i u
II II «Hf&*wf W^TWTf^PTTJ II * II
1 So A. B.C. 3#T Bur. 10 See 8. Samsvadanigura=Somavrata-
2 Bur. saman or Ar. G. 111,1,9-10 = (SV.
3 STfsft A.B. II, 229. cf. Sayana SV. vol. II, pp
4 ^W^^T^flTOm: B. 264-265; Bur Arbr. p 72) and Ar.O.
5 A.B.C. =3 A. ). Ill, 5, 11. (of Ar. S. III. 2; Sayana
°3ircr B. (In Ar. G.III, 4, 10). SVf II p . 284; Bur. Arbr. p. 74;
7 So A.C. and Bur. fl^frft ^PS: B, BV. 1. 91. 18)
8 oftrdBur. 11 Is wanting in Bur.
9 W> Bur.
ll?3ll?#foT II 3 II
ii ti swrmi II » II 5
T3Trr»TT tnTT VprfrcT M<i^rl|ftr-M<.: I & T 3T ^ ^ TT, *T *K
S ST *TT, & ST J!J n JTPFT I
II ?y II ?Rt^n: ii « II
II ?$lig*rT:#3TOi:il$ll 10
t^^un^ i
II ?vs ii ai^(Tis^iRj+: II « II
^rrrerriR^T w-sirrf^tCT mfo I W ^ sr tit * jtp i
II ?= II HTW n<u*th&iRw« II s II is
wj<-i ^uni^< nm'diJwTlHy li-jHif^thi *r^rfSr i ^ftr irg ^nj
i^i-^t-ysTftror: ? tifcdiqmj
II ?S.II II € II
*rr>t 1 Rt^ -di P i ^sjcrnfK?.^). 5naTsr«nft(t.=m). rMtft.ws).
1 "PlteR: Bur. A misprint. G ^ 3JT 3Hft B,
2 <PT B. 7 OT^tft^ B.
3 Is wanting in B. 8 3<t.HA4 B.
4 w^i b. 9 srgr B.
5,5 Is wanting in B.
( t ). { m- sr. j« ). TTtr ^ ( * ). ^nr^nr *rfer
# fitftfr II h II
ll ii srftftNW II ? II
10 II II ^sR II 3 II
sq#T ST^q- ^f?# ST^t *T3T% I TqT^ ^^frcmsRTO I
15 IR3II W^rNuS 11
•ws^ra ^ i^f^^^ ¥T^cr; i finger ( I. ^ ). #etwj^
1 o^ft^B. 7 WT^cfT'B.
2 ^1 <£> B. 8 B.
3 B. ' 9 ^jjp^ ( 1# 240).
4 ^ is wanting in B. 10 T^F^T B.
5 swrrfr B. 11 Is anting in B.
6 ffo<J?fr%^: B.ftcfrft^: A.C.
ii r» ii wiVWi ii ii
^n: I ^r^t (I. "fnMr (?. losO-injaftft i =c«.0-
Jle^T ( ?. X<>» ). W«.qiUlftu> ? ST m ( K. L~ )-iPJ?frf5r I
II II srJ: $ II y II
ucot ^frfm^t i srw^r ( w» ). st^r
5^r: ( )• *ronfr: ( *.\st ). w^t: ( ?. aw )•
fjrars. (srr. u« )-Jnjcftft I # ?fa ? sr^nn: wo 10
( Humlw 1 yW-tJ. 0 ( ) i
IR5 llflftw^ll $11
IRvs || ^5^11 \9 1|
^TOTO#»raltri ft^it|, ( ! t-t : t°t). \mV» )■ is
irc ii «iisiivS«iisrr ^Tii = ii
IU° II flwiKK-f II ?«> II
ffiitffit mdi-. ii ? ii
1 yftMld B. tiNWjft-A. 7 B -
g i -Hinfl c. 8 s^ifr B.
2 Saman form of Krdhi. 9 Q¥i$ B,
3 aft^'^re" B. 10 B.
4 <*3&T B. 11 A - B - C -
5 is wanting in B. 12 WTO: B. A.
C HiMtU\ B.
[ «W ]
n 3? II stratum n ? II
II II ^WTT^ II 3 II
n \\ \m^m ftwwpn^iu n
ii ii ^ifrF^ qwi II SI!
II 3V ll^falw II U II
ii^ iiMw II $ II
T^m^r w?crc *T3T% i ^rstr cr^ i
nfo ii R^R^ ft?n^ii n
ll^llqRTI II c II
w^re ^T^fkr: stt%*p^ i j^mi cn?r^n|qr sr^sn - gsfirsct*
1 TIW B. 7 gsfte? ^ Bur.
2 5Rlt B. fcf omitted.
8 q^q^o b.
10 SoB. Bur. rerds-SRSW ^?ff.
3 TOfRj: B.
4 T^RR!: B.
5 T% Bur.
6 °^rr Bur.
11 yiM'+*<H° B.
12 ?T?^WI^rr ^T*RW Bur.
iue.il Erem ffmgiis.li
II llsiTOt^r: II ?° II
y<M<<M?ft 5^ vnifir i % t =ir ?Sj?r i
II 8? II spfrl II ? II
si^w+k+mi &5?t fi«rfir i wftdfaddmydifaiftErs i
ii «r ii urn imi
II *\ 11%^, II 3 II
imnfotfris^ii v n
im II 'fcqSf ^rcfcmrcs imi 1
s^wnrraT* warier 1 sraT-^r 1 (1.*%) 11
II VI II SP^IR II
1 ^IHlRrar" B. 6 Is wanting in B,
2 5T W. % 3 B. 7 -WTRTT Bur.
3 ^if W: A. and C. "ra* ^5: B. 8 WIR form-f[ k %. ( \\)
i So B. ^ Bur. 9 fiwral-B. te^BRTirar Bur.
5 mrorar b. 10 °:raf b.
5 ii »\s ii *rrf ii n
"llBc||ipiq;||c||
^rf^r (t^.) i
#tt*t srcq^ vrerar i wfcv (KM). ( ^r*n ). w% I
IU° II ^11 ?° II
« m? 11^5^11? II
II W II #t*rfcp II * II
^ 3 * 3 *j * 3 <j * 3
20 ft.sfcvs). ^cfTT^q; ( )• 5TT ^i^cr ( t W ) 1
1 So Bur. °#F<?Ri; B. 6 ^^B.
2 T^TR B. 7 W^T ^nfi: A.O. W B.
3 f&A^ Bur. 8 A. ^r^#^: 0. ^RO^B.
4 WWTHTo B, 9 B. 5^ Bur. A mis-
5 Is -wanting in B. print. . - "
II *3 II mnkmi <eri^ II 3 II
II sail 3^ft%"it II 8 II
mvt (l.K). smrx vah,^ ' I )• ^ m grogrciT:
II sa II II « H 10
II n II H%^ll $ I
■h 4k i^i tit ^pra- 1 gffc 5p5r— a^n^r (?.?°^). srfJr <rfcf— is
^ a^iT , 3 a 3 W ,3 3* , v 1 * 3 * ~* 3
O^a*). sn»s^ 5 3 zrzfi<£r i aw? «0 5i% ?
srat^rfw?: ( m ) i 20
1 °>RT 3qT- B. S "HSJcT B.
2 Is wanting in B. 6 c^T B.
3 Omitted in B. 7 *ratfr ttm, I SnTjftrehftrraC
4 WBf^l'^lH.B. TOTj|:B.
II fir II vs ||
ii y= n m #^n = ii
imii^r^wimi
trftRT mif^ I ctt^" frrfe^n:: I ^rra en i
II ||pn^M% V : II ?° II
?rcT || $ ||
1 Is wanting in Bur,
2 Is -wanting in B.
3 ^l*<u«yiiRk«M w^rsw B.
5 So B. wj$«fUs|fa: A. ^$«%U%:
C. Cf.SS. p. 443 " ^ l ^ tfoffogfer"
Siddhesvara's CSPhOlG. p 50.
&ksaprakasa "3RSff &ffr
I^PJ SS. p 388.
6 ^fh^rfa: B.
7 5r*R: snrrs^: B. a«pr :
a. c. omits mtt. m n^rft
Bur.
II <*? II TOTIf^cffft II ? I
t^to m ^ ?fg- ? trf^r =g5q£ g£ ( ). *fm*rt »
3*rarergtra; i ( i.hhh ) i
II Ull M^N^ II R II
II ^ HJtwfeilRII
«*ldWiRr imra- 1 10
II $8 II TRCT^KKS II 8 II
ll <*K II *on% II y II
ll^llfttfg^rc: ll $ ll is
5 II %ya (I ^ferr II vs II
^R^lMcT ^? ?T: TT: 5^R^J^f ?IT?cR^T f^?R^ I T^FRi ?
10 ll^c|Uf^>||c |j
(UU). ^ ^ftt ^ ft. w). ^ m ^ 41 (t^).
^ ^rfrR" (t m <£rr tf ). i^wrt ? wt^t^t^r (K.m.
1 b. (=rv 9. 106. 10 ^nfcirr^r mi).
2 JmktFpjt B. 15 SV. 1. 309 (=RV 7. 32. 24) reads
3 °HRt: B. ^^CHrrq:.
4 1WR[: I One sentence in B. 16 SV. 1. 511 (=RV. 9. 107. 4) reads
Fullstop after ^TTCT:. tprFT: 3T*T WTWTt ^TRt 3pff%.
5 ^ft^T SR^, One sentence ■ 17 SV 1. 347 (=RV. 1. 84. l) reads
in B. f^Rrfl:.
6 mt$t ^fa ftfct B. 18 This is correct.S V. 1. 482 = BV. 9.
7 f^lWf|f% f=Wfi^T: B. . 9 4. 4. BothreadT^^frfW^^rr.
8 t TT^o B. .19 SV. 1.546 = RV. 9. 101. 7. Both
9 41 B. have 3r4 flfaT: 5^PTT
10 So B. t 5f° Bur.
11 ITfMfa B. 20 RV. I. 81. 1 reads °cfW'JT^rr%-
12 (mi is wanting) B. tfftaif (=S^+^+sr$f). But SV. 1.
13 Is wanting in B. 411 has fi^T^Trl^ftA fcT may
14 But there is Samhita here in SV. be emended, to %. Bur. reads &
1. 572, which, reads ^PHll^ ^.t^ 4 !*
5, 1. l-U=tftf]
II H II ?S llfcll
II oo H^j^ll ?o ||
3TPj<T ? art ?t «Pw.md I $m ? m sttt^ (^wt wi l d. 6
?vsvs). cm 3- grr: (ttt ott: t. l*s=). rr gr ?prrara; (sir •■ aquJlj
wc») i
5% SWT! *^f& II
iivs? ii wftr ii ? n
snrnri gi^itjl (snf%) stf^ sr wh*^ i st w ti& ' /iwi
%-s? (K. "J^r tot ijucr sn spio ss,=). ?rrVsc tij- 10
*>7T Wfo ft. ^,). n ^4) f 5TOpiTq;(?. JCU, WTT
<»:)• wkkiREi ? fir* (I. t^^rnfHSr 1 1 $r
ttt H «5 5 T5cTCT 3 1 ^ (?. W h) 1
II vsR II * q^T^ IU II
^fdsj.wjd I Wlti.-ilH (?. t% <It tMHH, I 15
II VS^ II ^1)1 3 II
^T i thiw g wji^d 1 :t 'ir>jjid<wv5fd(?.^a). «mng: (t W).
II vsa lls^ II V II
tt^jC tr^fr 3rr<> ( t^ss. ). *w $fcrt ( ? 3ft srg t.\9»^ ). 20
star ? srtffa ( Wex ).
1 S B 6 Is wonting in B
2 ^ is wonting in B 7 I 37T I B
3 3 is wanting in B. 8 SnJC B a slip.
4 Note the Sandhi in oil the three 9 iTC^H. B
examples in SV. (Bonfej-'s Ed.) 10 WjJIItHH* B
B Is wanting in B. 11 *Ht<l<i,B
II VSM II l^ ^ftll H II
II vs^ ||5iw^?^rll S II
W* ). stt^ I «r ^r%^( ). arg
^TFcT ( 1. ). ^FT^frf^ ( #t ^refr ). 11 iw<ki<i-
Mr T%q; ? ^re^rrc^ ( \M* ). spktc *fir ? w?r *rcf (t \»).
sw^rraltf^ (*.V>«). ^^4f ( %. «. ^. * ). ^ ?t ^rf^
sreroq^pn zptxsfk^ ( ). 11 *t%3[ srret ^rmr^i
{\. w). srfa *th* sr^* 1 (im). fina n^lwuni •
n w= 11 $ft<r#tft? lie 11
1 Is wanting in B. 10 This is found in RV. only. Bur's
2 SRSPIT B. reference is wrong.
20
3 £#9% B. *TH^% Bur. 11 is wanting in B.
4 ^tt 5J^r b. 12 3l£r is wanting in B.
5 ^fo is wanting in B. 13 W3?f^ Bur.
6 o^rraft B. u So B. and SV.1.7. T? Bur.
7 <TO is wanting in B. 15 Is wanting in B.
8 So B.and SV 1.263. $tsfem is wan- 16 Is wanting in B.
ting, in B. ^3f^f%o Bur. 17 Is wanting in B.
9 srt mm\ q«n^sjj 5rcti%^ ^qf 18 oC r ^ b.
*ntf yferz, 3?rr# b.
V, \-\=*\ ] ^driiH. [ It
II V36. II ^ II 6. II
II co UH^TlRoll
C ^PT ]
lie? ii mmu ? ii
<n wraror i toihi 'nwh.1 jwRih^i «i«jfi)«ri*»<i
II cRII^II R II
*T <Hfa&"Ut I & 5T*T ■W I Sd ( t 5" ) I few
tmm-$M6<n>t i f^rnPr I *rm erf w i ^ft (^.vsx) i
II =3 II II 3 II
§"*icT *t<w<: i mfr^r (srto %)-Jj^rfiRi I
II c» II # WW^ II ttll
II =« II ?Efir II « II
y^y[ ( t.XSC^ ) I %H!/lri|fa*R: I
II =5 II 5Htfa II q II
1 After "it ST'JH B reads "ft STpR^. 5 HlftT is wanting in B
2 yfaPl+H. B. 6 W flntffa Bur.
3 rftsf^li^nEH B. 7 srJJtm. is wanting in B
4 See 2 and 3 8 Sjsft is wanting in B.
II CVS II ^i^kr^ II \s II
llcc|iT%-^-^;llcll
n ii ft^-^-^rat-^ ii a n
jt^rt ftw^p^r 5T HRiJ^ra- 1 frof mm fk*l $t ft. ss).
str^K^ t%^tht-^ i t u b). ^qrf^^T (sfr ft^rit «^
h). <rMr— § ft.^M b). ^srr ?wt^ (feq; ri^) ^ i w ^
fk^m a. b.). i st% sn=m# ftift<tar to: i fwrr^ ^ft ,e
is fr^^^Hwr^' i tok^^w# ^ct 15 (I. c flu wr).
1 Is wanting in B. 9 ^F3T (FT wanting in) B.
2 ^TRjfto B. 10 So Bur. Cf. SV. 1. 99. (with Sayana's
3 After this B. reads ^ F$ comm. p. 264) ^ fT fl
4 BRB, *ZRITA.f^*»WH-i]4JLC. liqf^SB.
5 See 4. 12 gff B.
6 So A.B.C. f|q; Bur. 13 B.
7 B. does not mark accent. Cf SV.1.87. 14 f^B.
(Sayana's comm. Vol J.P. 243) f^dT$ 15 See 14.
T^t l^^T^.The South Indian gana 16 0 WHg^ B.
mss. write this fr.Here c Sthi' 17 TT^t B.
=*Sthira matra or 1 matra pause. 18 <>^iWr^% B.
So in the following examples. 19 qq>Kth<% B.
8 Is wanting in B. - 2 0 S is wanting in B.
ii &? ii fim'. n i ii
IIS^IlHWH: II R II
II £311^^11311
<fl$mn&i 1 3?im rrorcs 1 stpift: 1
i(i < «i\<& (KMi). *m (t^s.?)- s miR^n (w^o «).
^atMi^ ttt°sv H^Mw O- , ^' 4 wU (^°). ^Hifa^ ( g n' > 10
*r° U).wn^Nt(l.««>^).5ftfii*r( J i.l«'«).^ifii:(i.Jct)- ^rfo-
^m(l.a«) *j?ter(t«=-'K<n<>§l3^r). awifl%iwti5,i
11 s.« 11 sn^reiM sf^ii » 11
1 =lfo Bur.
2 In B. the comra ends with °*TT<T5J.
After fullstop B repeats the Sutra
i^em^while Bur. includes the same
in the comm
3 Cf. failPHl ^} pRt I SV. 1 15.
(Sayana's comm. Vol, I p. 117)
4 Ararat B.
5 Is wanting m B
6 % is wanting in B.
<TOft%ft B- SV 1. 291. has
^ ^ (^IbVi* TO.
8 ^rq is wanting m B.
0 IB. SV. 1. 408 reads HT-
10 Aftor WmilTr. B reads Si^TOH I
U 3^fJr: B. Bur. refors to 2 1093.
But Vajinlva is not found therein.
Wo find Vsjinlvosu m II. 1098.
12 ftfjfi StTiswontinginB. Cf.RT. p.
16.n.20.
13 "iftlft* Bur
U B.
15 So correct, fffi B.
16 STCTW =IT° B
17 l^i^ is wanting in B.
18 (W is wanting in) B.
3 ■£ 3
s II ^ ii *nrof #TC% £ II 5 II
II a>9 II JF# ii^n
|| £e || ^ <ft |i c ||
II *k II *Pmt II a II
^i snrr^i t^tt^i i^^i snfti: i \ ^m^. I
20 ^JTT^?3nrV" vw*fe"* i s^^ft ^rr q " t jiw^t^t^ i
1 fem 3*kr° B. Then itrepeats lMffrP$ WW I
2 ftr% -wanting in B.
is wanting in B.
4 I ^PR B.
5 ^ifadUl: B.
6 ^?«r ^^a. b. *mm
7 Is -wanting in B.
8 I 3T#^fr B.
9 After thisB reads ^TRRT ^T^JI
10 W&K B.
11 I B.
12 Ite-ijlcl B.
13 5R3fTcT B.
14 <N*^fcf B.
15 o^KldWK B.
1'6 ^^^s^f*^ B.
17 *J^Pd' B.
18 ^farr Bur.
II II 5T?IT II ?" II
5% =^T3^f II
II WHWlfr II ? II
II ?°RII s5*r3%IRII
II 11*1%^ II? II
^wih ^HhrnracT ssfct stfott i jrcrw& i Jtfidi-rS: i *r*rra: i
n?o»iinftrcraTC(.imi
it i%*rpri ^Hinad i m*T--d4, i m'fvn^ i jrpsjfcrjjc. i
II ?«>( || gq^: II « II
otot: ^trt^ ^t^TfitrfT I wi slid I ^JTi^rrer II ststjt %fa ?
II II ^TO^HH^ II 111
^tyd<K^l-iiI%!r^^tyHli44ldW^i<!!H.I ! <l<5HJ=lt«d-C m*!SH) 20
1 After this B. reads-'ilMll'ittfft I S lufot B.
2 JRrafli I jtcfb ^a: B. 6 VlrfmWH, B.
3 *u4tW.B. 7 WS&Z B,
4 B. 8 Confusion of =^ and t[ in B.
|| ?oe|| ^% ||c M
ii ?o^ii ^ftot^ ii a. ii
11 ??o II ft* 11 ?o ||
I ^T-^rr-S Mrft ^ fefaifo (W*).
5% WITT ||
[ ^T$: ]
II W II ^-wtcftt^ II ? II
1 Is wanting in B. 7 ^II3T#T B.
2 So correct. »^R?Rjr Bur. ^^"^Pfg- 8 0 fri% B.
B. 9 ^ mo B Cf gv. l. l. which re»-
3 After this B reads.-ft ffal 5TT%- ds W?T ^TT.
lO^T^fB. Cf. SV. 1. 7. vhich
4 No fullstop in B. reads ^T.
C B. 1 1 3&n^. B. Cf. VS. 1. 272 which re»d*
(^renoHp^.O- ^.i^ 5 ^ i (m a ^° =0-
(l.^. inS *«0- ir^r ft «t: (t^l). sfiftraT
- .frfore yf^r ? tf i ^i^ift ( i. awn. nfe^c.) i nqrc f £mnt (?.£)•
(m.^.w). sntPt^^ ¥*ra: 3. «. c).
11 miliar IU M ia
„ (sn. \\) qjJO^A (m tt. App =i, s.— ^Knrn^ti) i
uuvnmspj II « II
ii ??« M fW-Mfl %imi
- #T: (t.«U). I VTT-t-g: a). ^ m^ft ( ? ).
1 Altor this B roads %^fJraR:. 7 Is wanting in B,
2 B roads fil^t H4<JJItf«l <<Hipl=ifl' 8 Stfit is wanting in B.
=TT 3FH!fa felR I 9 53. is wanting in B.
3 la wanting in B. 10 Is wanting in B.
4 Stfe is wanting in B. H °Vg B.
5 B adds St fa}:. 12 Wtmm B.
. 6 % is wanting B. 13 WI'Hl'fc B.
II ??«UH3?T%: IK II
5 ^TcT^fcT: (W). iTRTdlr: Uld^M^ (t ^o), tT?3*tt
(tW). s#rft * ^tM: ^ W't
(U$*). 3T%cr: (u**). ^ra^lr (U^). * fi^W (t*««).
air 3nn5n^(tW)» ^ ^ : ft.W). ^ : (^r ^ ^-^crto
10 ^TToTT^r). sTRnrf^r: (t^). (m it. A
15 ^TO^TR™ II
n H^n^^^ii^ii
w^to fe5r&frn q«K K* rnrefr I ^ mvffi (t^)-
1 Is wanting in B. n ^ ( ^ is wanting in ) B.
2 515 f| SRJ$r: B. 12 After 3^: B. reads t ffi.
3 STRI^R B. - 13 atffcHjMf* B.
i W*?n\*m is wanting in B. U mf^J^HH. Bur. B reads
5 WW^H B. I ftfxirfr 1 ?T#^ > S^"
6 TO^Rf: is wanting in B. sp^t | {%q^t I sffaF 1 3$ 1
7 WJ. is wanting in B. §T 1 l^FT *TT SFcTI^ ^"
8 srf*T is wanting in B. ART ^1dl%£fa^ ^TTCT ^ L
9 ;3 *& B. 15 mi: is wan ting in B.
.10 Second ^ ?T: is wanting in B. 16 TcFTT WPT is wanting in B.
wfipjjrcq^.^so)- *z ferrt^r {{.%)■ n ft^foUK) Iw i
11 ??e||£i^st: 11 = 11
cRtft^" (t.Jftw) II JTSft RKfitK (WTo ho «*) II
imo^lml
£t w« (IV*0- ft (vO-«pgft£t ii Ptfdifi i i fir* ^j.
(««)• Xs%i n
II \R° II II ?<> II
5T> ^K^I^K- WT *RtcT I STftTHHT (*. II WKK ?
wfeprf 35*$. (R. lovs^) II
5fit 1* OT;: II
ii m ii at ft n ni
*,<4H4<!iH. 1 T<rft ft^d |-qTq,(lW) II
ii m Ii trcr SlH II R II
imsinnrMimi
^PSEFf Wffo II ^K, fcftw:) STT^f". (?) I
1 ^1: B. B Sift: B.
2 »s!lsqt^rr: B. 7 "^rjPJ: B.
3 K&trfa° B. 8 is wanting in A. B. C.
i After this B. reads 5^1. It 9B reads-TF>St ^ etc.
/ omits t^fit ftrfepi.. 10 B reads 5pftffr >1M°5° ( Si on the
6 !!$ instead o£ gtf Wftm, B. margin) 5T$H I
ii w II swn if* ^ otw n s II :
II ?ru II 'srasfirafe trot: ll *ni
10 i dxii^K * I WSSFCJ I 3Gw!r% ^TSI^r: Sm^hAJi II WH* •?•
*Rf: *K^" I sHb *l^d" I ^?Tt: ^fcT ? 3FTi TOTTJ II
II &\ II ^Ik M II S II
is II K*s II ^ II V9 H
srare^ I qrofj: i *rsrc^ I ^rerrqj ^i&m< i ^rc^ I ^tf^'
w^i grfecft i T^tcfr I <<rf^^rr i ^c^n i w&n I *r*ren I
TOT =3- I STHT I TOSH I %CSTT I *TWT II
1 s^^re b. io ^mm' b.
2 srerfarer b. n ^ihi^ i i b.
3 See h 12 B.
4 mim\° B. 13 See 5.
5 «>R^r ?T fa^T B. u ^RRf^HI^Rr B, Wfa^W Bur.
- 6 ^Tf^ B. 15 After this B. reads SjMttflfa ' W^"
7 ^tt§ ^ b. ^Trar.
8 B reads-^5ffrfc[N^4^: *Wl%etc. 16 Zffl B.
9-B has^W- l^RTW*: I 17 WC H >Kl< (i B.
V^R: I ' 18W3W*B.
ii ii sjfcrcptftoi^ ii c ii.
«hld*8,.dl<{idi "ET«(hK«l4«id I "E^P: I <hld*!J;d: I jpiri^n-
yd***!j ^sfa' 1
11 11 «rifcr ^KraT 11 ^ 11.
II ?3° II TTTPHt S^ft HTJT^ II ?o II
<&<!*hj Jt\^i!<i^\ ${$i<-%g}n <m. it. 'VO 11 snffra rfa ? m:
[ w*r ^wr 3
11 uni fJr^TF^r «tt 11 ni i
ftrcr^ srfir fenft 'ftnywiPa II
II ?V* II fall T II 5 II
1 After this B. roads 3|IW«ft. 5 «4llti<»Sl B.
2 ftiW - B. OB reads •llflll+IWi Rts^II^?j «Pf:
3 Is wanting in B. tnt ^ W*H5i II
1 'WSft Bur.
ii m ii ft* ii \ ii
f^^f^(tUo). ft: *3T%n}M T^ftcT^I PiMlRcHRT I
II IVi II %t || » ||
5 II?^IIW§%%IUII
i ^^m?^* ? g^fo^ ^s^i tTT^^r ^ I
II ?^ II JRRtN II % II
10 mfw^T WlTcH I
II ??\9 II ft: II v» II
fe^ld^l T^RT^I fewjlftdf^ I
II ^ c || fir: II c II
T^n^i f^gr^i f^qRcrq; i f^w^ i
is II ?U II ^ II II
=5T3W^I ^WRT^I ^MlcT^ 1 y^MUd^ I
ll-?»o n srff: u ?o ||
ii st% g^fto ii
1 ^FTffecT^B.
2 After this B roads. ^rrScfl^.
3 Is wanting in B.
4 B reads % \
5 ^wter hfor- b.
6 -^i\d^ f^fr^-: srcr**: A - B -
^fcT tfft'- 5TTT3^: C. Bur.
II W II 3 nPUkW sfifrft II ? II
ii m II ^ II 3 II
11 \n w^fkiw 11
<t»< id ifa(d ? vwrfiri <mt% iRJTvfi^ f (=(.3°0. *J3-
II ?»» II II » II
1 B reads ftqffcl 3. i 'jft^Tr (or «IT) B.
2 So B and Bur.515<t° seems correct. 5 After this R reads ■utatsjuwu
3 B. puts fnllstop after this. 6 B.
] " " ^i<d*H [ « 5 \> *"*=t«V9
ft m n ft f%f% imi
II m II ft II q II
^mro cttowt^ fcaw). wf^w cm mflft (^m:). wfeft**-
cRTft (U*). f^r W^W^TK (t ^V9). f^:4^'
^r^arerr* ^qn: (t^$=0. miwr i sttct:
(UU).>rr i^t: ttk (u*l); wsfafe (f^n: tw). *rc«r-
( ^hT: ) I ^^ft: m^RTTT?cf ft. W).. || q?*ft f $W
ft.Ro). (^0-
1 Instead of this B reads 6 After this B reads SWOTfa "
2 Is wanting in B. 7 M fcer this B reads tftf *r*Tff I
4 W A. B. c. Bur. 8 m% B.
5'*Ra* 9^B.
II ?«n||^Tj: || c ||
t.W. frH U fllPc T II fa^ t ft I (V?Q g: WP: (WW).
ipth Bent (sn° nr. tvt*— *tciO n
II f: II £11 »
«hw»a^ (sn° tt« i qq^Pd i ^wt^P Sr (t.W) II
rj:^: f 3ws (?.?*«). fogs <J# (t.^c). 71?!^ (?.««)•
<jr?3ir f^$w: i 10
II ?y° II^^Ttnresftll ?o II
fftfag ( m»n.App. v. ) n ft^ift i ifcf^"
tft^E^r' (3n.nr.^c,x) u n'MOcH^f r ? ^ra^ (m.nr. w) i is
II W II 3t*fo II ? II
II W II 5^ II R II
jwi sraj^ «*i<«m<4tt i I <j!M<ftr I j^sr *n{ i 20
S^lj^ftifoffag sriisr£r>fg»TPrfcti ifcwd:' f
1 m^ftT 6 After this B reads Vl&lH,
2 P&tflg. B 7 After this B reads SfTC I ft I
3 5fft° Bur. ^ I aMim
4 b 8 gtoi b
5 trftfa^ B pati occurs here in 9 t *H u * t & B.
'prajapate'. lOgWIB,
I ^rfcT & (Sic) I STATIST %fe ^ ^T^T^ITT-
II ?M3 II II 3 II
ll?M»l|SB^%ll»ll
ii ii ^ 3nmi
^s^: ^ sfrq^r *F5TOTrn& i to^ ^ shirt" i ^t^tt^
15 ^tjft I ^TO^ I
ii m ii i fc rcp ft II $ ii
s^ttt n^-^r^f s^r^r src^ I ^rr^S fro (l.W). ^ ft
1 B.
is wanting in Bur. Bur. has
3 ^ETRT: B.
4 ^tfe^B.
5 This is wanting in Bur.
6 B.
7 B.
8 TWW B.
9 ^ Is wanting in B.
10 3TR^TC B.
11 Wfafasp^B.
12 3rrf%r B.
13 *iHK B.
14 ^RT% B.
15 o^^o c.
16 sr^rri ^f^^r b.
17 WJFT B.
18 B reads trq sfe I etc.
Il?«v3 II ;ttp$: II V9 1|
II ?y=ll i: II n||
inirn^r sn*re I *nrKfc «r: (l-^-l hmjafft I tsv-
II mil *S^r II 8. II
ocr* snr *nffc ('..0- w (KAW) u *tot^ ?
II ?<i<> II ^11 ?« II
C m <sM *m-' ]
II II stf str HUi
II \Vi H^ftro&IUIl
(utvO- im*zfc (mit. w. ?) i jrol (sn.ir.i A. I).
^ ? "' IHl' l fe (WW) I
1 ^ Bur.
2 IRJ^f Bur. •
3 -RrWrBur.
4 b.
B Btl B.
6 Jftfr B.
7 Is wanting in Bur,
8 Instead of 3*T B roads <3Tf^.
n n3t& n 3 n
II W II 3^ TO^rW llttll
n 11 $swri% imi
^ffrc: srwn^r 5 ^F?cir 1 rearer 1 £^^3nr% 1 hh^h^frt i
II «5 II #W<fl»m II $ II
10 n ?^ n^^rPRFftj nun x
II ?^n||55% ||c II
15 i<^r ^q^r ^q^r 1 snsreRr (mirX^u). \k srcrM (S.^Jtf)-
1 ^KW^W B. 7 B reads ^rrffW.
2 "S^m Bur. 8 l^f B.
3 3Sllft*ig5qwflrfa Bur, 9 B.
4 «>§?*lftfffir Bur. 10 ^*d^W<5 ^ 5ft B.
5 *5#*T3T Bur. 11 c# B.
See 3 12 §<pf 3 B.
a, «. *-«=*\sx ] ^er^ 1 1*
II ?V3o |KJ || \o ||
( WVi). fTI Sltf 5Cli° (W). Vj fol^ <fn?^H, II
[ m m$ ^ 5 3
II ?vs? HHfaTCT Wll ? II
«• *0 1
11 11 tffti «ng^lR 11
3?ffa: mj^mn<£> 1 tn^rt z& (m nr. 3, t stpt^
go (?.«^). «r^^taij(i.va»). g «nr win 1 srorr sfr ? tot ift 10
11 ?vs* 11 si^r 11 3 11
wsrc &«q«u<it ?! (W»s). ewh;
f^m^-W) 1 10
II **9« ll^lpgRS^IlB II
fcra tfe&St: (ua). «-t}it.iW (UW). if^rfa (KAtZ).
f^r ? w. U*«) I 20
1 ^EiJjtRli" B. 4 B does not add ^ to 15 in any of
2 "^my^NI^ B. those examples.
JSoB.J Bar.
q^rg^r jflSKroret ^s^f^cr frlrfcr i ^r8?rcf fsR^Fcsrersrfc
ii ?vs$ ii ^ts^^ n $ n
|| ?\9c IK^r^^if II c II
(^.^)-sn3cfTf^ I qre^^JTrft (^;. ^,i(o.\9.). wftstt: (r.W9).
ii ?\sa ii #j n a n
1 So A and C °*RT^T° B.
2 So Bur. 5T #FT I I STfcT I
^ I SRTfcT I TOgfifrsfcT I I B.
3 T^^TFTo b.
4 f^rta^ f^ff% I B.
5 «T is wanting in B.
6 tfcJIT B.
7 After W there is f^3T on the margin
of B. Then it reads f^SRlT.
8 So A. B. C. tffo Bur. At the
end of the comm. B. repeats T^T-
3*ff^but after crossing ' it gives
as the correct form.
9 See one.
10 ^3 is -wanting in B,
11 gsrrafa B.
12 _«rft B.
13 TfOTW 0 B.
14 ^ in all the three examples, B.
16 ^^t^B.
II ?co IHTtHJuri 1| $o ||
II ?e1 II 3tg*sTR$% 11
It II II \\ II
II ?c» llt^m^^Rq.11 ?» M
snm* d tn<nw«^ i h tr*Krct «i<ft flfd ' l i
ijsif ^nE ||
1 TOWT=T. B. 7 JPTO^ft ^ Bur
2 R^swh I for&fa I ^.fc'^tlH B 8 |T% is wanting in B.
3 Bt^inFft B IH^I S MWtft ft Bur,
4 ^ B. 10 Are wanting in B,
5 ft^B 11 From this up to sffWH. Jt» is
6 * B, omitted m B,
n ii sre^^s^fa n r n
10 II ?eella3ft%ll»ll
II II S S ^ II VII
¥
h sfrncTT sr^r ^irt ^^sftacr i %^tfcr I sr^crt i
ii ii 5rf^n% =qnfTCi ii $ ii
1 ^mil B. has ^ instead of 5.
2 *Rfa)TC:° B. 8 S^RT B. ^RT Bur.
H ^ B. No sign of STftftr^f- 9 After this B.has sTR^fcf.
10 ^cfid^ B.
4 o^rnrt b. .11 qs^tr^FR b,
5 *n^t B . 12 fef^rf% 1 ^B.
6 It W^t Bur. 13 #WffiT Bur.
7 Bur. In comm. also Bur.
lite? ii w & II II
II ?£R II M c ||
tR: st* %fa <j^r *iyw\-iL'U\v)n I
11 ?s.3 11 'm m\<$Awi\ - nan
II ?S.tf II TO 1^11 ?° II
5ft q?mt ^nc: 11
[ m ist w ]
11 11 m^n ? 11
m cfir qjfei ^dwTwd t^r i spresrr tot w'" i
11 te$ 11 f^am«n^n r 11
nh<cfl h\o\ «rM<) •M+i€t i'ti^y"wd srttiu^Hj amfVh<9 " srf^r-
1 A.B.C. 7 SRW' B
2 3T is wanting in B 8 Omitted in Bur. I ^hstr-
3 This is wanting in Bur S^T: I B.
4 Bar. 9 "ftfft B.
5 Soo 4. 10 TO! B.
6 ifajSrwr 1 iftfJnfif <rtea is 11 srftirra'fw.
wanting ,n Bur 1 2 jj. has WTKsnW I «HfatcW I
i.9
10
refer* ^f*t: x I
II ^oo ii $ n
11 n^mwri V9 11
II ll5RTO3jft! II c II
II || 3T>^f2[^Tl% || £ ||
20 STR^fT^^" I
1 B.C.vjqSRT A. Bur.
2 5Rft B.
3 WTf^m Bur.
4 W Bur,
5 P?reaT Bur.
6 B has WW3$ I f*FP I
7 f^WT° B.
8 °W B.
9 tSRFft Bur.
10 WTUJi ^fffcf Bur.
11 After this B reads a<r**H '
12 The comm. is wanting in BurneFs
edition.
II R°* II mm4«Pk3 II ? II
ii ii mm ■mm\ fc$&i% v 3 u R n
IRovsllMra^^lUII
ft.^— gajfsf) 1 31^:* (?.w°)- tfczFZ'* *rm$' ?
II II fr l Wkm^ qrft II » II
«hl^ d l <to^ S i^ , »TWq»ftl' h^lwft ?.|. lcn< <ll ftw <^ sl^'fi " l
11 H^^rr II « 11
II 3?° II TO^t^js II $ II
1 3TW=M *T Bur. WT«4 "RSB. 7 B. gnos beforo thu 35 I
2 3TRl4 ^IRr Bur. 8 5ft?refr Sft 5 ^ 'TCS'IJ: B
3 Wlwftfl'SlSfir: Bur.»*f[r#»A B C (j B has I *reku% I
4 5*TT is wanting in Bar. 10 OTsftrra is wanting in Bur.
5 *unfc s *i*tr arcfrft stjf ^ u oHrsngl^ft b. °^si;<KTftBur.
is wanting m Bur. 12 Is wanting in Bur.
6 Ru^Wk is wanting m B.
]
[ «, vs. \s-*o=^y
II II TOJ^Ti II vail
11 W 11 <£lt ^ITPTT f*TOT II c 11
IU?3 11 II a 11
10 ^?rr^ ? wr^ai-s^ m^rmfcr i
1 Is wanting in Bur,
5 33%: Bur. The correct form seems
2 So B and Bur. ^iH^Jd seems correct.
3 A. B.IT^^C.
3^r. C£f#^in212.
6 So A. B. C. Bur.
Bur.
7 ^f^T^T cJ^fRT: JNOT B.
C. Bur.
iiqafcr'sw II ? ii
ii w ii wm *Rfl<«M<3a ii i ii
ir?c ii fosrer II 8 II
fesarro (?.^«). fesa-^: i fasarag: t».?^x.!<). fa^ncre; us
1 W§ »3r Bar. 3 Is wanting in B.
2 fafe 'tis B. 4 In BV. 10. 146. 2 oceunr ttWH .
iR?$.nfer^lrii m ii
It II ^^^il^^^^^^fFf ^ II S H
5 =sr srercg Scalar ^wtfc?t ^rsffrrarrcr i
II W II 3^ lie ||
15 cfrfcf ? ^rau 4hr I
irr? Ii fit ii a. ii
IIW? ll^f^ OTl II ?o II
1 fe^T^'jffa is -wanting in all examples the list of examples the a,nd
cited in B. the comm. are given. Bur. has
2 ^f^f B. C. So everywhere. ' '4$K'<fr instead of *J^°.
3 Is wanting in B. At the end of 4 In all examples Bur. reads long t«
ii ii m II ? II
' IR^ HJn^^lR II b
wmEm& i I wmPutMj wmflidifift f%^? toihui
ii ii q^Hii*^!ar^ ^ #f IU II
|R5?= ii Jiretf >nfl ii » ii
Miyi*j*-dl <OtJT-M«ifct m^sjd Hr4<4 1 itr-TR;i tnrnn^i 3fisr-<nK.i
a<Him< , i g^-Tra; i gtnrr^Oi.XoS) i is
II II ^ ^^ippfaf UNflW^I ^ II K II
1 nn^rara; (*t wanting in) B.A.O. 5 B.
2 Before this B has HI+^ldN. 6 B.
3 B reads *TTfe l&fii. 7 Is wanting in B.
i Before this B reads ^IMHr 8 *ffct° B.
II II SW*tFT ^ft^l^ ^TTf^f || q |J
n ^3? ii n*km\<\§ ii vs*ii
sr^rc sttA sra& ^isff^ra" TpnqT^^TW • f^#: i 5ft^#; i
to^tk^i i tk^tt^k: \ fpft^ ? srr: i si^: I jrarct* i 3T3tri% ?
T^ir6r i fessn^fr i t^rrS i ^terrier i jtrt^t: i swt: i otot i
II II JT tlK^t^S 11 c II
II ^ II si *rar*fft ^ ii a. ii
?r srr**rR ^fecr =5r ^tmwcr i srrerTtr ^rtrt^ i msn^r
5XW^ i top?: ^cfttj i smT^r ^^tt; i
R^PTTf^^RT 37sfr*RR cT^r^Tfr ^TcH 5Tr# I «#tfT 3ffa3T I
TOtti i rsrtj^ ? r#& I fkfirik i mbfr^ i
20
II ^ II R^tf^aifr II ^ ll
1 ^cRk Bur.
2 SI^ Bur.
3 T^Rf: q^farcr: B.
4 tf^RSi: B.
5 This is wanting in Burnel's edition.
6 So A.B.C. Bur. has tfvPTFT.
II W H 3*i S II? II
f^<d^ni, i <ptt ffc tfta (1.3=*). f?mmn' ( m it. «■ jtbt-
(t.w»), smr erst srerr 5 T^n w- ft.'W).
ftrail' (tw). 3^31 ft W ft fon g
1 So 0. 3? A Bur unci I!
2 »^1fir Bur
3 So B, gnf is wanting in Iiurnel.
i RfflHIWIH. B.
5 ^WT 3[ B.
6 im B.
7 ^FTO 13 wanting in B
8 mi WW B.
9 So B Burnol road' ?
10 B doos not add ^ in any
examplo
is wanting in II
12 Is wanting in B.
13 B roads TT^^
14 tfi*^* B.
li^v9 lis ^frtPr %ri^: IRK
1^ far W) CTfaTO: I ^ ^1%^ (m ^. ^iWT ^
II ^ II ; II 3 II
10 wrua ft (*.W> ^^T'€° ^
^ ^n%T^ Wil ll RlxfTR I T^T
ftfr*^ (t^). *fr&rfo y T*rtr?raT%
(KM*). TFT eHh (m g*. 1
1 5 ll*Ullftfaf^% lltfll
^iw'i B ^ ^fcrrcn ^ 9 - ^ *
IRS* ||«3&imi
^T^Rf ^sffacriar i W¥n^rcr ; (S.V>0- srtfMm
1 3tor^R° Bur.
2 T B. It has both the 5 *frS?rftr B.
Short and long niatras in ^fig. 6 ^tf^SRt Bur.
*WH° Bur. 7 W*ffa^ B.
3 STTfNr W^lr B. 8 WHW- is wanting in B.
• 4 After this B reads <?P^ ^ 9 Wtffo?: B,
^ 115 II
<K^id,y«ft sir i
(t 5 ^). jrrafsnjm h» (*.«»«). ot fn^ wot jt° (i.^x).
II W II otffaif. II c II
^ft** ^refc ^ r&ds ^Efhmfir i &%^n ffe (u°^). ^
sgft.sw). otj.5(?.r=) *37 3;g(?.Uo) EWOT?K?.n°).3rci-
5^: d-^x) tj^iR^^R ! i nag ?n£pmt.V«) ^rffej^-
II m II ^F# r II v9 II
II II IIS. II
1 sng b
2 irenf b
3 is -wanting in B
4 So A B C Bnrnel roads ^>rf%
5 SUIMH B
6 "TO 3 B
7 Scftar B
8 °:frcr B
9 "{WcTCtt Bur
10 :jcfaft<3Sf.ifr" B
11 qmr b
fe^cri q^r tsr^ ^rfw#: £ n^if^fm^c i
^)?ren;(^° ^«)~i%rqi^K: i (M°0- serein 0 (tv>*).
10 to (UW). terpr (l^l). ^ (2TT.5TU,^,y, wt^t)
o^TT WcT (^.^). T^RT {l.k^X). srofaf^cT ft.ttU). ^T%^-
W)« I SHWcT (t^) I
[ m ^ ^mi 3
ii W iiftr ii ? n
(t^). smT^T II f^St: , ° ? snT^c" 0 I
IIW3H ?fN¥Tf 5T^IR 11
1 Wr is wanting in B. tal.
2 T is wanting in B. 8 ^W'B.
3 After this B reads W$5T. 9 B.
4 B has *PTRT ^. ,10 f^KIKS& (?) Bur.
5 After this B lias qfflfcq H So Burnel. tffctVt % ^ A. B.C.
6 Bur. has ^T^RTqr^5fc2T%:. 12 W B-
7 But here SJW (3^t) is instruuien-
II Vis || q || 3 ||
ira^t cffeffrrafir i ftmt 55: (?.^£). stfarr foifti> (t.)«a). b
ggm f£W (l.m)- «rs^ 1 fn-r smtfift ( wt) 1
II a^lltf II
arriii^m ? ^ aaf ft.^)- gw g%(w°t). )i> xmik 10
(wt.H.as).5fi^rfti^r: 11 (H^iPi ' msr sTCrmJj. m
^ek (t«t<>). 35^" (=?.tc). *rr»r nwET (t.3~). Jitarq;
ir«o n^na 11
II W II II <i II
11 w 11 stg^ 11 « 11
30
II II W II a H
5 $ g-q^r ^r^ff^rf^r i m ^Am^
II ruu ii srr 3 *ftfaftr 11 ?° 11
[ m ]
IR«l|9TOTll ? II
15 IRHvslI ^TFWt'lR II
^nsrfN:* 1 c^rr (U^). m 11
II RHc II II 3 II
1 A. B. C, 7 c i*Nftrcffir (sic)' Bur.
2 qfiffo B.C. 8 So Bur. and B. ?3P% A.
3 ^ is omitted in Bur. 9 %3^fl^° Bur.
4 B has Wpfc instead of ^l^4d. 10 WIff[ A.
5 So Benfey. ^TT^r Bur. ^FP^ B. 11 W Bur.
' 6 So B. Bur. 12 TO B.
a, a. a-e=w J t^t-d^ [
sriw hrt «tk wPr srfir snV sjg" ft: 5: wftt^difa i^tk i srtfr-
< wi<flnm , hhw t%^t: i fern; %^ sn. 5
11 ^e. tuns 11
tTIH 1 5rat ^TK (t«o). ^rai WIT (l.V«). t|fiiH<H
II II ft 3#ft II V II
grw w» (t-Hoo). tnnSr (Wis— s?s ftrwrg Oi&witft V- for n°) 10
? fon^rft (tiv). «t%rWr tfSr ? 'Jtar 5 1
II ^? II mawiR ? II $ II
II II snr: II *s 11 15
^i%fof frref% 1 hj sire; (t.Vtt)- ^rftfir ? arfe- tflqunn
II W II^S^i: lldl
g^rra; it: sps'nt^fsffvreTcr 1 wwa' ^» (sir. w. %%).
fk^i: 1 (srr.^.vs) 11 ftfrnft 1 ss^rcfto (stt.h.^). finn^ 3;<> 20
1
1 Stft Bur. 6 Is wanting in Bur.
2 sft Bnr. 7 swift ( no Rw-S'/fa in ) Bur,
3 fa<^ Bur. 8 See 7
4 55!B. 9 JtfTRT: Bur.
5 MIHWHI Bur.
II ^« II II a. II
II ll ^ fl s qfiift H ?o ||
(mar. ^ fefe Jrasrr^sr). srw^^ftr (m #0-
iiwnpjmi
11 11 3** II * II
15 ft*wO I
II II HT«TT^ II 3 II
1 TO: Bur. 8 B never adds =f
2 ^B. 9 M^T B.
3 3% B. 10 B.
4 After this B reads H A omits W-
5 After this B reads mfo I T5FT: I 12 T^T Burnel.
7 W : B. C. Burnel.
X, vs. U-\s=W ] %<vyi«m. [ W
II 3*18. II ^ ^ II » II
xxa).?nirsEr: l (l.^).*?rai%i?r r^rfiT^(?.^°).!ig^o(tm)i s
II ^° || || « ||
it ^^r^KTO^ri ssmfir 1 5T ^ I ftifm (^««). stt^ct-
•rer (*.«V0- 55^: (v\*V>). Wn#ft (Ute i
II Rol II 5 II
U). m^ff:" ii ftijTnfti 5^ (^.x^U^i^fWf^rSfir'i
ll W n^^r^r^li « li
^.W^.O-Prth!ri^(t.W).5IT^"(t^8).mS^"tt.^!tvs). tft- 15
(* «=)• famb (*..vs\s!<). f^pnT! (?,s;U). yyii<!ji: (stt.h.vk) li
n?rrt^ (UX3). MK*l^m, (Uvg). ^t^ c (=?.vs?S!). orargf 1
1 JTT sj^Hlj, B. 10 =H<?f7trr B.
2 Bur. f^Rftlsoems correct. 11 WT= B.
3 °srfir tsi<j'() b. 12 ^swfitr b.
4 ='TtRw>mfa' b, 13 srairt b.
s Hflt b, h ^rart b.
6 ButAr. Br. has mtforft" .Tfaifaftr: 15 iRftT: B.
(3=T om. in) B. 16 StSOTffH, B.
7 Tlt*rq* B, 1^ I* wanting m B.
8?*% I 18*RitB.
9 Bur. mucoMtruei ^sfaWtft and 19 TO B -
gives a q«erv mark.
ll W II mrcwn^ II c ll
5 wrrcp (tV>*). frmrr^r. (U^). ^ ^tfjj^: (tw). hht
irw ii tf^r n ii
u 11 ^ ^"wrifft 5 ^ ^rl^ 11 11
'wrM (tRte). sNjfcrc T%^R?^r: ft.alvs).
[^^^:]
ll W t! ^T^TT^rlrw: ll ? ll
20 ^r^HTwf srerrcr *T**nr iro^; 1 ^ 1 srrc^f 3 1 %m 1
1 V*m'T Bur. 8 RRT% B.
2 SPTT pJR B. 9 B.
3 ^Ts^r B. 10 ?ITC^WRR: B.
4 ?P5%S3 ter° B. 11 Bur. reads instead of W«f.
5 3Prf%WPn^ B. 12 Bur. reads 3rlf*lW!l<< I ^«f^pfl^
6 *T«TH\driin: B. B omits ^ffa.
7 This is wanting in Bur. 13 After this B has 1^1
II Rw II 3ft IR II
d^r^'str^irpj^- I 3 ITT TOt" W (l.*J&3T).£>TI 3
^ <rM sir). ^f5t ? ^rrf?rfe ftrm. ?r ■Rt i s
i i ft— ^ fi^ra^ 1 1
IRvsc || 31^1^ || ^ ||
irg i mis i intj l
II ll mwitqj l » II io
U.W).si^i5r?!^(t^vsst).OT^fT(l.s;=o).^m-^'^ro(tMs;).
u ?r'*(R.^).H'!n?q;-(t.^5.o-?g73;g' ; t.^--Rf<ft^r). srtftrtr'-
sncfreft'* (?.v>s,voO. 3romf^%" ? 5ti jtt (?.«3). srfir wh;
tot & s^fer" 5Tfm^rtii\fcr" ? is
II 3=° lln^lTS II V II
1 ITOIJR. Bur.
2 ^ is wanting in Bur.
3 B reads SASHIMI 3 I
4 b.
5 B roads JOTcT instead of 1^1%.
G ft is wanting in B,
7 B reads S c[ OTt HJtfTORiffa.
s'?1 Bur.
9 sWil^Bur.
10 Is wanting in B.
11 B, has3r3wf° and gives 3 below
the line.
12 Is wanting in B.
13 5T^f is omitted in Bur.
H *TT3° B.
15 wu<jyejiG$q«*(rcitar b.
1G Bur.
17 <^ B,
^rrar (t^) ifrf^n^imren*^ {k&wf (im). f^rer-
IRc? H ^ =5fT% || $ I!
10 iRc^ H ^t^n^f II vail
II ^ n h?^t: II c II
(*.V>«0. gri^T^ (tRVSfc). ftafrrO' ot^t?^" (m *TT.
^. ^— ^rrRTwo). TH^-crq; ^r?«r ^ ? ^ 1
|| ^Ctf || ^ ^ II 5. II
1 ^TcTC^f B.
2 f^rer b,
3 ^rcr^rrf^TOcf b. ^i\fk sfa Bur.
4 So B, Bur. reads <*><463 and says
'this name is not known.'
6 Is wanting in B.
7 Is wanting in B.
8 Is wanting in B.
9 Is wanting in Bur,
10 B.
11 Bur. refers to Ar. Gr. III. i. 5.
Neither jyotisma © (his reading)
nor syftlcfojo is found there.
*, vs. ?o-U=^=vs ] vW^H. [
(=U°°). ftfov ^ (UlB). ifn^' ftrA t.l°a.u).
fwres^ (U«). finite i sfiti Htror(tvs). sng: g5*g(uai).
Tims: ho (u^). 5^: (tato). ^nft^n (t^t). &3<msr
(sn. jt. t, <t.— wrxjsrc). Wri^iA (src. w. 3. vs. ^i-^— crftreta
WIT:). (SlMUii^ (STt. iT. 5, c— wfe^nfeO I vjl^u^cyi'SpKlT: 1
II feqft <ft II ?° II
W (?.?"=). H5JjKT° (t.^vso). °<r ifrw: 0 (?.vs«) 1
IR=$ II 71^: II ?? II
Ti^'Ki ^4f?mrra^ 1 5^:' (?.*><<.). ^sft'* (t.au).
IRcvs || ^RtS^f! || (HTOt^t, ?.?.?) II
it 51% OTsRPRis^jtFTSTPror «n<J^" n
1 h!+wi b.
2 fltRre Bur. Cf. RV.10.42.10,
3 «&W B.
4 *Tt B,
5 ■t+RMC" Bur,
6 I3 wanting in Bur.
7 Bur. gives Jrat theopeningof
the stanza also.
8 5=5 tfRreifa B.
9 $Bt: B.
10 wfasqjft: B.
21 So Bur. ^3<bl$f&t5'<?<l«lTTOlrflTr-
TTH_ A. The colophon in B runs thus-
mmt iim: 1 ^tg& utr^: swim 1
^5t'l*IHslWI^"||ji'!llRWH«J(l+t<0-
awn^fasa'i.i ^"iii'iwi 1
SRftctftFRraOT 33"% I After
this begins fll^a'^n. (with the
comm.), of which onlv one page is
preserved in B.
APPENDIX I.
INDEX TO THE SOTRAS.
40
ST*!!
262
281
46
81
51
204
193
167
190
3rf=ntni?iRt o
11
&
54
s#
127
225
223
213
135
>i<w<ft ferrate
197
143
94
3"TOJt: 105. 258
164
117
sHUh'iW Q Id K-
261
71
230
182
279
23
53
97
109
114
124
278 snRKttflftfsfriitcrT 141
3
STfrJTIrirsmT^^ 186
205
235
173
206
271
'17
200
177
195
238
154
WH*<K «Hldt5
201
250
85
21
144
102
76
75
86
252
222
70
256
277
*uiuv ^f: i
118
41
237
9
sr3 <rr
161
3rwr srnr:
14
73
2
m£i 240
215
217
155
3Tl^cfteT3T° 208
88
T%d%^t^Rt WTCQl 0
f^rTT^^ncJT^ 196
§^3*^ mmi 199
^ ^rcswr 191
^d^cTRffcn^ 128
m^fi m kw&'> 276
V c\ r\*v. rv p t-.
ws^s^&m 57
^rm% 242
fin
tcf^nr
^U-vrfHld
V V
282
136
38
49
79
203
50
113
112
148
139
267
RIW#^f 4
'^M^rry^K 147
% 246
cT^ 249
VT**»<4rf««5 249
WU^Wdlft 61
crr^r 5
»v
rv
fl[: *q&
rv rv
110. sr^T 80.100
29 68
44 ^TU^TON 1^^233
168 JTT^T% 187
172 str;^: 157
243 TrFRT^q-
176 130
251 TOT^nlr 228
58 5m%f»wr
121 ^T^TTTH^T: 12
138 fa: 133
39 ft^rfMsr feffnm 37
77 faBWTH 234
82 ffw^i^ ' 55
7 sftew^; 247
178 ^tS<retS% 78
174 ^FRfrreqT 59
284 Sfcft 163
69 3t*T«nT33 153
188 $fS*r 21 A
212 ^rwqr 151
120
60
165 tr^^j iwT^rar-
259 ^ 33
.11 q^^'cRll-
^ *ftwtf» 227
285 ^^ %r ^ 62
43 q|^rK^rm^--
231 ^2
74 g^f% *T3W?TT 129
209 - to ^ 194
275 fq 146
72 s*q$ 152
134 # T
272 «n^^g-fv5r:
i
3
gr: 142 Kf!J^ 270 nzg 218
^sfcrsr^J-wW K$m£rim$vf 1 15 ^wr^fao 216
^ fl^<l<fln t q. 166 wprfir ^sTPTiq; 181 *r^pf ^^rrfemnr: 45
Httlct: 63 ■iH^fd! 116 ^PTTftT-
g S -t q i jt o 232 159 20
Hfrt^M Vli fi ! 202 H^Wti^ 107 22
sn^Jtrcrra 226 <.<h i 3°w'I 24 *mw$TS^rfa-
srT^^TTftrfcf 255 273 185
SIS: 140 257 241
«TT?siM: 253 Kfi&st 123 y-VvjiM^HTR 87
*rnmri sjfcrcSt: 96 Tjg;^ 269 ^?r: 179
ajjn^ 48 ^?*nsft 169 ijtTfsny^m^o 220
it^ 150 TrertT^ 26 u i ^n : 286
JT - 248 ttHTS 280 fSjnfjt: 245
a E h qmm 104 ftftrfe 145 #?nn^ 56
TTFircr^S: 210 * H9 gTOT- 283
90 ^-S^-SSnTOT 265 ct h iumhi^ 111
JTHU 42 ^fJ^rETT 8 f& ' «l«5*< . 95
WHWUm - M 28 183 sjfinmra 30
64 &*n^ 93 srmr 98
mwim. 268 g^tsr: 83 ^st^rrairfH 125
m^'JT'i, 103 ^^mhw srsnr 156 hpww! %ferr 67
nT^rTHTO 1 tl rt l tHI^HH t P ll 106 sfeg 207
fotjtfWr 260 si£fJrc?£r 162 65.99
wt^r 219 e^tsji^o 229 ^mr&nrdo 214
firgsn^m 131 «ra% 160 ^ra^ «rer 27
JJlSPriSf 6 M^I'di <HHI<& 34 y<W|iHl ^fifr 221
$(13™*: 180 *ff% 47 TO?^ 189
, t: 149. 158 STFE^rfHr: 52 92
jrtt 244 tTOKi 91 sri|Rg-*ronm 224
*TO: 254 fan%sr 132 *rm: tj^Fat-CT-
IWlfitaPr 126 for/fenr: 66 facT: 18
5"r 5 236 t%rirrjinn 36 ^rrwnrswr 171
5PJTT.- ^m^! 19 fir^rs^ft 198 ^jt^% 239
* ! 170 fSrssr^r gsg- ?7&:^r 25
4
*l3tar - 13 2 ilm^rs 122
f^^T^ 89 ^crcsrr: 15 gs^fe 101
^5sft^-3T^rr 35 %rrrft ^ ^^184 108
^rt^?Pt: 287 266 g4cMc£<W 263
APPENDIX II
WORD INDEX TO THE SUTRAS.
231
20
220
40
278
135
217
157
94
46
185
117
204
83
191
130, 186
26
107
217
195,212
71, 114
190
201
53~
190
102,181
281
127
265
141
213
^% i » • i * « ^ i
21
206
208
V
165
206
TOFT
214
124
205
143
76
200
41
111
200
104
252
238
126
256
234
217
41,160
57, 84
196
28,35,53
164
287
193
250
204
81
144
. 205
124,262
19, 75
17
18
69, 237
261
242
222
^^K-' 12, 23, 182
^rSfa^iRt li
277
17,173,
24
61-
186, 265
118
55
109
225
^ 51, 54, 156
&am-. 14 sftn 118 JTW 214
3^ 167,281 3Ttecr 9 JTTggr 227
j<^H 203 sn 73 nt^JJ. 203
■j^ItIH , 51 3r)<{4&: 60 OT 113
192, 197, 223 w 2 * 50, 93, 103, 112,
OTft^ 217 240 113,148
3Wf 97, 105, 258, 216 3 236,237
230,279 «hm»* <£l 84 ^TPTT: 14,115,237
OTTO 59,124 l^tcft 141,189 *T 23,29, 30,70,
3ST 235 <rir 215, 217, 220 72, 123, 126, 127,
3 155 132, 136, 184, 190,
3^ 162 iSVtj 235 224,226,227,233,
3W» 124 tjreflT 208 275
151 re*=C 88 ^rkh; 191
3m 171, 177,271 fe ^f^a i WC 10 ^rg: 139
97 ,%*<ft 196 gg$q; 176
?S 144 grd^r 217 ^d 1 -*^' 32
154,207 199 207
101 V 191 175
106 SSnrir: 125 ^ 247,255
?Sf?r 85, 103 f 8 % 154
?KH 102 ^rf^ dl^wm 128 ^j- 220, 229
v(i<4lwH4^ 273 S>*«rii(> 127 ^ 174, 267
'm* 202,219 <SPRnn. 276 282
^siH 107 i!li|WlH 104 ;rrf=fc 199
19 57 faamgi 8
■tfjnrsft 230 ^ 239,242,282 Jnq;^ 89
1§7 102, 108,160,175, 145 sr^rn 188
182, 188 *r 135 w^ w X 147
■ gh> i «m 62 irrar 136 t% 112
»MUVt 156 TTOrg 38 jjt 280
sJlRT 86 firct 214 qj: 148
Wftft 163 JJ5 49 fij 71, 77, 246
175 231 ^jfrrn^T: 96
• ^WJi 70 »TT 79 cftq^H 184
6
cr^ 249 jJcrrar^ 31 76
TOR: 211 fic: 137,264 to#TP* 164
TOTT^ 61 fl^T^ 37 tt^WT ' 33
cTTcfr 234 245,285 62,220,227
5 fl^% 95 18
29,110,251 j, 43 tt^j^. 172
44 gr^K 231 TO^ 98
^ 227 grt 74 tott^ 34
^ 168 *T<n 230 <irc 192
acfar 172,176,243 ^ 68)72 75,80,100 tft ' 285
260 151,157,163, <I#T% ' 129
58 233,275 ^ 194
?n 112,153,272,274 ^ 194
3lfa 121
tf ? 138 if% 223 ft 146
*T*TC 208 mr 152
T^rre 39,45 - ^
77
?T?T 209 142
^S^cTT^ 229 263
A 82 ^ 218 ^ 84
187 20
5Tm^r 230 ^^tT^r^ 166
?nf?R: 130 %^tj 214
228 sr 212,232
c^TT: 7
^: 165
^ 7, 220, 227
^ 174, 178, 239,
284 286 fm * r?rT * n ^ 12 JT^fa: 63
^Tf^ ' 232 ^T^wn 12 STT% 197
59 fa: 133 SHOT 46, 247
220 fa^rc H sr^r^sr: 202
216 fac*n^r 37 JTT 255
235 faBT^ 234 sn^ 226
3fNr^ 43,212 ^ 54,55,247 m^n^T 192
g: 134 ^ 57 srrssr 229
*rftr 221 78 srwm 97
TO 1 ^fa 59,162 jfkT 217
% 272 #r 120 gfe: 140
Xt 259 ?*n^T 60 253
217
5*^
90
193
214
236
»
34
•fT-vET
229
gun:
16
*• r
253
96
* 26,68,93,107,115,
47
12*1
119, 169,170,265
218
48
269,270
m 3,8,28,29,80,81
192
V3i:
114
100, 131, 161
Sr
150
181
52
jt
104,248
<UWI
207
fSr
198
180
195
64,91
n*wnr 153,178,275
116
132
avy«|(j|^ 32
193
159
66
•rat
24
36
210
216
33
90
257
218
JTPJT
28,31,36,42
•nt*
26
ftrcnpfar 3, 112,115
JIR
04
•a*
218
206
150
tt^t
123
88
268
rra;
280
212
ITT^T
1,103,125
ft
145
44, 68
iir
260
8
216
fift
219
183
210
131
13
222
ST
6
275
thro*
276
272
83,156
45
8
233
*-TT.rff?
78
54
274
»5t<Ii
9
216
214
E7SR20,22, 156,271
126,149,158
106
185
•STcTT
244
213
275
TOT
1
229
241
117
72
87
12,254
75
198
214
160,162
225
112
220
sui-sflv
227
215
67
169
5
56
*STR^ 177
179
220
212
11
181
WScFW: 167
6
67
^ 13,25,152
228
27
264, 284
286
221
m^zt 89
245
92
35, 45, 287
189
18
^rrenH, 53
276
224
& 25, 150, 155
TO
232
201
^ 122
229
232
5: 176
^ 27, 49,
269
98, 105, 130
SrSTPI i°
233
39
IT: 2
129
187
^TfcT^n: 15
52
280
T% 184
^r?^n^ 94, 95
,98,
232
57
111, 180,
283
232
ft^TFTT^ 197
30
171
1^ 266
125
239, 255
<rkT 122
125
211
40, 101, 108,263
224
58
^ 270
wm 65,99,207,214
252
APPENDIX HI.
References to the rc of the S V. in the Commentary.
( The rc in each Samhita are numbered consecutively. )
I. PDRVARCIKAM.
Rc. Sutra. Rc. Sutra. Rc. Sutra.
1 18; 25, 38, 54, 4 49. ' 158, 242, 281.
55,61, 62, 65, 5 76, 119, 169, 284.
Ill, 159. 181, 182. 9 112.
2 112. 6 24,76,117. 11 76.
3 48,180. 7 76,77,111,117, 13 76.
9
15
92, 110.
61
284.
105
24.
17
1, 55, 272.
62
87.
106
56.
18
174, 178,
63
147, 245.
107
85, 269.
19
244.
64
73, 111, 119,
108
156, 285.
20
143, 147.
154, 174, 178,
109
1, 245.
21
171, 236, 241.
185.
113
171.
22
177.
65
242, 245.
114
147.
23
112, 260.
66
250.
115
172.
24
236, 274.
69
275.
116
251.
25
168, 236.
72
245.
117
84.
27
23, 115, 144,
73
56, 67,109,158,118
1, 76.
177.
169, 171, 177,
119
22.
28
23, 243.
247.
120
269.
33
158.
74
285.
121
22.
34
1, 256.
75
82, 117.
1.
35
76, 84.
77
i
J.
123
22, 244.
36
54, 56.
78
124
236, 249, 265.
38
82.
79
1 OS lid
1, 113.
125
52.
39
1,177,242,247,
82
1, 401, ^ol.
126
20.
259.
83
A e if j n^D nan
45,174,238,239,
• 128
56, 109, 249.
41
116.
85
116.
129
52, 94.
42
116, 181.
86
1/1.
132
56, 239.
43
236, 279.
87
90.
133
1.
46
238.
88
236.
134
146.
47
89.
90
110, 146.
138
20, 116, 264.
48
147, 272.
91
183.
139
147.
49
77, 93.
92
71.
141
1,116, 177,259.
50
116.
95
146.
142
156, 265.
52
61.
97
21, 112, 272.
143
272.
53
1, 76, 265.
98
21, 24, 245.
144
1.
56
21,95,117,236,
99
90.
147
52, 110, 160.
242.
101
25.
148
256.
57
243, 274.
102
143, 145.
149
170, 238, 275.
58
273.
103
1, 243.
152
146.
59
93.
104
256.
153
272.
10
154
149.
219
1, 58.
274
174, 236.
155
55.
220
1.
21 S
23, 283.
158
21.
223
1, 279.
S\ t~f
276
20, 112, 114,
160
25.
225
243.
117, 173.
161
238, 245.
226
118, 187.
S\ *M t—f
277
112, 168, 207.
164
244, 257, 279.
228
21, 71, 116.
278
19.
165
1.
229
112, 185, 236.
279
1, 20, 24, 173,
167
242, 247.
230
243.
237, 248, 264.
170
266, 276.
23*2
236.
281
1, 19, 23, 74.
176
159.
233
54, 61, 77, 150. 283
1, 183.
177
70, 110.
234
69,180,185,277.284
281.
178
70.
235
90, 269.
285
244.
180
250.
236
1, 22.
290
93, 183. •
181
242, 257.
237
118.
291
24, 93.
183
243, 281.
239
58,236,260,275.292
112.
186
257, 274.
241
146, 259.
293
159.
187
168.
242
246, 247.
294
147.
188
1, 116.
243
284.
295
1, 169.
190
71, 156.
244
116, 270.
296
174.
191
55, 248, 253.
248
147.
298
76, 146, 244.
192
116, 124, 262.
249
159.
299
274, 284.
193
1, 116.
253
56,174,242,282.302
272.
194
281.
254
24, 245.
303
1,143,144,283-t
196
52, 282.
255
1, 267, 277.
304
76.
198
270.
258
1.
305
69, 72,76,273,
200
260.
259
236, 274.
281, 286.
201
1.
260
236.
307
24.
203
25, 88.
262
71, 236, 275.
308
245.
204
272.
263
76.
309
68, 239, 240,
206
147, 148, 236,
264
174.
258, 279.
.
242.
265
239.
312
146.
210
116.
266
244.
' 313
1, 25,- 180.
214
181.
271
52, 57.
314
284.-
217
144.
272
69, 111.
315
112, 116.
218
238, 275.
273
115.
316
249, 273.
11
317
249.
365
119.
408
76, 93, 154.
318
1.
366
284.
409
1.
320
95.
367
146, 383.
410
177, 249.
321
1,116,124,248,
370
117, 279, 285.
411
68, 76,93,115,
249, 262.
372
154, 253.
276.
322
245.
373
1.
412
54.
323
1, 112.
374
1, 238.
413
286.
324
25, 171, 273.
375
279.
414
279.
325
242, 259.
376
239, 246, 279.
415
56,236,241,245.
326
19.
378
1, 84, 237.
416
143, 145.
328
149.
379
74, 94.
417
27 116 147 275
329
49.
380
22.
419
112.
331
1, 116, 124.
381
112, 158, 256,
423
j.
332
242, 254, 275.
282.
424
22 148 149
335
1.
382
69.
242 247 275
336
1, 240, 280.
383
180.
427
244.
337
89, 159.
384
172.
428
inn 1S6 242
i\JZ?j UVJf ijT**.
339
1, 95, 273.
385
236.
LOl •
340
237.
387
52, 257.
434
1 168 249
341
112, 119.
388
25, 249.
345
54.
390
243, 279.
447
1^0 17^
346
149, 238.
392
174.
448
116.
347
68, 111, 162.
393
147.
450
77 257.
348
1, 52, 241.
395
244, 275.
453
280.
349
284.
396
115, 116, 236.
455
238.
352
245.
397
242, 244, 279,
460
256.
353
1, 272.
280.
461
119, 172.
354
].
398
162, 260.
464
116.
356
238.
400
54.
465
270.
357
242, 272.
401
244.
466
78, 116.
359
86, 95.
402
1.
467
238, 279.
360
1.
403
254.
4fiR
*tuo
55, 90.
361
73,84,111,168,
404
242.
470
22, 236 251.
284.
405
86.
473
1.
362
245.
406
57, 93.
474
275.
12
475 1,28. 533 112,255,271. 580 244,279.
477 61 534 249. 582 67.
479 239. 535 56, 237, 244, 584 90, 112, 115,
481 90,147. 245. 156,265.
482 68 537 238. 585 74,116.
483 1. 538 93,241.
485 76. 539 24,238,273.
486 1, 48. 545 61.
-487 283. 546 68.
II Uttararcikam.
489
61.
549
239.
29
249.
490
61, 284.
550
240, 283.
34
239.
494
117.
551
1, 245,
254,
64
1.
497
163.
285;
77
. 1.
498
259.
553
236.
98
249.
501
249.
554
1, 269.
102
94.
505
55.
556
85, 156.
104
1.
509
242.
557
70, 147.
109
146.
510
22, 133.
558
1.
160
156.
511
68,71,156, 272.
.559
1.
180
156.
512
71, 112, 116,
560
1,270.
204
221.
121, 245, 281.
561
279.
227
147.
513
54, 55.
562
170.
236
279.
514
236.
563
1, 236,
245,
249
144.
515
273, 279, 281.
255.
265
243.
516
112.
564
110, 147.
279
26.
517
252.
565
162, 242.
289
236.
518
239.
566
241 247.
300 •
284, 628.
519
78, 146, 274. .
567
255.
301
143.
523
170, 236, 269,
568
279.
304
228.
275.
570
1.
346
168.
524
56, 148, 248,
571
112.
373
178, 207.
528
240.
572
35,68.
389
143.
529
120, 280.
576
21.
431
243.
531
146, 156.
577
246.
441
94.
532
1, 76, 180
579
147.
465
255.
13
541 240.
4
93.
116, 124, 146,
568 236.
. 5
88.
147, 169, 266,
594 238.
6
95.
283, 285.
621 243.
14
256, 274.
Am nyngfl nn .
655 20, 112.
15
1, 256.
i.
659 207.
18
1, 238.
2. 9-168.
668 244.
19
1,93.
6, 12-148.
676 245.
21
112.
7, 4-245.267.
683 192.
22
58, 117.
7, 10-284.
699 259.
23
20, 149, 237.
7, 11-154.
725 116, 173.
24
112, 187.
II
726 23.
25
237.
7, 14-17-284.
735 272-
26
154.
Ill
741 56.
28
281.
1, 1-2-172.
753 55.
33
263
1, 4-113.
773 74.
34
1,263
1, 9-10-11.
775 272.
35
76, 83.
2, 4-150.
777 178.
36
113, 263.
3, 7-284.
850 1,284.
37
263.
3, 5-150, 283.
879 236.
39
271.
4, 5-150,283.
1002 57.
41
118, 239.
4, 10-10.
1010 207.
42
1, 101, 272.
5, 1-162.
1050 1.
44
25.
5, 6-150.
1072 255.
46
147.
5, 11-11.
1076 120.
47
1.
6, 1-162.
1089 280.
48
249.
8, 5-150.
1093 93.
51
143.
8, 10-149, 281.
1126 236.
52
20, 265.
appendix.
1150 112.
56
130.
2, 9-113, 181.
1209 27.
2, 10-150.
Mahanamni verses.
3, 5-150.
Ill Aranyaka Sarp-
hita.
S3
236, 242, 260,
284.
3, 10-116.
Rahasyagana.
Stobhas.
116-277.
1 86, 247.
ss
1, 24, 49, 90,
14.
APPENDIX IV.
References to the verses of the RV. in the Commentary.
I
II
IX
27, 10
247.
41, 2
112.
104, 4
284.
32, 5
245.
III
113, 9
272.
50, 7
178.
53, 9
219.
X
84, 2
273.
59, 8
112.
16,
220.
109, 3
273.
IV
86, 1,
216.
113, 9
272.
36, 5
76.
135, 5,
218.
125," 1
149.
44, 1 .
239.
146, 2,
216.
139, 6
257.
VIII
164, 41
225.
102, 10
273.
184, 2
112.
APPENDIX V.
References to other works in the Commentary.
(d) Talavakaropanisad br.
(a) Pancavimsabrahmanam
2, 1, 1. 225
7, 7, 1, 2. 46
8, 5, 13. 46,
24, 1, 6. 124,
(b) Sadvimsabrahmanam.
It 1, 38,
2, 3, 276,
(c) Aitareyabrahmanam.
1, 1, 225.
1, 1, 1, 225.
(e) Samavidhanabrahma-nam.
2,5,1, 'l.
(f) Drahyayanasutram.
21, 1, 112.
(g) (Amnaya) 206.
APPENDIX VI.
Index to the melodies referred to in the Commentary.
w^rr^crflccrki50. ^rr^ 162. swd^re 113, 181.
168. ^arsrcT 265. srgp^nrre 284.
^TTf^^KT 93. g^Tcf 281. 5T?T^f?T^cr 150,283.
^ ^ 112. ^tfg^ 149, 281. %ht^cT 117, 150.
15
tgftvpr 149. srnn 117,123. ^rufi^ 90,117,
^raTvJTrtftPTE^-150 raw^iWcr 284. 245,267.
ttftfvT 150. Jrmi 162,200. mfcuft 1.
S^m^ 236. jji^tTrewrTJt 154. fawr 260.
SWTtT 1, 162. T^ftT 90. ^mhi 154,284.
<rcq 162. trwftl H3.
Hl ^ iMrf 172. *3H<r 148.
APPENDIX VII.
Index to the proper names in the Sutras.
Wt^rfit 60. 0w) ' 102, 108, 160, 175,
59, 162. 182, 188.
Index to the proper names referred to in the Commentary.
• jT l ^Ut 60. SHtt 59, 162, 176.
w^^' -i (srrara) 90.
APPENDIX VIII.
Index to the Ganas referred to in the SDtras.
srrranft 141. nan% 164. n m d < ,i fi 106.
■Kld^ctTK 128. yft^T% 166.
NOTES
l — 2 ! TT^- Speech Speech i* a series of
sounds ciu«od I»r expelling air
from Uio lungs through different!)
alnpod positions of tho throat and
mouth
^ srftn. Air is tho origin
of sound. Cf. ItPr XIII. ISvith
Urate's comm. VPr I 7 0, TPr
II 2,Pan]nIjrt<iks tG.Wobor, Ind
Mud IV. pp 350 151 Tor tho
(act that air is tho origin of sound
cf. Pa^ot, Human Speech pp 4 1 1
s^mir ^ Cf, VPr 1 7
I_4 ^KIKT Cf P&ksH 0
Tlio tongue
plajs most important p-irt In nrti
culiljon It is a muscular organ,
constant in ^olutno, but hi^hh
and vor) rapidly lariablo in fur in
1—5 Cf stf[$tt5f« %mUi Umv^'s nolo
Uosidos, position, thoro aro foui
other determining elements \\ Incli
cause tho differentiation of arti
culato Rounds \iz, omission, clus
uro, disposition of producing or
gan, and tlio qaantit) Cf IPr
XXIII, 2
p h
]— G Tho omission of UpadhmlVnTya
sooms accidental
1— 7 *i A nmf^f ^fcrc. #ri.
EH?3 ftfa^ft Locatiro preferable.
2— 1 trrjfar «riltf*nrft. According lo
tho grammarians and tho Mtra&-
miikai (ho sound — Sphota is otor-
nal Our organs do not properly
produco it, but thoir action brings
it to tho cogninnco of tho aonsoj,
as tho action of digging brings
wator to light, Cf. Tnbhilsjarat-
na on TPr, HI, Soo also U\ata
on KPr. XIII. U According to
fthartrhnri tho indiwdual sounds
create an improssion in tho hu-
man mind, which is thus ablo to
porcohotlin word Spo(a tho roal
\) indi\i9iblo word, Cf Viikya
padtya 1 85 8C, Kaiya^a on
PAnini 1. 1. 73, Kandabhatta, Vai
^akaranabhusnmsftra, Mamlana
tni<ra, Sphofaslddtil
2-5 Samilpak?ara is tho name of simple
vowots and Sandhyaksara that of
diphthongs In TPr. I 2 tho mno
feamanfikgaras mtondod aro a 6
2
a3; i I 13; u u Q3. The r and 1
vowels are denied the quality of
simplicity or homogeneity though
their structure as composed of
heterogeneous elements is not set
forth. RPr. XIII. 34, 35; VPr.
IV. 145; and OA. I. 37-39
describe the formation of r and I,
while our treatise does not. EPr.
I. I; VPr. 1. 44 include r 1
among the Sarnanaksaras and
CA. as pointed out by Whitney
seems to recognise the same classi-
fication.
2 — 6 The diphthongs are vowel sounds,
which though not simple and homo-
geneous, yet form but a single
syllable, and are treated as if they
were simple sounds. RPr, XIII,
39 cites ^akatayana as holding
that a forms half of each and i
and u the remaining half. RPr.
XIII. 40. states that e o on ac-
count of the fusion of two ele-
ments have sound in which the
two elements are not distinct.
According to RPr. XIII. 38 the
Sandhyaksaras have double posi-
tion. The VPr. I. 73 specifies
only ai and au as made up of
two elements and directs them
(IV. 14) to be treated as simple
sounds. tT^^r=T^R^^rtc^ Uva-
ta. See also TPr.II. 13, 14, 15, 17,
23, 26, 29. For details see Whit-
ney, CA. 1. 40.
2-7 (a) TRf:-lengthening 0 f a stobha
vowel through the incoming of an
i .or u (adding i or u after a or i
after o). For ha-i or ha-yi (for
the insertion of y cf. Weber, Ind.
Stud. 4. 252, Wackernagel I. p.
338) see PpS. 5, 119-190: for ho-
hoyi = hoi 5. 127, 169:. for ha-ha-
yi or ha-i. 5, 127. 129. 131-3. 140.
142. 170; for a-uva a-uvayior a-uvai
5, 183, 184.
(b) In fact a-i and a-u are regard-
ed as variants of a; o-i of o. See
Pps. 5. 119-190.
(c) A form that shows an initial
h, is regarded as a variant of the
stobha without an h; ha-i is a
variant of a-i, ho-i of oo-i, hup of
up. See also ho-ida-oida. For
details see Simon, PpS. p. 520;
J. M. Van Der Hoogt, The Vedic
Chant p. 20.
^J'-. For the definition of vowel
cf. Daniel Jones, Outline of Eng.
Phon. p. 20, For lines 5-25 cp.
VPr. VIII. 1-14.
2-10 3F5TW:=y, r, 1, v. These have
this peculiarity that each has a
vowel corresponding to it, viz, i,
r. 1 u. These were named 'an-
tastha' intermediate, standing
midway (between vowels and con-
sonants) in reference to the mode
of their formation, as being nei-
ther by a complete contact, like
the full mutes, nor by an open
position, like the vowels. Thus
"antastha" virtually accords to
semivowel. For the definition of
semivowel cf. Daniel Jones (Out-
line of Eng. Phon. pp. 25,291) The
word 'antastha' occurs in RPr. I.
9; VPr. IV. 102; CA. 1. 30; Nir.
3
II 2, Tor tho moaning of ontaslha
cp. Whitnoy. OA I 30, Mwdo-
nell, Vodic Gr p, 40, Wackorna-
go], Altind, Gr. I p 107 noto.
2-11 Tor tho unusual order of ak$aras
cf U\ata on HPr I, 3
2-12 '-iUKiRni «*0u*iiHi^pr ^tF^cTT ^rt
ST ftti&jfr Visarjantya is
pronounced as a voicoloss breathing
Tins vory pronunciation prevailed
jn tho tirao of tho Prntis*akliyas,
sinco thoy dosenbo it as an u§ man,
tho common torin for breathings
and sibilants. Cf Macdonol], Vodic
Gr, p 54, Wackornngol, Altind.
Gr I pp 259 200 Tor its placo of
articulation soo noto on 2 Tiio
term vuarja in tho moaning of
Visarjinl)a doos not occur in tho
FratiSakhyas and Panmi
<TX5& f^PJ?*^T ( formed at the
root of tho tongue) and 34^1^
( onbreathmg ) tho two voiceless
breathings, had both separate cha
raotors in tho alphabets of tho
earlier centuries A D , but for
nearly a thousand years they are
obsolete This may bo tho reason
why our PratiSakhya doos not
prescribe any rule for these Seo
Barnell, Elements of South Ind.
Pal 2nd ed Plate XXIV They
ore, however, employed mKa^ml
nan 3a radii mss
2-13 gftfa g ^ ^TfftR *T seems cor
rect Kasikya is a name of the
nasal insertion between h and
tho following nasal Cf VPr. VIII
1 3 and my noto on ^IHi^n Jprr-
gwiwiRmi (UT. 12)
Tho Yamas are transitional
sounds, assumed to Intervene
botwoon non nasal and following
nasal, m a kind of nasal counter-
part of tho non nasa], and thoro
foro called its yama or twin
For tho explanation of Yama Cf
Whitney CA I 99.
Tho thoory of Yama is in a way
similar to that thoory according to
which a t is introducod botweon
a n and * Tor Yama cf CA 1
99, TPr XXI 12, 13, VPr IV,
160 ItPr is moro oxphcilo on this
point Aftor stating (I 48) that
tho Yamas aro noso sounds it
says (VI. 29) that tho non nasal
mutos, boforo following nasals,
becomo thoir own twins The
Yama is then statod (VI 32) to
bo similar to its original Thoro
is an audible utterance (VI 33)
in tho month of tho same quality
with the Yama, but tho office of
the suffixod sound doos not differ
from that of its original (VI 34)
Our treatise (piirvagunali) seems
to follow RPr in this The exact
number of Yamas is yet unsettled,
but they aro generally behvod to
be twenty Tor the terms kuro
khum oto cf Whitney CA I 99
As for tho syllabication of the
Yamas tho TPr. XXI 8 declares
them to belong to tho succeeding
syllable, while according to tho
4
VPr, 1. 103 they belong to the pre-
ceding syllable. Both views were
phonetically possible. For details
cf. Siddhes'vara, Critical Studies
in the Phonetic Observations of
Indian Grammarians pp. 79-81.
2-14 Wgwrcf. 3f«p3TC and W^Trfof
( = rakta 114) both are meant.
(a) Anusvara is a nasal addition
to the previous vowel, i.e. an aga-
rna, (cf. 185 and Bhattoji on Pa-
nini VIII. 3, 4), while Anunasika
is a nasalisation of that vowel, i.e.
the raiiga. For Banga cp. S. Varma,
Critical Studies etc. p. 150.
(b) RPr., VPr., TPr., Rt. and
Panini admit the existence of
both the Anusvara and Anunasi-
ka, that is they acknowledge the
existence of two different pheno-
mena, i.e. (1) the nasal addition
to the vowel and (2) the nasali-
sation of the vowel. The CA.
on the other hand, admits only
the latter. Cf. Whitney, CA. I
26; Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p. 53.
Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I. p.
256. The statement of S.Varma
that Whitney's view about CA.
is wrong, is unwarranted. His state-
ment (Critical Studies p. 148) that
Bhattoji regards Anusvara as a
pure nasalisation is also wrong. Cf.
'anusvaragamali' Bhattoji on p.
VIII. 3. 4.
Different theories about Anus-
vara : —
There are three different
theories ^about Anusvara.
(1) Anusvara is nothing but a
pervading nasalisation of the pre-
ceding vowel. This is held by
CA. (see Whitney on CA. I. 26)
and partially by TPr. (cf. TPr. V.
3i; V. 11; XV. 1; XXII. 14 with
Whitney's note). That this was
also the view of Siddhantaka-
uinudlkara (S. Varma. p. 148)
is wrong, because he expressly
declares it as an agama ( = inser-
tion of something extraneous and
not as a mere nasalisation.
(2) Anusvara is a nasal ad-
dition to the preceding vowel; it
contains both the vocalic and
consonantal elements or according
to RPr. (1. 5, 22) Anusvara is
either a vowel or a consonant.
Uvata's explanation that it was
equivalent to saying that Anus-
vara was neither a vowel nor a
consonant, though apparently
negative is yet suggestive and may
mean that it was a resonant voc-
alic nasal as Bergaign has put it.
Cf. Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I .
p. 256 note.
The second view is held by
RPr. I. 22; VPr. IV. 148-149
(which gives detailed directions
as to the quantity belonging to
each element); TPr. (excepting the
above-quoted sutras) RT. 23, 185;
Panini and Bhattoji etc.
(3) The Anusvara is entirely
a consonant and is to be pronoun-
ced like half g. This is held by
"certain phonetic treatises of the
5
TnittirTya school, tho Vaidikabha-
ram, (on TVr. II. 30) tho Sirva-
sammatas'ik$1 and tho Yajujv
bhufina". S. Varma. p, 151. i
In fact Anusvara containod Iwth
tho oloments f. o. vocilic and conso-
nantal (RPr. I. 5, 22). "Daring tho
poriod of preclinical and clvMieal
Sin«knt, tho consonantal elomont
of it was more predominint, whilo
in Pah and Prakrit tho Anusvura
vorgod more towards the vocalic
side." (S. Vnrm% p. K>4). In Sans-
krit tho scopo of Anus\ara Is Tory
much limited, while in Tali and
Prakrit, it may stand boforo n
rowel, consonant and on a pan?o.
Tor a comprehensive statement
of tho teachings about nasil sounds,
boo Itoth, Lilt, und Goscli des
Voda pp. 64-82, for tho difToronco
botwoen Anusvara and Anuna-
sika cf. Bopp, Lohergob. 352 f.
Macdonoll, Vodio Or. p. 53,
"Wackernagel, Altind. Or. I. p.
25G; for tho fact that thoro was
no roal difference bet-woon tho
actual pronunciation of Anusvara
and Anunasika cf . Whitney, TPr.
II. 30, JAOS. 10 p. LXXXVI
f,£orthothroo theories about Anu-
svara, cf. S. Varma, Critical Stu-
dios, pp. 148-155; for tho sylla-
bication of Anusvara seo my noto
on RT. 23, for Rafiga cf. Webor,
Ind. Stnd. 4. 270, 9. 38, Kiolhorn,
Ind. Ant. 141. A.
2-15 and <tf 3rg° is moant. Cf.
YvS. G3 G5, 1.J4-142; ParS. 30 35,
Road my statemont on 2. 14
according to this. I' » vowel
as well as a consonant, Cf. KPr.
I 5.
2- 1G *n} tfcl «fj: E FTO. Cf. TPr. I. 1G;
VPr. I. 37 No other PrMiiakhya
pro^enbos this usago.
scorns correct Cf. nknro vyatljv
nnnnm. TPr. I. 21. which allows
ui to call a consonant not only as
proscribed in 'varnih kfirottaro'
by a namo formed by adding kftra
with a intorpcrtod, but also by ono
formod with a alono,
3— 1 ft£K Road V^IZJ Cf. TPr. I. 19;
VPr, I. 39.
V& ^iKiH.- Cf. OA. I, 29; BPr.
XIII. 9.
$WiVW-dWMI*i. RPr, XIII. 10
alsocills it 'dasprs^am' imporfoctly
in contact. Soo OA. I, 30 with
■\Yhilnoy's noto.
3—2 fet H*t. According to OA. I.
31 tho position of tho organ is
nolthor ^ory closo nor vory opon.
AccofdmgtoTPr.il. 44,45 tho
spirants, m thoir ordor, aro nttorod
in tho positions of tho mutos, but
with tho middle part of tho produ-
cing organ oponed. BPr. XIII. 12
doclaros tho vowels, Anusvara and
tho spirants, as produced without
contact, and with tho organ stati-
onary. Tho olass of spirants is com-
posed of visarjanlya, jihvamullya,
npadhmanlya and & $ s h.
faidimwft. Cf. OA, I, 34, 35,
with Whitney's noto.
6
3—3 TTft^RCFvoiced: that which
is produced with the accompani-
ment of a laryngeal hum. WWfa:=
unvoiced: that which is merely brea-
thed. The thing is as follows. The
vocal cards situated in the throat
act in much the same manner as
the lips of the mouth. They may
be kept wide apart, they may be
closed entirely, or they may be
held closely together so that they
vibrate, when air passes between
them. When they are held wide
apart (i. e. when the glottis is
open) and air passes between them,
the sound produced is called
breath. But when they are kept
nearer and air is forced bet-
ween them, so that they vibrate,
the sound generated is termed
voice. Speech sounds contain
either breath or voice. Those
which contain breath are called
breathed or voiceless sounds and
those which contain voice are
termed voiced sounds. (Daniel
Jones, pp. 20-21.) Thus in the
surd class it is mere breath, simple
unintonated air, in the sonant
class it is breath made sonant by
the vocal cards on its passage
through the throat and thus con-
verted into sound. Cf. SVaso ghose
svanupradanah | Nado ghosavat-
svaresu || OA. I. 12, 13. The
same thing is stated in RPr.
XIII. 4, 5. and TPr. II. 8, 10.
The VPr. gives no corresponding
definition. It does not use the
.term 'aghosa' and 'ghosavat' but
adopts the arbitrary designations
jit and mui for the surds and
dhi for the sonants. See VPr. I,
50, 53.
A n u p r a d a n a— anupradiyato
nena varnah. ( wherewewithi is
given forth an articulate sound.
WKI^Mr: ^ffasRF:. Cf. TPr.
(II. 8) which means that in vowels
and sonant consonents, the emi-
ssion is sound. It is the emitted
material, whether tone, breath or
the intermediate h sound. See
RPr. XIII, 2; TPr. II. 9, CA. I.
12, 13.
^rmrS'TfWIJI. In surd conso-
nants the emission is breath, cf,
TPr. II. 10.
3—4 cFfi^rre; Cf. TPr. II. 11.
(a) cRFJR SfWRTFfJ. In simple
surd mutes ( i. e. k, c, t, t, p ) the
emisssion of breath is less. Cf. TPr.
II. 11.
(b) S*fr ^sjkrq;. Cf . Uvata on
RPr. XIII. 2. XIII. 6. See also
TPr. II. 4-6, which mean that the
h sound is produced in a method
intermediate between closed and
opened. These are the two Prati-
sakhyas which recognise a third
kind of articulated material, besi-
des tone and breath. RPr. XIII.
2 derives this material from a
combination of the two others,
rather than their mean. Whitney
thinks that this distinction is for-
ced and futile. Cf, his notes on
CA. I. 13; TPr. II. 6.
(c) tff^&fl' S^:. I have given the
punctuation adopted by the mss.
7
But to inako tho sonso of tlio pn-
ssago clear wo should punctuator
showing lottors in comman ordor.
^M^I=s!iowing them, in a parti-
cular order.
3-G — 4<IU11H,'» Ci, P&i>it» I.
1.. 71. But wo do not find any
pratyaliSrn in Rktantra. This
shows that originally this SNi&'-b
formed part of somo anciont STjf-
*M.<y, but later on was adoptod
by the compilers of our toxt as an
introduction to tho toxt,
3-G-7 This was tho order of lottors
adoptod by 3rl^itf5T and vi'i.HH^
for their pratyahftras. Note the
difforenco between this ordor
and that of mftffft and his folio-
weros. For a briof statement on
the order of lettors in the Prftti-
fofchyas cf. tTTC^fa on tho first
Sutra of RPr. and M. D. Shastri.
Int. to tho RPr. p. 1G.
3-10 ^rPPC^IWTH. Cf. sng^fq qt^-
ZfWU^S&rllXZ<faF&IH RPr.
XIII. 15, which moans that the
voice in g,j, d, d, b is due to tho
sound of a,
$;Uik&$W33\% Cf, sfftfftUT^fa-
%R RPr. XIII. 17, which means
, that h forms tho second half of tho
voiced aspirates i, e. gh,jk, dh, dh,
bh. This is supported by tho ovi-
donco of words liko hitafrom
jaghSna from ^/han and tad-
dhi for tad + hl. Similarly
jihvfimOlfya and upadhmSnlya,
tho two voicoloss broathlngs aro
rogardod to form tho socond half
of tho voicoloss aspiratos Lo. ih
and ph. Cf. Macdonoll, Vodic Gr.
p. CO. 05, "Whitnoy, TPr. II. 47.
3-11 Is not cloar to mo.
3-15 tTCTCtfc: Cf. YPc. VIII. 10.
«Tirafo 1. 1. 2: 132,
1 This rulo is meant to covor nil
sorts of sandhis found in tho SV.
Rut horo our troatiso is making
short sliift of a subjoct which occu-
pios long passages of other Prilti-
ifakhyas and has cost thoir outhora
a vast deal of labour. This is a cloar
admission of tho unwillingness to
copo with tho intricacios of Vodic
grammar. Lot us now oxamino oxa-
mplos givon by tho comtnontator.
tfrf*Tl: Halo 85 is counteracted,
snrrftl: requiros S5^mTs-and B.
actually roads ^^W: butcf. tho
comm. on 101. Hi 9j3fteJJ, Pragr-
liyasaftjB&. Cf. RPr. II. 74. T^-
RT^. Cf. >ll%fy fc$"*<KgTOVJMH, on
Pilpini VI. 1, 79, W^ff; *wjyiH,
(sabas) do not como nndor 116. Cf.
RPr. I. 80. 103; Bonfoy, SV. Bin].
XLIT. tiyNH,. 183 is counteracted.
Cf. RPr. IV. 23; Ponini VIII.
3. 25, 3Icfl^. Cf. 238; RPr.
IX. 27, 28; Padap, 91<ft I ^ I
( Renfey, SV, LX ). gft$f$H.
8
f^rWR:. Cf. SV. II. 79. ScfTO.
I cf. the comm. on 258.
q<Kn%. RPr. ix. lO; wn^-,
Ufom'^ RPr. IX. 11. 23.
SJJrfrq^T RPr. IX. 1. URj;. Padap.
f : I Wr^on SV. I. 219. ^t. Padap.
I*. 1 TJ, but see % I T£ on SV. I. 53;
Benfey, SV. lix. ^Wl^ is co-
vered by 238 and is actually cited
by the commentator. Cf, RPr. IX.
8. ^fcrarqT. I do not know which
sutra is counteracted here. 247 is
out of question, because a of 2TcT
is not anudatta. ^bcjwap^. ^
(213) is counteracted, is provi-
ded, because in the matter of W^S
and Mitt dus is not itpasarga, cf.
on Panini VIII. 4. 16, and so 279
is not applicable here. In the RV.
^ is provided by RPr. V. 1, and
Wrt is refused by V. 47. See also
Panini VIII. 3. 111. In TCl^fa,
^fWg:, ^TCJ^SU f*&$'-, n is pro-
vided, because these are not eka-
pada like faO^m and so are not
covered by 272. But this difficulty
does not arise in RPr. V. 40
^TH |) ). For S%cT:, <tffajr% cf.
RPr. V. 56. WI. Cf. Panini
VIII. 4. 26, for VIII. 4. 11.
In tftWRTr, S^sp* etc. Wi is pro-
vided, because the same are not
coverd by 276-286. For *fp?T cf.
Panini VIII. 3. 108. S^gft^ is
covered by 279, hence its mention
is superfluous. Cf-. RPr. V. 12;
Panini VIII. 3. 65. In WTf-^fcIT
Wc=f is provided. They are however
covered by RPr. V. 1, For lengthe-
ning in *mT&l cf. RPr. IX. 47.
5IT«p3J seems superfluous. Cf. 279.
^ fT€° (=W^0 has nothing to
do with ^ and 'fT^Tl^v' in the
fourth pada is covered by 283. In
3^5^ cerebralisation takes place.
(Panini VIII. 3. 65) In %T: (RPr.
V. 12), ftTO; (Panini VIII. 3.
66), f^^wrg^wr, (vin. 3.
65), (VIII. 3. 77),
m^m.' (not covered by VIII. 3.
70) ^ is provided. For ^W{. cf.
RPr. V. 22. 3Jcffa^ . Cf. Panini
VIII. 3. 109. tf^T 281 is cou-
nteracted. f^Rfr, f^TR: are not
ehafxida, hence their mention is
superfluous. In ^Tff: RPr. V.
43 counteracts V. 40. See also
Panini VIII. 4. 9-10. the mention
of ^ff^fw, WfcSWK' ^~
seems superfluous, because
they do not come under 276-286.
For gcricT in the RV. cf.
RPr. V. 28. 'TTOT. Cf. 'TtWT in
RV. 8. 14. 1, but in RV.
V. 37. 4 cited by RPr. V. 27. W%-
*S*n*, HWiH* Cf. RPr. V. 23
which counteracts V. 21.
2 Our commentator nowhere includes
protracted vowels. The same sounds
9
are dofinod as kanthya b} RPr, I
38, 39. OA I 19 Iho Vpr. 1 71
states thorn to bo formed in Kant ha
but by tho middlo of jaw as organ
The TPr. II. 4G doclnros only h
and visarjanl)fl as produced by
kantha and then says (II 47, 48)
that somo hold that h has tho sarao
position as tho beginning of tho
following \owol, and visarjanlya
has tho same position as tho end
of tho proceding vowol This stato
ment is noteworthy in as much as it
is tho peculiarity of tho aspiration
that it is an omission of umntona
tod breath through tho samo po-
sition of the mouth organs by which
the following intonatod sound is
producod, This also hints at tho
phonotic valno of tho visarjantya,
showing it to bo a mere uncha
raoterizod breathing, a final A. Cf
"Whitney, TPr. II 47, CA 1. 19.
3 Cf. RPr. 1. 40 which notices that
some call h and visarjanlya chest
sounds, Cf, Panmlya Ssiksha 16
4 It is peculiar that the commentary
does not include jihvamullya in the
list, while it names upadhmanTya
in 9 The correct reading seems
fafPJsftar f^i^wFrr OA I
20 includes r vowels, the guttural
mutes, the jihvamullya spirant and
the vowel 1 The same are stated
by RPr. I. 41 to constitute the
class of jihvamullya The VPr
states tho same with tho exception
of 1 to be formed at tho base of
the tongue (1 65) by the base of
the jaw ( 1 83 ) The TPr II.
3d, 44 mcludos m tho sonos only
tho guttural mutos and spirant,
but rovorsos tho relation of posi-
tion and organ. As for tho J %o-
wol tho VPr I. 69 and Pnnmtya
&iks& make it dental Cf. Macdo-
noll, Vodic Gr P. 25
^5 The vowol r is pronounced
as ri (Wackornagol, AUind. Gr. p.
31) and this pronunciation is old
is shown by the confusion of the
two sounds in inscriptions and mss.
(Bonfoy, SV. Eral XLIV, Oortol,
Synt of Cases etc. I. P 241)aswolI
as tho reproduction of r by n m tho
Tibotan script. Macdonoll, Vedic
Gr. p 8, Wackernagol, Ahtind Gr,
1 p 28. But r was originally pro-
nounced as vocalic r. The RPr,
XIII 34, VPr IV. 14C.CA 137,
7 1 dosenbo it as containing r which
according to the RPr. (XIII 34)
is in the middle.
tj. Like r this wowol also was
originally a vocalic 1. For details
see Bhattoji, ^abdakaustubha 1 1.
2 62, Wackornagel, AUind Gr. I
p 31
5 Our treatise does not include ai in
the series, while other Pratiiakh
yas do Cf CA. 1. 21 , RPr 1, 42.
They are described by the VPr,
(1 66) as formed upon the palate
by the middle of tho tongue
The TPr, 1 1 36 makes the same
definition of the c series and i, but
holds (11 40) that y isformed upon
the palate by the middle and end
of the tongue. TPr does not in
elude any vowel in the class
10
For the two distinct series of
palatals and their detailed treat-
ment see Macdonell, Vedic Gr.
P. 26-34; Wackernagel, Altind. Gr.
I. pp. 138-164:. For the description
of e diphthong see Mac. Vedic Gr.
p. 9; Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I. p.
35-39. For the meaning of diph-
thong and its pronunciation see
Daniel Jones, An Outline of Eng.
etc. pp. 57-59.
6 Of. GA. 1. 22; RPr. 1. 43; TPr. 11.
37. 44; VPr. 1, 67, 78; and TPr.
II. 37. The cerebrals seem of Aus-
tric origin. Cf. A. 0. Woolner's
paper on it.
7 Cf. OA, 1. 24., VPr. 1. 69 adds
(1, 1, 13) to the class which it defi-
nes (1. 76) as formed at the teeth
by the tip of the tongue. According
to RPr. 1. 44, 45 the class
is composed of I, s, r, besides the t
series and is called dantamullya.
The TPr. declares the same letters,
except ?«, as formed dantamulesu,
the t series and s by the tip of the
tongue (11. 38, 44) and I by the
middle of the tongue lip.II. 42.
According to Whitney this des-
cription is more accurate, since the
contact by which dentals are pro-
duced is not upon the teeth them-
selves, but just at their base or be-
hind them. Cf. CA. 1. 24. Our trea-
tise does not include 1 in the list.
See als6 Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p.
35; Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I pp.
177-179.
8 Cf. CA. 1. 28. and the commen-
tary. Pratigakhyas are at variance
with reference to this sound. The
RPr. 1 45 declares r with other
dentals as dantamullya, but adds (1.
46) that some hold it to be varsvya
gingival. The VPr. declares it as
produced at the roots of the teeth
(1. 68) by the tip of the tongue (1.
77); the TPr. 11. 41. by the tip and
middle of the tongue at a point
close behind the roots of the teeth.
The PaninTya f§iksa (17) alone
declares it to be murdhanya. Thus
all the Pratis'akhyas ignore its
relationship with cerebral mutes
and with r. But according to the
euphonic system r is carebral, and
can hardly be supposed to have
been uttered otherwise than with
the tip of the tongue reverted into
the dome of the palate, to the
cerebral position. Cf. Whitney,
CA. 1. 28.
9 CA. 1. 25, and RPr. I. 47 agree
with our treatise. The VPr. 1. 70.
also declares the same sounds as
produced upon the lip (1. 70) and
by the lip, but adds (1. 71) that in
the utterance of v the tips of the
teeth are employed. With refe-
rence to'v the TPr. 11. 43 makes
the same specification. For details
see Whitney, CA. 1. 25. See Mac-
donell, Vedic Gr. p. 37; Wacker-
nagel, Altind. Gr. I. pp. 181-184.
12 For Yamassee note on -2 and the
important statement of Bhattoji in
£abdak. 1. 1. 4: 143. 144. By Anu-
svara our treatise takes both
and ?fNL The word nasikya has
not been satisfactorily explained
by the commentators of the Prati-
11
Sakhjas, so much so that on RPr
I 36 we do not even know the co-
rrect reading before JflftfR
M D Shastn accepts the reading
%%fci ?TT^m and gives the follo-
wing variants m footnotes —
mrter {X) o^rmf^pr (*)?r%
J TT%^r t-orrected to 5 =T IT T T
?ftf ^nftwi The commentator of
VPr does not explain the term
on I 74 Not knowing the reil
meaning of J Trf^T^ the coramenta
tor of CA has committed a blun
der on I 26
The real meaning of ^f^TR
however seems to be the insertion
(called nasikya) after h and before
a following nasal Cf CA I 100
IPr XXI H The RPr I 48
and VPr I 74, 80 describe its
mode of pronunciation and VIII
13 (^gSTtrsnfa** ) speaks of
it again among the constituents of
the spoken alphabet Our treatise
(2 13) gftM^Hlftrc may there
fore be emended to g ?I% ?H%^r
For the difference between a
yama and the nasikya cf Whitney
onCA I 100
RPr I 48 precisely agrees with
our treatise The VPr I 74 desc
nbes the same sounds as produced
in the nose and states (1 80) that
their place and organ o£ produ
ction is the same adding further
(I 82) that the Yam-is are uttered
with the root of the nose
13 Cf TPr 1 27, VPr I 64
14 Cf TPr 1 14, BPr 1 12
16 Cf RPr 1, 13, CA 1 10, VPr
has nothing analogous and does
not employ the terms sosman and
an us man The term us man lite
rally heat, hot vapour, steam, de
signates in the grammatical langu
age all those sounds wich are
produced by a rush of unintona
ted breath through an open posi
tion of the mouth organs, or whose
utterance has a certain similarity
to the escape of steam through i
pipe Cf Whitnej, CA 1 10
18 For corresponding rules cf RPr
I 63, TPr XV 6 and Pa
mm VIII 4 57 which closely
resembles the rule of RPr and
teaches the same thing by one
Sutra for which our treatise has
two (18 19) The same fact may be
noted in Sutras lo6 157 for which
Panini has only one VI 1 132
The operation of the rule was
perhaps general in hhasa as well
as in the Veda But in classical
Sanskrit it has since long become
obsolete, though theonticallj its
existence has ever been admitted
and Bhattoji actually turns the
fifty four forms of samskartS into
108 by applying the rule (VIII
57) to them The phenomena is
however common m Prakrit, pa
rticularly in Pah Cf Kuhn Bei
trage 58 63, Muller, Jampr 37
In Vedas this is often met with
mpluta Cf vmdati 3 m RV 10
14C 1, mama3 m TS 7 4 20, vi
12
V8i&3 m VS. 23. 49; babhuva,3 m.
AV. 10. 2. 28; tapati3 m. AB. 6.
35- 4.
In the RV. we find a and a,
nasalised (RPr. II. 67) in words
which are not in actual pause, but
at a particular virama in the pada
and occur invariably before a
word beginning with a vowel (see
note on 71). For details see
Wackernagel, Altind.Gr. I. p. 302.
The statement of Whitney that
"the operation of the rule is confi-
ned to pada text only" (TPr. XV.6)
is baseless and wrong.
19 The scope of this Sutra is covered
by RPr. I. 63 and TPr. XV. 6.
20 A consonant in pause belongs to
the preceding vowel. The equiva-
lent rules of the other treatises
are RPr. XVIII. 33; TPr. XXI.
3;VPr. I. 101. The observation
is on the whole sound. The final
consonants in Sanskrit were implo-
sive, so that they eventually disa-
ppeared in Pali and Prakrit. With
so much laxity in their articulation
they were not likely to be inde-
pendent syllables. Cf. SiddhesVara,
Critical Studies etc. p. 63. It is to
be noted that the treatment of
syllabic division is meager in our
treatise.
21 faj The name abhinidhana is appl-
ied to the mute which arises from
doubling and is inserted before a
mute. The author of Tribhasyarat-
na on TPr. XI V 9 explains the word
by ahhinidhlyate aropyate iti which
is set down against, and does not
take notice of the doctrine of abhi-
nidhana as a peculiar and imperfect
utterance of certain letters in cer-
tain situations, which plays so pro-
minent a part in the phonetic
systems of the RPr, and OA. We
may, however, bearing that
doctrine in mind, conjecture with
some plausibility that the word
here not only signifies an insertion,
but designates also a peculiar qua-
lity of the inserted letter. For the
meaning of the word cf. Whitney
TPr. XIV. 9; CA. I. 43; for a
detailed discussion on abhinidhana
cf. S. Varma. Critical Studies, pp.
137-147.
(b ) In words like arkkam, the
consonant following the r or the h
is doubled, and the former of the
two, which is regarded as the one
that owes its existence to the
krama or duplication is to be rec-
koned as belonging to the prece-
ding syllable. Cf. CA. I. 58; VPr.
I. 104. The TPr. XXI, 5 teaches
that a consonant not combined
immediately with a vowel belongs
to the preceding syllable. This
would leave only the final mem-
ber of any group to be attached to
the following vowel. RPr. I. 26 is
meant for a case in which the
consonant following the r is itself
succeeded by another. For details
see Siddhesvara on syllabication
of r plus double plosive. Critical
Studies etc. pp. 69-71; Wacker-
nagel, Altind. Gr. I. p. 278.
22 It is a general rule that the first
member of a consonant group will
13
bolong to tho procoding vowel.
Thus mukla will bo divided as mul-
ta and not tnu-Ua, Tho fact that
Sanskrit had predominant tend-
ency to this syllabic division is
shown by tho doubling which tho
initials of Sanskrit consonant-
groups undorgo. Tho most gono-
ral rnlo of doubling is that tho
first mombor of a consonant group,
if procoded by a vowel, is doubled
(RT. 269). For corresponding
rulos of other treatisos soo TPr.
XXI. 4; CA. 1, 55; VPr. I. 102;
and RPr. XVIII. 35 and I. 25,
which allows it to bo counted
oithor with tho procoding or follo-
wing syllable For details soo
"Whitney, CA. I. CC and TPr,
XXI. 4.
23 Cf. RPr. I, 25; XVIII, 34; CA,
I, 53; TPr. XXI. G. Tho ques-
tion of the syllabication of tho
anusv&ra is closely bound up with
tho question of its phonetic value,
regarding which, howevor, there
was no agreomont among tho
ancient grammarians, Rome held
it to be a pervading nasalization
of the preceding vowel; others, a
nasal addition to the procoding
vowel. The former view is adopt-
ed by CA. which acknowledges
only nasal consonants and nasal
vowels and entirely ignoros any
such constituent of the alphobet
as the anusvara. In this case the
question of its syllabication was
simple, the nasalized vowol itself
forming a complete syllable as in
takram. The RPr. 1. 5 and VPr.
declare anusvara as nasal oppond-
ago to tho vowol; tho lattor (VPr.
IV, 147-8) givos diroctions as to
tho quantity belonging to each
olomont. In this caso, whon tho
antisvara was not a puro nasalized
vowol, but contained in a more
or loss dogreo, a consonantal elo-
mont, it was open to question
whether it bolongod to tho pro-
coding or tho succooding vowol;
honco tho necessity of the abovo
rule, according to which tho anu-
stxlra belongs to tho preceding
vowel. Tho TPr. takos no dis-
tinct and consistent ground upon
tho quostion, whothor tho anusvara
consists in a nasalization of tho
vowol or in a nasal consonantal
olemont following tho vowol. It
howovor takos prevailingly the
view of the RPr. bat lots tho
othorwiso appear hero and thoro.
For instance in TPr. XXI. 6
anusvara appears with the distinct
valuo of a consonantal olomont
following tho vowel, but not as '
a full consonant. Seo also TPr.
X.U;XV.l-3. Thus we have seen
that, although the authors of tho
Pritis'aknyas differod as to the
phonetic value of the annsvara,
yet they were unanimous in dec-
laring it to belong to tho preced-
ing vowel. For details of the
syllabication of tho anusvara cf.
Siddhe^vara, Critical Studies etc.
pp, 81-83. Our treatise differen-
tiates between anusvara and rahga
and obviously regards anusvara as
a consonantal element (see 185),
14
For the dual anusvarau cf. —
. qf^bfr 5(Nf^t *T%I : »
Yajfiav&. 63-65, 138-142; Par&.
30-35.
24 The first portion of the rule is
included in 20. The negative here
implies a direct reversal of 20. Cf:-
25 The positive side of the rule is
included in 20. It rather denotes
a denial of ad junction of the second
spars'a to the preceding vowel,
~ and hence implies adjunction to
-the one that follows, since the
consonant cannot stand by itself.
Thus the division in sahhyam
(sakkhya) would be sak-khyam and
so on. Cf. TPr. XXI. 7.
26 Cf. RPr. 1. 23; CA. 1. 55; TPr.
XXI. 2; VPr. 1. 100. This general
rule is equivalently stated by all
Pratisakhyas. The matter of syllabi-
cation seems of pretty pure theory.
The only practical bearing it can
have must be in determining
whether such and such a consonant
shall receive one or another accent,
as being that of the preceding or of
the following vowel. Cf. Whitney,
CA. 1. 55.
27 Cf. RPr. 1. 37; CA. 1. 49; VPr.
1. 48. TPr, offers nothing corres-
ponding.
28 BPr. I. 34; TPr. I. 37; VPr. I.
59, agree in assigning half a mora
as the length of a consonant. CA.
I. 60, however, assigns one mora
as the length of a consonant. Our
treatise makes an option between
the two.
31-33 The idea underlying the group-
ing of sounds into short, long and
ultra-long was said to be duration.
Cf. P. 6iksa 11. From the point of
view of duration human speech
was divided into three kinds: i. e.
quick, intermediate and slow. (See
RPr. XIII, 46. 49. TPR. XXIII.
20). The quantity of sound in
intermediate speech was one third
more than in quick speech, the
ratio being 9 : 12; the quantity in
slow speech was one third more
than in intermediate speech, the
ratio being 12: 16. Cf. RPr. XIII.
48 with Uvata'snote. But authori-
ties differ on the axact ratio of
quantity between the three vrttis.
Thus while our treatise declares
the proportion 3: 4: 5, Uvata
(RPr. XIII. 48) mentions some
authorities holding the proportion
16: 20: 25.
Thus Kaiyat on Patau jali 1. 1. 9;
517 says : —
^rf^r i ^rt i5prw§fii% t rarr%
cTRrr 3 irfr wfe^r wrr% ^fct i
For the three vrttis cf. Jlatya-
yana V. 4, 5 on Panini I. I. 70
15
nnd V 1—5 on Panim 1 4 109
with Patanjali on it For tho concep-
tion of vtfti in modorn phono
tics soo Sio\ers, Phonotic G39
p 231 Tor dotails soo Wackorna
gol, Altind Gr I p, 280
Grammarians proscribed tho uso
of thoso vrttis under difforont con
ditions According to RPr. XIII
49, qmcl speech should bo used
in Vodic recitals, intermediate in
business and tloto during instru
etion
TVhen tho quostion of dotormin
ing tho standard of q aft n lit) aroso
tho intermediate speech wassoloctod
as tho basis, bocause prosumiblj
it represented ordinary con%or
sat ion Tor details boo Siddho
£*ara, Cnticil Studios etc p 172
34 Tho pauso between two Indmdual
sounds bad a duration of \ory
mfemtesiinal time Cf VyfisastLsa,
'viramo varnayor tnadhjo pyanu
kalo'pyasam j ute which attributes
a quarter of a mora to tho hiatus
between two 'individual sounds
Kalnnirnaja&ksa contests this
wiew Cf SiddheSvara, Critical
Studies, etc p 186
Ann the minimum standard
of quantity was called anu, which
could not bo porcei\ed by the
sonsea Cf 'indriyavi§a)o yosa
vanurityucyate budhaih Sam
bhu& The Loma&sUsa (5& 462)
compares the anu to a particle re
flectin^ the sun's rays suryara^mi
pratlkasa ltanika yatra drsyate |
anoatu tat praraanam sj an
matra tu caturariavntJI Next to
this coraos paramHnu which is just
porcoptiblo (cf Vyasa^iksa, 'ma
tradham\yaktainatrakam') Sooalso
VPr I CI (paramfinvardhamatra)
Next to paramhutt coraos matra.
Tho quantity of a mora was com
pared by Vyasa siks,a to a snap of
finger, by tho Narada £ to a twin
Ming of tho eyo by same authori
tios to a flash of lightning, and by
tho RPr to a note of the wood
cock Cf fa Varma, Critical Studies
ota p 177
*Rg\irflmah padavirfima vivrtti
^ lrflmah samanapadavivrttivirama
stnmatro dvinmtra ekainatrordha
matri itjanupurvjena'|| TPr
X.VII 13 Cf also YvS 11, 12
37 (a) Tho versepame is of throo
moras, that n, tho quantity of the
pauso at tho ond of a verso is of
three moras 'ubha vajasya satye
huvo vain | Our treatise (37)
seems to declare the quantity of
this pause only two moras
36 (b) Tho pada pause is of two moras,
of the pauso of two moras in Pada
text, between the padas the exam
plo is 'ise tvfi, urje-tva'. Our troa
tiso declares only one mora As
for tho aiagrahapaus$ it seems of
two moras according to the TPr
■fthila RPr (I 28) and VPr (V 1)
declare it to bo of one mora This
uell accords with our treatise (36)
35 (c) Pause for hiatus ig of one
mora 'so. ldhanah, ta enam, ta
asmat' Our treatise (35) declares
onlj half mora between tho two
vowels, be they short or long This
accords ■with RPr IT 4 which
16
prescribes half a mora for vivrtti( =
svarantaram), Uvata is more spe-
cific on this point. He says : —
'tatrayam vivrttervibhagastri-
prakarah | ubhayato hrasva pada-
matrakala, ] pra-rbhubhyah, (RV.
4. 33. 1) | ekato dirghardhamatra-
kala | nu ittha (I. 132. 4) | ubha-
yato dlrgha, padonamatrakala, | ta
im vardhanti (I. 155. 3) | But cf.
the peculiar statement of Kaiyata,
1. 1. 4: 201 which seems the basis
of the following statement of Bha-
ttoji — 'yattu pratisakh yantaraina-
rdhamatrovagrahah iti tattu sar-
vatra samhitayamardhamatrakala-
sya sattvat tatotirikto' rdhamatra-
kalo' vagrahestityevamparamatah-
pratisakhyayoravirodhah'S.Kaustu-
bha 1. 1. 4: 139. He is wilfully over-
looking here the sharp differences
that existed between the Pratisa-
khyas, and in fact it was these diffe-
rences that led to the composition
of so many Pratis"akhyas ( = prati-
s*akham bhavam).
(d) Pause for hiatus in the in-
terior of a word is of half
mora, 'pra-ugam'. The comme-
ntator quotes a couple of verses on
TPr. XXII. 13 laying down four
sub-divisions of the pause of hiatus,
and assigning them different qua-
ntities: that between a short and
long vowel is vatsnnusvti, and is
one mora long; that between a
long and following short is va-
ts&nios&rirfi, of the same length;
between two short vowels 3 'paka-
vati, three quarters of a mora;
between two long vowels, pipilihsi,
a quarter mora only. Compare it
with Uvata's remarks on ' EPr. IT.
4, quoted by iS, Varma in Critical
Studies, p. 186.
As regards the nature of hiatus,
the commentary on Vyasa diksa,
'viramah tusnimbhutah kalah
syat', defines it as a 'time of silence.
But this goes against the Indian
theox-y of continuity of sounds so
strongly maintained by Patanjali
(on P. 1. 4. 109) and others. Nor
there is any proof to presume that
the hiatus was accompanied by a
glottal stop. By hiatus then the
ancient grammarians may have
meant a glide between one sound
and another, and this is in a way
confirmed by RPr. II. 4 which
assigns only a quarter of a mora
( time of a svdra-bhakli ) to the
hiatus. For details see S. Varma,
Critical Studies, pp. 185-187.
39 Bhakti = division of a saman. See
Laty, VI. 1.14; Drahy. III. 4. 12;
Simon PpS. 522.
The chants of a saman are in a
mode or modes, and, therefore,
could only be sung in unison.
At the sacrifices, the Sama-
veda priests whose business it is
to perform the musical part, do not
sing in unison except the nidhana
or finale which consists usually of
one, seldom of two syllables. The
rest of the chant is divided into
sections of which the first is : —
(I) Himkara : the syllable hum,
(which so often occurs in the
Saman, was called originally,
as the Brahmanas prove,
17
'bimkara* Bur, Ar$e>abr. In
traduction XLVII)ls8ung by
all pnotts (Sajana, SV. p, 54)
or by three eingors (Sajapa
on PVil. II. 1. 1.)
(II) Prasla\a It is sung by the
Prastotr It is dealt with in
goneral part (PVB 1.3-13)
and In a special ono (1 , 34 35).
(III) "UdgUha It » sung by
Udgatr,
(IV) Pratihara. It is sting by
Pratihnrtr. It is doalt with
in gonoralpart (PVB. 1. 3G -
1 62) and in a special one
(1, 63-2, 81).
(V) Upadrata. It is sang by
Udgatr.
(VI) Nidhana or finale is sung
by Prastotr, Udgatr and Pra-
tihartr Per the varions kinds
of mdhanas see Say. on PVB.
X. 10. 1. Nidhana is doalt
with in a goneral part (PVB
2, 82-110) and in a special
onB(2 111-120).
(VII) Pranava Tho syllable Om.
The roal Bhaktis are fire i.e
prastava, udgltha, pratihara, upa-
drava, and nidhana. For the
theory of Bhakti according to tho
explanation in the Paflcavidha
sutra cf The Vodic Chant
pp 58-70 and Simon PpS 523
See also B, Faddegon, Kituahstio
Dadaism. Acta Onentaha V.
1226. p 185
40 Ct. RPr I. 20, CA I 59, VPr.
I. 55, 56, and TPr. I. 33 which
makes r and 1, the standard of a
short vowel and Panini 1. 3. 27
'which makos a fl and Q 3 tho stan-
dard of short, long and nltra long
* rowels. RPr. XIII CO attempts
to fix tho longth of tho short, long
and ultra long vowels by com-
paring them with tho cnos of
certain birds, a fact implied in
Panini I. 2. 27. Cf. 'kukkutarute
akara ekadvitnmatratva prasiddh
erak&radayonoktaV Nagos-^S^ on
this sutra Tho idoa underlying tho
grouping of sounds into short, long
and ultra long was supposed to
bo duration. Cf. 6S. 379.
41 Svantavinata It should bo noted
that tho Ganas aro not accent od in
tho ordinary sonso of tho word,
or like tho other Vedas, but that
tho marks which form such a pro-
minent foaturo in tho text are
actually musical notes.
Thoy aro seven and their names
differ. Samandhanbrahmana (I.
18 5) gives Kru$\a, prathama,
dvxtvja, txtlya, caturlha, paucama,
and §as,tha or antya. Those corres-
pond to the $adja, rgabha,
gftndhara, madhyama, pascama,
dhaivata and ni^ada of usual
Indian music, butin reverse order,
i.o. the first note of the Hindu
music is the fourth of the Sama
priests and the scale ascends the
reverse of the scale of tho last.
In S. India the names of these
Prakrti Notes are prathama, dm*
tiya, txtiya t catttrtha, mandra (5th,
cf. Burnell'a note in Arbr. XLIII)
anusvo.rya (6th) and atisvarya
(7th), Besides these there aro seven
others which indicate constantly
18
recurring groups of notes. These
- are : —
(1) Prenkha : which adds two
moras to the preceding sylla-
ble and ends with the second
svara. It is marked jT- For
the conformity and discre-
pency between the Piirvagana
and the Uttaragana with
reference to the use of the
sign 27 see Vedic Chant, pp.
44-47.
(2) Namana'. it consists of the
first three notes (i.e, one, two
and three).
'pranatam tat svaritacatur-
thaditnandrantam' (Comm. on
Shpbr. II. p, 20) indicates
that there is a difference bet-
ween namana and pranata,
(3) Karsana: see note on 46.
(4) Yinata : is marked by vi or s
and consists of 1 and 2; where
Vinata occurs in the Grama-
geya'gana prexikho, is put in
the Uha. For the signifi-
cance of vinata, -of. Vedic
Chant pp. 45-46; Simon PpS.
522.
(5) Atyutkrama; 4565. This vikvti
is an embellishment.
(6) Savapraswrana: 2345. This also
is an embellishment.
(7) Ahhigita : this consists in a
repetition of the note with a
short a ; it appears to be
marked in the Bibliotheca,
Indica. ed. by 7. See Bur.
Arbr. XLLY.
Svarita: mandrasvara. Cf, jN",
on PpS. 1. 2 'svaritasabdena man-
drasvara ucyate ; oh 8, 232 l $vari-
tasvarantam = mandrasvar&ntam.
But the Comm. on Shpbr, II p. 20,
vinatam fat$vai'itacalnrthadiman~
drantam shows that svarita is the
third. See also Whitney on TPr,
XXIII. 16. For vinata, pranata,
and abhigita see the comm. on
Shpbr. II. p. 20
Arcikasamhitayam sarvatravina-
mitani punarapranamitani aksa-
rani pathitani, atra ganavidhau
kvacit kvacidvinamitani prana-
mitani ca geyani [ vinamita sab-
dena vinatam pranamitasabdena
pranatam | vinatam . prathamadi-
dvitiyantam pranatam tat svarita-
caturthadimandrantam | abhigi-
tam dvitlyadiprathamantam tatha
vinatapranatayorante' rdhamatra
nlcena svarena bhavatyucce'pyar-
dha dlrghe hrasve'rdhamjj
(b) For the Saman tones and
sounds of animals see !NarS\ which
connects the music with the sounds
of animals. It runs : —
sadjam vadati mayuro gavo,
rainbhanti carsabham |-
ajavike tu gandharau,
kraugco vadati madhyamam (|
puspasadharane kale,
kokila vakti paficamam |
asvastu dhaivatam vakti,
nisadam vakti kunjarali |j
S\S. p. 407; also Samgltaratna-'
kara 1. 3. 48. Here, the author
of the &iksa is perhaps analysing
the microcosmos viz. the common
sounds of animals, with the micro-
cosmos viz. the tones of the human
gamut. For details cf. Simon
19
PpS, Einl ; S. Varma, Criticil
Studios. ChaptorX (Tho Naturo
of Accont).
(c) Saman tonoi and tho nccon-
.luation of tho spoken language • —
Durnell in tho Introduction to
hii Arbr, (XLTI) does not *©o an)
appreciable connection betwoon
tho Saman tonos and tho accont
Simon on tho other hand, is inclin-
ed to bolloro that thoro was a
cloar connection betwoon tho two
(PpS. 524), Tho Indian commen-
tators pnt together tlio tvartts of
tho Chandogas and tho accont of
the apokon word. Cf. UraU on
UPr. XIII. 44; the Comm. on PpS,
1. 2: ivaritaialxhnct mandfa tttira
ucyatc, on 8. 232 tvaritasrarilntam
**mandreuvxir<inlam, on b* 2.12
ttddttatthilcx^he $varah t Boo aUo
the four fOoIms from Aryanyaka
stobha qnotod by IJur. in Ins In-
troduction to Shpbr. XIX. Tho
Author of tho Vodio Chant (39-41)
has instituted a comparative study
of (a) mononomlal stobhas consist-
ing of two syllables (b) tho poly-
ssyllabio mononomlal stobhas and
(c) stobhas which consist of
phrases, and has arrived at the
conclusion that "thoro is in princi-
ple a connection between tho word
accont and melodic movement of
the SV."
42 Cf. UPr. I. 27.
43 There is no discordanco among tho
Prftti^ftkhyas upon this point, Cf.
KPr. L 29. OA. I. 61; VPr. I. 57;
IPr, 1, 3% Ajltag itru also declines
two mitras for dlrgha.
44 Koto tho me of vrddh&m. Our
treatlso nowboro uses tho torm
ptnta. Boo RPr. I. 30; CA. I, C2;
VPr. I. 58; TPr. I 3C. Ajftta<atru
sajs that a vrddba sylIablo-3
mfitrfts. ■ Tor dotails see Bar.
Shpbr. XX. In tho chant thoro
was an emphasis on vrddhft
syllabic
45 Tor vtttsvarya cf, Vivrti on 53 : —
'* alsvaryam coccintcJlmsayorma-
dhyosphuta gsbdfidubhayasadhfira-
nam na atarfintaram' oto.
4G A %owoI fi a sjllablo. Cf VPr. I.
9D; UPr, XVIII. 32 which states
expHcitoly that a vowol, whothor
pure or combined with amutdra
or combmod with consonants, is a
8}!lablo, Soo also UPr. H9 that
both tho short and tho long vowols
are syllsblos. On tho VfirtiU
'raranm vahuh pHrvasittre' Patau
jail statos 'athavil friirvasiltre ror-
Xtrtsj/Sl^aramiti tatijtA krtyate'
MBh. 1. 1. 2 131. Kaiyata glosses
it with pur vast! t re | vyHkarankntare
*rorna aisarftnTfi* vacante, rorpa
otsarsni is not found in ItPr.
XVIII. 32; VPr. I. 09; OA. I. 93
and our troatiso 46. Bat wo know
from Bhatyira Harichandra that
tho Aindra grammar usod the
term varna instoad of aisnm and
that this grammar opened with tho
sfltra "atha varnasamtthah," Cf.
his Nyfisavj fikhyfi, Sutrosthfinam
( Caraka. p. 58 just published )
winch runs, —
'ffflstre§vapi 'atlia vurnasamu7iali'
lti Aindra — vyakanwasya | 'athfito
dhiirmam \jnkhynsy5uiali' iti
20
Vais'esikadars'anasya ca' and so on,
I suspect here that Katyayana,
Patagjali, Kaiyata and their follo-
wers are referring here to Aindra
VyakaranasQtra and we may not
be very far from the mark if we
assume that purvasutre here stands
for prathamasutre.
Both the RPr. and the VPr.
place this rule at the head of the
rules for syllabication. Cf. Uvata
on EPr. I. 22:—
evam astau samanaksarani (1. 1)
ityadina-varnasamamnayamanukra-
mya tatah. 'sarvah seso vyanjanani
(1. 6) ityadina, vyasjanagata^i sa5j-
fiah. krtva. anantaram — ojah-sva-
ranam (1. 17) ityadinaksaragatah
sasjnh krtva adhunak§aravya5ja-
nasamnikarse kim kasyangamityeta-
nnirupanayaha 'anusvaro vyanja-
nam caksarangam, iti || Our trea-
tise on the other hand has already
shown the rules (see also CA. I.
55-58) for syllabication probably
because it thinks that the difficulty
about syllabication arises with
regard to the consonants -and
anusvara alone and not with rega-
rd to the aksaras i. e. the vowels.
One difference more in EPr. and
our treatise. After defining hmsva
by 1. 17 and dlrgha by 1. IS the
RPr. defines alcsara and then
states : —
gurum" dlrghani, (20) tathetare-
sam samyoganusvaraparani yani
(21) j Note also the order in RPr.
XVIII. 32-4*. In this order the
ultra-long vowels and 1 are not
mentioned and hence they can
only be implied as Uvata does on
RPr. I. 19. But our treatise does
away with this difficulty by inclu-
ding the definition of pluta in 44.
CA. 1. 93 ( svaro' ksaram ) also
does not serve the purpose of an
introduction to the rules for sylla-
bication, but according to Whitney
may be regarded as a virtual pre-
cept that the accentuation, which
in latter rules is taught (cf. Uvata
on RPr. I. 19 tantrantare etc.),
extends its sway over the whole
syllable, or on the other hand, that
the accents which are declared to
belong to syllables, affect specially
the vowels. This explanation of
"Whitney is not peculiar to CA.
alone, but it applies to other Prati-
sakhyas as well. Cf. ta ucyante
ksardiraysih RPr. 3. 1-2. (Uvata
on I. 19) and our treatise 46 which
will just open the treatment of
accentuation in (5 1) the 7th. da^aka,
and this is hinted at by our
Commentator who says ; —
krte varnopades'a samanya ( in
the 1st. Prap.) prthaktvena (40-45)
ksaraparibhasaya, (46) nvartho
dharmo 5 ksarajsane (omitvirama)
aksaraparimanasambandhat
tatrogdghatanighatau and so on.
In aksaraparimana, parimana
= ftaZa cf . "Whitney on TPr. XXIII.
2. dvisvarah parva. the melody
between the dandas ( a bar indi-
cating vir&ma is called a parvan.
The lengths of the parvan are
videly divergent. Cf. the Comm.
on Shpbr. II. p. 15 which runs: —
'yito g'lnavidhau kutracid
oicak$arflvasanani, )atha — 'ogna ft
yahi \l' ityasjArarci ( 1. I ) gl>a
milno samni somarambho | d\ja-
ks,aruvasanam pm i yatha — 'o-
gna i | tathft *udn tjnm jltftvoda
sam* ( 1. 31 ) ityas)am gljamllno
silmm *jV s*ibdo ekftksaravasanam
parva | atraiva sftmarambho trya-
k?ar5\nsanam ca | and so on
According to BnrnoU tho bar of
division ( «- par van) marks the
notes to bo sung nith ono broitli.
For details soo Vodlo Chant pp.
43-50.
Udghata— ucclbhava, Cf 'm&tra
lak$ano trlvidhaudghato
\vyadamat aurcau ho'
prabhrtlni | vyadMo yl
— i | matan huvft — i |
rcau ho |
Nighata — sinking of a tono. 'nf
hanyate nlco bhavati*
PpS X. 46, 'nihanyate
mandras\aram bhnvati' jj
Abhyudghata is opposed
to udghata, Cf. Simon,
PpS p. 520.
Pratyutkramah tho moving for
ward of a noto to a high or nolo,
pratyntlrbmati uccasvaro bhavati
N on PpS. 5 74, pratyutkrantali
itrdhvam gatali VI 45 It is of
eight kinds —
1 From tho sixth to the fifth
s
note ra 6 5 6 n
2 From fifth to the fourth :
5
au 4 r&.
3. Trom fourth to the third
A
ta 3 to.
4 From third to tho second
hi 2 3 4 fi.
0, From iocond to tho first
2 2R t
ho 1 i j gno rft |
6. Trom fifth to tho third
sn an M
pa | avna |
7 From fifth to tho second .
s A
priya 2.
8 From third to tho first :
3 2
puna 3 1.
For doUils soo Simon, PpS
P. CJI.
(a) The numbers 1-C indi-
cate tho pitches of a down-
ward lories of tones. Tho
tones_l-3 aro high com-
pared with tho tonos 4-6.
(b) Roplaeing tho pitch 1 by
2 in a melody is called
nicatva (Simon, PpS.614)
(c) Tho numbers ovor the
syllables nre tho PraJcxti
tonos i.e. the essential
tonos of tho melody j
thoso in tho letters are
the Vtkfti tones i.e. orna-
mental tones
(d) Where, thero is a group
of notes nnd a number
over each one, theso up-
per numbers give tho
longth in mntras, eg.
i i i i i
va 2 3 4 5.
(e) The length of the note
depends on the vowel,
and not on tho length
of the syllable according
22
to prosody; thus in citra
the first note is short.
The last note in each
parvan is always vrddha.
Bur. Arbr. XLIV.
Abhigitam : 'dvitlyadih pratha-
mantyam | abhigite ardhamatra,
dvitiye prathame adhyardha j
stomam rudraya pinvo arkaih
(1.156) ] stomam rudra (a abhi) ]
pa-invo (o abhi) | 5
N. on PpS. 5. 32 and 281. See
also the Comm. on Shpbr, (p. 20).
According to the above the
abhigita tone consists of two tones.
It shows the union of the second
tone with the first tone in the
same syllable, of which the second
tone is worth half a matra, the
first tone having an additional
half matra {adhyardha, = \\ Jsa-
nendra on Panini V. 1. 28; Bur.
Shpbr. XIX). For details see
Simon, PpS, 517, 592.
Vrddhih : emphsis. See note
on 68.
Karsana : extending or pro-
longing down the scale. It is
occasionally applied to the fifth
note indicating that it is drawn
or produced beyond the mandra. Cf .
'krsyate karsanam bhavati' N.
on PpS. Y. 810. This is either
up the scale marked V or down
marked A and includes all the
notes between those marked. See
Arbr. XLIII.
Karsana is of five knds —
1. The karsana upto the second
i
tone : ba, 2 rhiso.
2. The karsana upto the third
2
tone : va 3.
3. The karsana upto the fourth:
a 2 3 4.
4. The karsana upto the fifth :
i
gata gru 2 3 4 5 ta 6 5 6 1.
The Comm. on Shpbr. p. 19
runs: —
pagca svarah karsanalaksitah [
karsanalaksanam Chandogapari-
s'iste udahrtam [ pagcavidham
karsanam advitlyakar^anam atrtl-
yakarsanam acaturthakarsanam
amandrakarsanam mandrascatisva-
ryatkvsyata iti | ya eva svarah
prathamadarabhya (te) sa eva a
atisvaryat krsyate samyak svarah [
yatha vasisthe ( 1. 269 ) sa ta, £ru
2 3 4 5 ta 6 5 61.
See also Simon, PpS. 51 9; Vedic
Chant, p. 44.
Astaksarena: the Brhat and Ea-
thantara are cattle, ( the first )
eight syllables of the first verse
he (the Prastotr) takes as prastava.
See note on 39. See Caland, PVB.
p. 149.
Dvyaksarena: the first two sylla-
bles of the last two verses he takes
as prastava. See Caland.
Dasaksarena: they make (chant)
in the middle a finale of ten sylla-
bles. For nidhana see note on 39.
See Caland, PVB. p. 175.
47-48 Cf. BPr. XVTII. 32 and the
note on 46.
49 Cf. BPr. XTIII. 38, 39.
50 Cf. RPr. XVIII. 41.
23
ACCENTUATION.
51 Tho subject of nccontuation is troa-
ted in our treatise in a mcngro way.
What is given is just sufficient to
construct the Bamhita from the
Pada text For a dotailod treat-
ment of tba nccontuation in Saman
cf. tho first two Pmpftthkas and
the first six DaSakas of SSrnatantra.
In tho following troatmont of accen-
tuation I ha\o copiously drawn
from Whitney. Tor tho detilod
treatment of tho nccontuation in
the SV. cf. Rktantra-vivrti.
Our treatiso does not dofino the
threo terms udatla, anudhtla and
•cartas. The OA. I. 13, tho YPr.
I. 108, 109, TPr. I. 3S f 39, and
Pfinini 1. 2. 29-30 precisely
agroo in their do<cnption of tho
udatla. and anudatta acconts ;
thoRPr. III. I is moro profound.
As for tho svartta they al] virtu-
ally agree in spirit, though not in
form: the TPr, I. 40 and Pfinini
1. 2. 31 call it a samfthara-com-
bination of acute and gra\e ; the
VPr. I. 110 states thato syllablle
possessing both the other tones is
siartia. The RPr, III. 2 says
that a syllable is svarita into
which the two other tones enter
together, OA I. 16 agrees with
this definition. The three Skt.
accents uddtta, anudHtta and sva-
rita precisely correspond in phone-
tic character with acute, grave, and
circumflex.
52 That is, when two simplo vowels
or a vow ol and a diphthong, coalesce
and form a single vowel or diph-
thong, in case "oither of tho two
was acute, tho rosulting syllablo is
ncuto. Tho rulo is a general ono
nnd suffers exceptions which form
tho subjoct of rulos (57-58), name-
ly that 6 and 6, whon thoy absorb
a following a become b and 6 and
that I i bocome i. The correspon-
ding rules of tho other treatises
aro UP. Ill 6; VPr.IV.131;TPr.
X. 10 and Xll. 10; OA. 111. G6.
53 Svarita is nothing but a combina-
tion of udttta and anudatta, and
its first half mora ■which is vdhtta
is cillod svarita, the rest being
jrraeaya nf tho Chandogas. Cf: —
Sffi 37^wfa Sirf^RsI
NaradlS. 1.
This will bo clear from tho fo-
llowing Vivrti on Rktantra which is
available in parts only. It reads. —
crH^Rcf frmft" i ^wjrferr tsm-
24
s^rfwi^mst softer: s^ren;: n
sfafTRrgjffa: wren: fr%
5T^: Jff^cf ^3%: ?T ^fcfFcT^ II
mj: ^R: 5% I ^F%: ^R^^|: |
5# ^W^T Wlf :-
S^jf^tf ^R^t flcwr ^Jcf: II
w^wfa aft ^ra: i ?T^xr^:—
^0" «<<i*ii«i>wrrarnira;i Offerer srrcr-
^T3T§ ^KdN^ ^TnRJ^ I)
For a partial correspondence, cf.
VPr. I. 126; TPr. I. 41; RPr. III.
4; CA. 1. 17; Panini 1. 2. 32.
These treatises are unanimous in
declaring that the ardhamatra
( = half a mora) of a svarita is
udatta, or to be more explicit,
the succeeding low tone starts
25
hi 0 her than even the pioceding
high accont f a phenomena, tho hko
of ■which has beon noted in Sechu
ana, an Afucin Uuguage by Prof
Daniel Jones (Sachuana Ileider
p 37) Tho wording of the iuIqs
is clear and the mention of mifrti
makes it quite patent that tho
authors here imply only half a mora
and not the half syllable Bat
the commentators on tho*o trea
tises have tried to oxplam ardha
malra by half the syllable ( i o in
short smrita -J- mora is uditia and
■J anudatta, m long I mora nd tita
and 1 anudatta, in ultra-long 1£
mora udatla and \\ annd<a)
Now, if the authors of the corres
ponding rales really intended to
convey the sense, these common
tators put upon them, we wonld
have had tditordhamudattatn
instead of m itrHrdkamudattam m
CA, svar'xrdkam instead of starar
dham&tram in VPr, y&iadardham
instead of yhiadardham hrasiaiya
m TPr and above all Pamni
who believed m — -
ardhamatralaghavena putrotsa
vara manyante vaiyakarinah' would
never have osed the word 'hras
vara' m 1 2 32 (cf Pat 'ardhahras
va sabdo' rdhamatrarfldhaV, and
Han —
'pramanameva hrasvada,
vonupattam pratlyate' ]
VakyaP II 309 10)
—where KaSikakara (cf 1 2 32)
and Bhattoji (cf SK , Manorama,
and &abdaK on 1 2 32) following
tho commentators on Pratis"akhyas
assert that in Pamni 1 2 32, tho
word hrasia is rodundant and
ardha-hrasva means half tho s>lla
ble
UPr III i 'tasyodattatarodatt-
adardhamatrardhameva \a' clearly
lays down an option between half
a mora and the half of a syllable,
bat even so clear a construction
as this, has been wilfully mishand
led by no less an authority than
Bhattoji -nho following his own
^akhajsays 'ardham veti dlrghabhi
prijam' and the glosses it with
'etau paksau vnkalpikavityapas
tam | va sabdastu padapuran&yoti
bodhjatn' | But this is simply ab
surd will be shown by a quotation
from Svarastaka.a ms work m the
Library of Mysore (1024) which
confirms tho fact of option between
the two views It runs —
svaritasyai\a purvardha,
mapare tu mamgtnali |
abhnvlryaiva purvardham,
niyacchantyeva compitam |]
and so on For a similar farfetched
statement of Kmyataand Bhattoji
cf my note on 35
In fact, these niceties seem to
have been a matter of pretty pure
theory, and there were certain
^akhas (cf Vajasaneyi) who took
the half of the svarita syllable as
udatta and the other half as anu
datta but this view is not Bupport
ed by the wording of the Prati
gakbyas
For the observation that the
26
first half mora of the svarita was
higher than the high accent, cf.
5. Varma, Critical Studies pp. 161-
162 ; for a detailed discussion on
the relation of accent with musi-
cal notes, cf. Burnell, Arbr. XLT-
XLVIII.
55 This is the rule prescribing the
enclitic svarita i. e. a svarita arising
in an unaccented syllable which
is preceded bj an acute, and not
again immediately followed by an
acute or circumflex. The ftPr.
III. 9, 10, and OA. III. 62-63
subdivide the enclitic circumflex
into two forms: the tairovyaujana,
where the eircumfiexed syllable is
separated from the acute by one or
more consonants and the padavxita
(the RPr. calls it vaivrtta) where
a hiatus intervenes. The VPr.
1.117-119 and the TPr. XX.
6, 7 teach the same thing. But
the former distinguishes under the
tairovyafgana a subform tairovi-
rama (having a pause between) as
occuring when the acute is parted
jfrom its enclitic circumflex not
only by consonants but by the
avagraha, or pause which separates
the two parts of a compound word.
Thus in prajavat the enclitic accent
of vat would be the tairovirama,
while in prajanam that of nam
would be the tairovyaujana simply.
The tairovirama, then would occur
only in the Pada text. The TPr.
does not note this pada-accent, but
allows the name tairovyavyana
only to a circumflex which follows
an acute in the same word : if the
acute syllable is a final, and the
circumflex an initial, the latter is
to be denominated pratihata XX.
3 : thus in tatra, the enclitic
svarita of tra would be tairovya-
fijana, in tat te that of te would
be pratihata* The practical im-
portance of these numerous sub-
divisions of an enclitic accent seem
of little importance and our trea-
tise does not notice them. But
Naradasiksa agrees with YPi\
when it states : —
udattapurvani yatkigcit,
chandasi svaritam bhavet J
esa sarvabahusvaras,
tairovyagjanamucyate j|
avagrahat param yatra,
svaritam syadanantaram j
tiroviramam tam vidyat,
udatto yadyavagrahali jj
svare cet svaritam yatra,
vivrtta yatra samhita j
etat padantavrttasya,
laksanam sastracoditam ||
56 This svarita is called fcsaipra. The
term comes from ksipra "quick,
hasty" and marks the sandhi as
one in which there is a gain of
time, or a hastened, abbreviated
utterance of the senii vocalized
vowel. All the treatises viz.llPr.III.
7; VPr. IV. 47; TPr. X. 16; CA.
III. 58 state that in such a case,
when the former element of the
compound is acute and the latter
grave, the resulting syllable is
circumflex, and all-BPr. III. 10;
VPr. I. 115; TPr. XX. 1. CA.
27
III 58-apply to the circumflex,
thus arising, the name of the com
bmation, ksaipra Naradasiksa
also teaches the same thing It
runs —
1 u varnau yadodattau,
apadyete yavau kvacit |
anudatte pratyaje nityam,
vidyat ksaiprasya laksanam [|
The jalya svanta precisely corre
sponds in origin and in qua lit) v, ith
the lsatj)ra "The meaning of the
term jatya is natural, original,
primitive The circumflex syllables
to which it is applied are those
which have that accent m their
own right and always indepen
dently of the combinations of the
sentence' (Whitney) It is distinct
from the enclitic, in as much as
it is preceded by an umccented
vowel or having no predeces or,
while the former invariably sue
ceeds an acute This arises frrm
the accented toru after a conjon
etion of consonants ending with
y or v, 'that is to say, no sylhble
in Sanskrit has an independent
circumflex accent except as it resu
Us from the conversion of an on
ginal accented I or «, short or
long, into its corresponding semi
vowel y or v before a following
dissimilar vowel' "Whitney
Thus kanya represents an earli
er kanl a, svar an earlier su ar
and the like The jatya svanta
then corresponds m origin and in
quality with the hmipra and diffe
rs from it only m period, arising in
connection with the combination
of syllables into words, rather than
of words into a sentence For the
definition of jatya svanta, cf
BPr III 4, VPr I-Ill, TPr
XX 2, CA IH 57 and Narada
siksa which reads —
sayakarara savam vapi,
aksaram svantam bhavet (
na codattam purastasya,
jatj asvarah sa ucyate |j
See TPr. XX 2, whlich reads -
"sayakaravakaram tvak§aram ya
tra svaryate sthite pade 1 nudatta
purve* purve va nilya ltyeva jam
vat
57 This is praihsta or praifasas vanta
The BPr II 7 gives this name
to all those cases of combination
m which two vowels, or a vowel
and diphthong, are combined to-
gether into a single vowel or diph
thong A svanta accent arising m
connection with such a combina
tion is, by al] the other treatises,
called pra<5h§ta The EPr III 8
says that a single teacher Mandu
keya held that the pras"hsta svanta
arose in all cases of a prasle§a
combination, where the former ele
ment was acute and the latter
grave, and it is well known that
the S-latapathabr follows this rule
of accentuation throughout Panim
VIII 2 6 also permits it, when
ever the unaccented latter element
is the initial of a word But this
svanta is not at all of so frequent
an occurrence as the general accep-
tance of this rule would show it to
be, because all the Pritis'Skbyas
agree in prescribing that a combi-
nation into which enters an uda-
tta vowel is itself udatta (see 53),
the acute element raising the gra-
ve to its own pitch. All however
, allow the exception which forms the
subject of the rule (58) and all
but the TPr. allow also that, which
is treated in this precept. Cf.
Naradaslksa : —
ikaram yatra pasyeyub,
ikarenaiva sainyutam |
udattamanud attena,
praslistam tarn nibhodhata ||
If the vowel i and i, both short, are
fused together into a long vowel,
this vowel has the praslista svarita.
The illustrations cited by the com-
mentator accord to this. For fur-
ther discussion on the subject, see
Whitney, OA. III. 56.
58 'udattamapadyate' does obviously
mean svaritam&padyate? Svarita is"
implied, because there is no men-
tion of udatta in the previous sutra.
Cf. note on 53.
This is an abhinihita svarita.
The BPr. II. 13 calls the absorp-
tion of initial a into preceding
final e and o the abhinihita sand hi,
while the VPr. I. 114 and CA.
III. 55 apply this title to the re-
sulting circumflex. The TPr. XX.
4 has for the same accent, the
slightly different name abhinihata.
The VPr. IV. 59 and TPr.
XII. 9 give rules for the occurr-
ence of the abhinihita circumflex
in connection with those for the
absorption of initial a, and define
and name the accent in 1. 114
and XX, 4 respectively, when
treating the general subject' of
accent. The BPr. deals with both
matters togethor, first prescribing
the svarita in III. 7, and then
giving it iis distinctive appellation
in III 10. The Naradasiksa defines
abhinihita thus : —
e-o-abhyamudattabhyam,
akaro nihitasca yah j
akararo yatra lumpanti,
tainabhinihitam viduh ||
60 In the commentary read 'ucca-
nuccasand his ticca eva karyah'.
61 A grave following a circumflex
has the tone of acute. All the
other treatises KPr. III. 11- VPr.
IV. 138; 139; TPr. XXI. 10; OA
III. 71 lay down the same prin-
ciple, saying also distinctly what
must be taken as implied in our
sutra (and the CA. Til. 71) that
not only the single grave syllable
which immediately follows the
circumflex receives the acute ut-
terance, but those also, which may
succeed it, until the proximity of
an acute or circumflex (a rule not
stated in our treatise, butoccuring
in every other treatise ; cf. BPr.
III. 12; VPr. IV. 140; TPr. XXI.
11; CA. III. 74) causes the voice
to sink to the proper anudatta
tone. The BPr. and TPr. use the
term pracaya = accumulation, inde-
finitely extended number or series"
in describing this accent.
It may be interesting here to
note the rule of rise and fall of
the voice in connection with the
consecution of the accents, a sub-
29
ject fully troatod by all other
Prati^akbyas except thnt of ours.
A s) liable may bo nttorod in the
threo tones i o anudatia, tho low
or grave which belongs to an
unaccented sjllablo, ndatta, the
high or acuto, which is tho proper
tono of an accented syllablo, and
the svanta, circumflex, which com
bines in it a highor and a Jowor
pitch Ytithin tho limits of tho same
syllable, and always rosutts, as an
indopondont accent, from tho fusion
of two origiuall) soparato olomonts,
of which tho ono was acuto and tho
other gra%o, A groat complication
houotor arises b) tho rule that an
originally grave syllablo, whon it
follows an acuto, rocoiios an on
clitic circumflex . that is to say,
tho voice, whon onco ranod
to tho pitch of acute, doos not
ordinarily come down with a loip
to tho level of thogravo, but makos
its descent m tho courso of tho
next following syllable. Wo should
thus say ft tra \ To this there
is an exception, that the syllable
which would otherwise rocoivo an
enclitic svarita remains grave, if an
acuto or circumflox comes next
after it, tho theory being that the
voice preparos itself for rising to
the acute pitch by sinking boforo
it Cf. RPr. in 9, VPr. IV.
135, TPr, XIV. 31, CA III. 70
There is yet another complies
tion, and it is this that tho un-
accented syllables which follow a
circumflex, although grave m value,
aro jot pronouncod at tho pitch of
acuto. This grave accent with
tho tono of acuto is called pracaya-
nccumulation Cf RPr. III. II, TPr.
XXI 10. Now tho RPr. III.
23 doclaros that tho first portion
of a circumflox should bo nttorod
not at acuto pitch, but with a yet
higher tono, and Its latter portion
at ncuto pitch. Cf. TPr. I. 41-42
also This boing tho cmo, it is quito
natural to supposo that tho follow-
ing gra\o sjllablos should ran on
at tho samo loiol, j, o tho acute
pitch. But tho grave, which next
precodos an acuto or circumflox is
not of acuto tono, but maintains
its original charactor. Cf. RPr. III.
12, VPr. IV. 140, TPr. XXI. 11,
CA III 74 This is in brief tho
way of tho nso and fall of tho tono
m tho pronunciation of tho con-
socutno accents. Tor details fioo
Whitnoy, CA. III. 65
G3 In Pacta text oach word stands
soparato, and a PrStis^khya gives
rules for its comorsion into the
ouphonicilly combined toxt Ac-
cording to this precept tho pada
text seems fundamental and may
bo taken as tho foundation of tho
Samhita text, Cf. RPr. II I, TPr.
V 2, Yiiska, Nir. 1. 6. 1.
64 Euphomo alteration takes place in
thepadas
GG Cf, Panim II 4 71 In the comm.
put a fullstop after 'ganasamfisab.*
instead of after «i. With regard
to thogaua, cf. 'dadhipayaadi gana'
on Pftnini II. 4 14. which runs .
'brahmapraj&patl, S*ivavaigravanatt'
30
(vaisvanarau Bur.), skandavi3akb.au,
parivratkausikau etc. See note
on 128. In the comm. put a full-
stop after 'bahuvacanam.' For
'kaundinya' cf. Panini II. 4. 70,
and for the plural in vanaspati, cf.
P. IT. 4. 12. In the sentence com-
pound 'vyapeksa samarthya' is
implied.
67 Aitareya Aranyaka III. 1. 5 gives
three definitions of Samhita: (1)
Samhita is the interval between
two syllables. This is indefinite,
because it does not show the nature
of interval and it suggests that the
syllables in juxtaposition were
independent units. (2) Samhita
is the interval by which the accent
or the quantity of two syllables is
distinguished. This includes ac-
cent and quantity and is a more
satisfactory definition. (3) Sam-
hita is a pronunciation of two
syllables which are neither entire-
ly separated nor united. This
suggests a sound view of syllabica-
tion and is practically correct. See
S. Yarma, Critical Studies, p. 108.
See Yaska, Nir. 1, 6. 1; TPr
XXI V. 1-4; Panini 1. 4. 109 with
- Pataujali ( = parah prakrsto yah
samnikarsab samsSlesah paraspa-
rena svaranam svararOdhanam vya-
tijananam sa samhita = ) the union
of separate words in euphonic com-
bination. The second Prapathaka
(note that the first is a later addi-
tion) of our treatise, coupled with
the first six rules of the third, has
disposed of all matters of general
phonetic theory, and laid down
such rules as apply to words in
their independent form, and it
now enters upon what is the chief
function of a Pratis"akhya i.e. the
registering of those changes, which
occur when the padas of disjoined
text are put together in the form
of Samhita. This rule is an adhi-
kara applied to all what follows in
the succeeding chapters. Other
treatises have equivalent headings;
cf. RPr. II. 1; VPr. III. 1; TPr.
V. 1; CA. II. 1.
68 (a) Cf. Panini YI. 1. 125. The
commentator cites mina avyam,
bhara indra, dharaya, apali as exa-
mples, but in all these we find
sandhi in the SY. of Benfey; JS.
of Caland and the text of Steven-
son, and the commentator himself
gives dharayapab. as a counterexa-
mple on 71. Moreover, we find
examples, where the pluta under-
goes euphonic alteration; cf. tva, 3
sya I. 129, 165, II. 271; kva 3 sya
I. 142; tva 3 dya I. 295. In five
situations the a standing at the
beginning of a pada is elided after
a pluta vowel. Cf. vrdhe 3' sman
I. 239; IT. 769 (JS. has vrdhe 3
asman); grnano3' bhi° II. 774;
grhe 3' mrtam II. 1195; ayudhyo3'
smakam II. 1208; hito3' bhi° II.
279. Sandhi takes place when
apluta is followed by a pluta, cf.
apsva3 ntara I. 5 1 2; abhy r3 tasya
1. 556; ayatyu3 chanti II. 101;
hya 3 nga II. 288, 860; abhya3
rsan II. 408; devatya 3 madam
31
IT. COS, fcgdlm 3 ?u II, 927, £arg-
dh3ft3 RMdhamA H 1204, Tho
exact kon of this sfltru may thoro
foro bo fount! s.itnowhoro olsn,
(b)Dtr>l\unil vrddhl sy-
llables with a short \u«o\ cmnt
for a short tone, tho-.o with a long
\o«ol count for a long to.no For
tho siko of intmcil composition
short vow oh are ofton lengthened
Soraotimos a long ^ owol is replaced
by a short vowel Cf Pp<*. VI 70-
IOS. Besides tho short and long
tones thoro aro tho increnod or
emphasized tonos, tho vrddhtw
According to Uurnall tho but noto
ul&jiarvan Is always omphasuod
and, In fact, thoro n always found
a lengthening of vowel or ayibhiWa
(AjlbhAva or AibliA\ a Is tho change
from i, I, e into A} tor M, in the
same, waj thoro is ArbhA\a wfth tho
chango from r into (Vr PpS VI
109-l52)o g SV 1 1 vftije
i t -
changes Into W-itoya l Z i Which
syllablos undergo this kind of
Uddhi is taugiit in Pp.S V
1-118, and horom porhapa hes
the solution of tho difficulty men
2 —
tionod abovo In ito^a 2 J sandhi
does not tako place, bocauso the ft
of Itoyfi is vrddha»omphaslzed,
lengthened, Ihero is no special
notation for vrddha
The sign r o^er the syllable
means a dlrgha a> liable, vluoli
according to Burnell is 'prolonged
boyond the usual length, but appa
rontly doos not lose its character
of n long 8) liable Tho dlrgha cm
bo clcirl) distinguished from tho
■\rddha sellable. Pur dotaili,
»eo Vedio Chant p, 43. For
\cddha in 44 cf. Loma^I £ik$a in
p *I>G and 8 Varma, Critical
Studio* \, 160,
GO Cf RPr H 5C ) VPr.IV.b7 I TPr.l\
IC, 17.CA III.36,PAnini 1. 1. 14
70 Cf RPr. I 70, YPr, I. 94, CA. 1
80, Pnmm 1. 1 15, Macdoiiell,
Vodic Or, p. G7, Wackornagol,
Altind. Or I. p 3.IG nolo
71 CI UVc It 61 with MiuDit.
Tho commontator citos hero 'knda
\a*o stotroin harjnta h a^a* I, 228.
as an oxamplo Hut wo road m
HV 10,105,1 haryata apa notod
b> U\a(aon RPr. II 74 Add to
tho list of oxamplos 'csrkrjadft
UfwauJ. IVG (wonting Jn RV,),
sac* udjat II. 102 noted bj RPr,
II CO But our troatiso doos not
loom to covor pibA imam I. 1D1
whore A doos not stand at tho
bo 0 inning ofapida, but cf. 253, m
which ba-i is oxprossly gi\eu,
tfrarfdlift it KV 7. 32 14 has been
noted by RPr II. 59, but tho
same stanza ocours in SV, with
s>addha hi to I 280, Noto also
jos.ama indrah It 1 140 registered
by ItPr 11.61. RPr. II. 6 G pro
wdes for ovA agniin RV.fi 6. 10
In the SV. \*o find sandhi m such
situations. Cf e^Amrtliya II. 710.
Other examples noted by ItPr II.
08-66 aro not found in our Sam
hitft and honce they aro not notod
by tho commentator, RPr, II 67,
32
Panini VI. 1. 126 prescribe nasa-
lisation for such uncontracted a,
but this is singularly absent in our
Samhita, Hiatus without nasalisa-
tion is seen in TS. III. 1, 11. 5
and MS. I. 4. 12: 60. 14. Cf.
Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I. p. 315;
Oldenberg, RV. I. 469.
72 This is an exception to 69. For a
corresponding rule, cf. Panini
VIII. 3. 33. In the comm. read
kirn vavapanam, cf. Bohtlink on
P. VIII. 3. 33.
73 Exception to 74.
74 For corresponding rules cf. RPr.
I. 71 ( rodaslme RV. 7. 82. 2
noted by RPr. II. 72 is not noted
by RT.); Vpr. I. 93; CA, I. 75, 76;
TPr. IV. 11, 15; Panini 1. 1. 11.
The dual i or u never change to y
or v nor is the former ever proso-
dically shortened, though the
latter sometimes is. The dual I may
remain even before i, e. g. hari iva,
but the contraction is wi*itten in
upadblva etc. noted in 75. Cf. Mac-
donell, Vedic Gr. p. 65; "Wackerna-
gel, Altind. Gr. I. p. 321. But there
is no provision for somo gaurl adhi
gritah SV. II. 546 in our treatise,
■while others note it, cf. RPr. I. 72;
CA. I. 74; Panini 1. 1. 19. •
In TPr. IV. 1 the term pragmha
= separated, implies that the vowel
so designated is exempt from san-
dhi, while other treatises find it
necessary to teach by a specific rule
that the vowels declared to be pra-
gyhya are not subject to euphonic
alteration. Cf. RPr. II. 51; VPr.
IV. 87; CA. Ill; 33; Panini VI. 1.
125. Our treatise does not even
mention the term pragrhya and
declares that such and such vowels
do not undergo sandhi,
75 Upadhwa and pradMva are not
found in SV. but are met with in
RV. 2. 39. 4. Dampativa occurs in
RV. 2. 39. 2. Clearly the rule is a
later addition to our treatise. For
corresponding rules cf. RPr. II,
55, 72. Panini does not provide for
such cases, while the Vrttikara
does; cf. Kasika, on Panini 1.
1. 11, but he has been refuted
by Kaiyata who forms these exam-
ples not with iva but with va, the
by-form of iva. Cf . Kaiyata on Pat-
agjali. 1. 1. .11; Bhattoji, &abdaK.
on Panini 1. I. 11; and Jnanendra
on SK. Acsandhi; Macdonell,
Vedic Gr. p. 65. n 12; 66. n. 9.
76 In the sutra ayavave = a + e -}- o +
au -f e ( = locative of a). Nyunen
antah padam. Cf. RPr. II 35 ;
Panini VI. 1. 114. The word also
implies that sandhi is negatived
in those situations only, where the
metre requires retention of a\ in
other places the a is elided, though
it may stand in the middle of a
pada. Cf. pado' syehabhavat ArS.
34 : pado' sya 35. This clearly con-
firms the view of Whitney who
says "if there is any rule or system
of rules, determining the very
various phenomena-which I can-
not but seriously doubt-Ihave been
unable to discover any trace of it"
CA. III. 54. In the commentary
33
navaptre is brought down from 75
Cf Paniui avyaparo VI 1 114,
RPr 'yakaradyak§aram param
vakaradyapi %a bha\ol' II, 35 ,
VPr IV 73, though in another
sense, of course RPr II 49 pro
scribes pra a rhyasaijjua, and of all
tho oxamples citod on it SV has
only one 'paravato otho' SV II
252 -HV 9 39 5 On KPr
II 50, pantama voondhasah RV 8
92 1 talhoj with SV I 1C5=II
63 Comparo alio VPr IV 82
84, CA. Ill 64, Famni VI 1
115, Bonfoy, SV Em! XX.M
In tho commontary 'trirakrfin
tagrahanat' moans tnh — i o Buch
examplos aro only throo (a) tfaso
avratam, only onco in 1 298 (b)
sano ovyo (twico, I 529, 532, in II
601 529 h repeated) Soo noto
on 280 'Akranta grihanat may
moan, v not jotnod with conso
nanls that mako it liahlo to krama
=doubhng (i * y, r) tho a of avyo,
and a\ ratam is thoroforo not ohdod
CA proscnbe»only two rules II
53, 54, with regard to tins sandhi
and thus makesshort shift of a suhjoct
which occupies long passages of tho
other Pratifikhyas (cf RPr II
35 50, VPr IV 61 85, TPr XI
1— XII, 8, Pamni VI 1 115-121)
and has cost their authors a vast
deal of labour According to
Whitney there is not in tho wholo
work another so discreditable
confession of unwillingness or in
ability to copo with tho difficulties
of an intricate subject Tor details
about this sandhi in AV cf
Whitnoy, OA III 54
79 Of goograya KV J II 8 In
tho commontary wo may road go
a^am | go ajmam | go ojinikam |
Road ojinikam in 80-81
80 Tho scopo of 79 80, and 81 is
coiorod by ono tutra of Panini, cf
VI 1 122 Noto its bearing on
tho ago of our t roatiso
81 According to Patacjali and othor
commontators Pfinini has not ro
cordod gavasVam etc Ho on the
othor hand prosenboj (VI 1 123)
avon RdoSa, thoroby forming ga\ft
gram, ga\ajinam etc Tho original
sandhi of tho compound go ap-a
must have boon gava D ra Cf
(Vackornagol, Altind Or I p
325, Macdonoll, Vodio Gr p 06
n 7
82 Tho exact scopo of this sulra is not
known Two explanations may he
offered (a) Sandhi doos not take
placo if tie is followed by a as in
t>ea„noI 38 But as this is co^ or
ed by74 thecommontatorsoomsto
tako tho sutra 'niyamortharo' i o
n is not ohdod oftor tie alone, and
that it may ho omittod after te etc ,
as is dono in yajatam to 'nyat
I 75 otc But in SV we mvan
ably find tho rotontion of a after
this te and thoro are a host of
other examples whore a is not oh
ded oftor te, tre etc Cf I, 53 58
230, 279 324, 419, 439, 529, 531,'
533, 547, II 75, 85, 88, 89, 100,
103, 108, 173, 181, 222, 836, 237'
252, 262, 365, 367, 370, 372, 373,
«9, 587, 601, 612 627, 629, 640
974, 996 998 1094, 1095, 1160
34
It may be argued here on the
authority of Patagjali ( = nanu ca
bhoschandoganam satyamugrirana-
yanlya ardhamekaramardhamoka-
ram cadlriyate sujate esvasunyte
adhvaryo odribhih sutam, sukram
te enyat etc. 1. 1. 2: 99) that a
half e and o arise in such situations,
and that after them a is omitted,
a fact borne out by Nages'a, who
says on the above quoted line : —
'sujate e asvetyakaralekhastu pra-
madikah.' Cf. the Comm. on VPr. I.
94 against it. But the suggestion
falls to the ground, when we note
that this phenomenon -was confined
to the Sakhas of Satyamugri and
Raoayanlyas alone, -who according
to the statement of Bhattoji (yad-
yapi chandoganam madhye satya-
mugri-ranayanlya ardhamekaram
ardhamokarara cadhiyate sujate e
asvasunrte iti antah padasthasya-
vyaparasya tadiyapratisakhye' rdha-
vneharamardhamoJcaram ca vida-
dkati tath&pi pratiialchya samakhya-
baladeva sarva£akhasadharane , smin
iastre tasya na grahanam, SabdaK.
1. 1. 2: 55) definitely noted it in
their Pratisakhya (not available
now) ■which must have been differ-
ent from our treatise, which shows
no trace of such a thing, and which
the Carana-Vyfiha clearly ascribes
to the Kauthumas.
(B) The second explanation may
be that the sutra is not meant for
abhinihiia sandhi alone and that
like RPr. I. 73; VPr. I. 96; TPr.
IV. 10, and Panini 1. 1. 13, (Mac.
Vedic Gr, p. 66; Wackernagel, Al-
tind. Gr. I. p. 325) it prescribes
pragrhyatvafor tve, not only before
a but before other vowels as well.
Cf. the Comm. on VPr, I. 96;
TPr. IV. 10-11. tve iddhuyate
havih RV. I. 26. 6 noted by RPr.
I. 73 occurs in SV.II. 966, besides
tve isah II. 1171, occuring 10
times in SV. but only twice before
vowels. If we accept this expla-
nation we can easily count for such
cases, otherwise not. But two diffi-
culties move against this guess :
(1) The context is not in its
favour. (2) Why to provide for
tve alone, when we also have asme
indo svabhuvam II. 511 (the word
occuring 13 timos in the Samhita)?
83 TheRPr.II.34,35;VPr.IV.61;CA.
III. 53; and Panini VI. 1. 109 treat
the abhinihita sandhi as a union
of a with the preceding diphthong
or its absorption by the latter.
0. ur treatise on the other hand pre-
scribes an actual loss or omission
of the a, a fact in which it agrees
with TPr. XI. 1. The elided a is
to be very often read, as the evi-
dence of the metre shows. The
sandhi of e and o hefore a was
originally the same as before other
vowels. Cf. Macdonell, Vedic Gr.
p. 66; "Wackernagel, Altind. Gr.
1. p. 324.
The stanzas on which RPr. II.
37-40, 44, 46 and 48 are based
are not found in SV., hence there
is no rule for them in our treatise.
We find however (1) samkrandano'
35
mmisah SV II 1203 = RV 10,
103 1, not noted bj our treatise,
but registered by RPr II 41,
(2) amlio tipiprah II 700=RV
7 66 5 overlooked in RT , bat
noted in RPr 42, (3) nrta'pavo- 1
466=RV 2 22 4 noted by 78
and RPr 42, (4) yavasevisyan
II 748=RV 7 3 2, covered by
76 and RPr 43, (5) mahi trina
mavo'stu 10 185 1 (RPr 45)—
mahi trina mavarastu I 192, [6]
yo odhyetyrsibhih II 647— RV
9 67 32 overlooked in IU but
covered by RPr 47
85 gayata rtavne is not found inRV
In abhyr3 tasya (1 566 ^bhyr,
Stevenson, Benfey, SV XXI V)
sandhi takes place, because r here
does not stand at the beginning of
a pada,a»d so it is in mr5jantyrsi§arja
II 236 and yasyrtvabhih II 938
But how to provide for (a) abh%
rtasya dohana H 52, where alsor
does not stand at the beginning ot
a pada, (pxprath rtamJI 946 = RV
4 56 7 btnng covered by 74), (b)
adhyetyfsibhih II 646, asyrjTsI II
759 where ltought to have counter
ticted 109 I would rather have
this sutra, like the following one,
restricted to the words ending m
a or a alone, and would guess the
solution for alkt rtasya in 68 And
the fact that this sutra is meant to
cover cises similar to those menti
oned in RPr II 35, 64 corrobora
tes my view
86 Cf RPr II 62 In such situations
a or a is nasalised in the RT Cf
RPr II 67, ugra^ olah 8 103 3
(wanting in SV ) jmrttsttita ^cko
(wantmgin SV ) bhara^ojo 8, 98
10, sawya^ eva 1 113 1 Nasah
aation does not take place in SV
and the last two examples are read
here bharaojo I 415 savayaiv&
II 1102 SeeBenfey.SV Einl XXXI,
"VVackernagel, Altmd Or I 314
Addvisvaojasal 372 in the coram
The sutra,Iike 85 in restricted to the
words ending m a or a, otherwise
in bhinattyojasa (SV I 297) 109
will be counteracted
87 The examples cited by the comm
entator are not found in any veda
They are certainly Vedik and are
drawn from some lost work In SV
I 62 anehasam stands at the end
of the stanza, henco it has no bear-
ing on sandhi Similar cases are
dealt with in RPr II 64,65 Exam
pies like patha mdra 1 453 are
not covered by 71 and the comm
entator could have easily cited
them here, but we do not know if
these ffere included in the 6aka»
dhvadigana which was certainly
different from the gana referred to
in sakandhvadisu parampam vft
cyam' a \arhka on Panuu VI 1
94 providing pararupa (quite the
contriry to oursiitrajin s*akandliu,
karkandhu etc
Note the form of the sQtra Wo
would rather have saba andhuka
dinam
88 Tor corresponding rule, see RPr
II 74 But what about bhuvanKm
xyase II 307*=vlvase RV 9 86
36
37. Note naki indra I. 203 = naki-
rindra RV. 4. 30. 1; the latter
being common.
89 This is to counteract 181.
93 The punctuation in the common fa-
ry may be emended to:-
uhhavekam | (TPr. X. 1) vika-
rah sasthanah (91-92)-ityuktam |
The contraction was not so very
common at the time, when Samhi-
tas were composed. This is shown
by the fact that at several places
the metre requires hiatus. Cf(a+ a)
stavetatithih 1. 85; devayagnaye
118; indrasvam 240; brahmarcata
257; sincadhva 0 385; asvadrio 398;
devaja° 419; pavasvandhasa 470;
sutasyandhasah 500; sunvanayan-
dhasali 555; somandhasa II. 327;
prasya 1118; narva 1127. a + a in
I. 70; 420; II. 663, 963, 1079, 12-
15, 1224. Indragni forms four sy-
llables in I 281; II. 203, 204, 341,
342, 343, but three syllables in II.
• 9, 10, 266, 267. 268, 423, 424, 4-
25, 923, 924. 925, 926, 1046, 10-
55, a + a, in II. 964; i + iin 11.541,
774, 977; u + u in II. 724 For
details see, Benfey, SV. Einl. L.
The rule is general in loka and
Veda. For corresponding sutras, cf.
RPr. II. 15, 17; VPr. IV, 5 1; TPr.
X. 2; OA. III. 42, and Panini VI. 1.
101. Note the examples tvam (tva,|
am) and suryasya ( su | uryasya ).
The Padatext divides surya only
once at this place. For a detailed
. discussion on SVPp. and RVPp.
cf. Benfey, SV. Einl. LVII— LX.
94 Namin. All vowels except a and a
are called namin, because they
tend to produce the nati or conver-
sion of a following s into s.RPr. I.
65; 66, 76; CA. II. 29 have the
same term, while VPr. IV. 34, 46
etc. use bhavin in its place. Cf. Bha-
ttoji, £abdaK. 1. 1. 2: 64. The use
of aslha for a, a a 3 is noteworthy
and so is usiha. in 281. Sandliya —
sandhija. Cf. Uvata on RPr. I. 2,
"akarasya ikarena ukarena ekarena
okarena ca saha sandhau yanyak-
sarani nispadyante" and this is
exactly the view of our treatise in
*iti sandhyaksarani' p. 2. But here
in 94 and 95 it uses sandhya for
ec and dvivarna for aic of Panini.
Cf. Bhattoji &abdaK. 1.1.2: 58"slisy-
amana varnadvayasadrsavayavatvat
sandhlyamanamaksaram sandhya-
ksaramityanvartha purvacarya si-
ddha, ecam safijna." The term dvi-
varna may be yogarudhi for yuj
(second and fourth in RPr.XIIT.39
cf. Uvata on 1.3] and may signify
that ai and a?* are composed of
two varnas i.e. a i wand both these
elements ai*e equal, being one mora
each, a view singularly attributed
to gakatayana. Cf. RPr. XIII. 39;
Kalanirnayagiksa 6; Patafijali on
Panini VIII. 2. 106; S. Varma,
Critical Studies, p. 180
Bndva is cited by Uvata on
RPr. II, 16. Bat in Naigeyasa-
kha Benfey has noted aindram in
SV. T. 129; 459. Cf. SV. Einl.
XXXII. In I. 377 aindram is
not a — indram, but means Indra
sambandhi.
In kveyaiha 1. 271; virayendave,
360, brahmendraya 390; pavama-
37
nfiyendavo II, 1, prendra 89, somo
ndraja 313, nendra 1051, preta
1216, preddho 371, paprStbosS I.
379 etc , metro requires hiatus, Cf,
Benfey, SV, Einl Tj Tor corres
ponding rules, cf. RPr. II. 16, 17,
VPr, IV. 53, 54, TPr X 4, 5,
CA, III. 44, 45, and Pnmm VI
1. 87.
In a few cases e is first changed
to ay by 111, y is omitted by 159,
and then a is joined with the
following t by 24. Such instances
are recorded by RPr II 70, where
mehanfistiRV.5 39 1 corresponds
to onr 'ma ihanasti' 1. 345. Cf Nir
IV 1. 4, where Scold in vain tries
to see a closer relationship bet
ween the SV and Nir Cf The Ni-
rukta p 14. This irregular sandhi
is frequently met with in Naige
yadaivatam which has dvitTyen
drah 1. 6 1 1. 7, trtlyendrah
16 1, 1. 3 See Benfey, SV
Einl XXXIII
95 For corresponding rules, cf. RPr
II. 18, 19, VPr IV. 57, TPr. X.
6,CA.III 50, 51, and Panini Vl.l.
88 In the commentary 'dvivar
nam varnamapadyate'istbe correct
reading 'asthopadham prakrtam'
seems better Though the contrac
tion is written, the original towels
must sometimes be restored. Cf.
praxtu I 56, naitasah II, 43, pra
tnasyaukaso II. 94, Butasyaujasah.
II. 1118. See Benfey, SV. Einl.
L, Macdonell, Vedic Gr p. 54.
96 Note the use of bhSs5y3m, This
implies that (like Panini) the rest
is applied to Bh5$5 and Veda
alike, which is wrong, because 76,
and 77 arenotapplicablo to BhSsS.
The sutra obviously is an addition,
mado probably at the time, when
our treatise underwent its final
redaction. For corresponding
rules.cf svSdlrennoh] aksaduhiny5-
mupasamkhyanam ]] tho two v2rti-
kas on PJmm VI. 1. 89. See also
VPr IV, 58, where the commen-
tator cites tarya uhi | turyauhi |
VS 18. 27.
97 For partial correspondence cf RPr,
II. 72 (which notos praisayuh=pra
+ isayuh. Macdonoll, Vedic Gr.
p 64) and 'praduhodhaudhyesai-
sjesu' a vSrtika on Panini VI.
1 89 with Bhattoji's note — "yastu
Isa ugche yagca Isa gatihimsadarsa
nesn tayordlrgbopadhatvat I?ah
isyah tatrfidguno pre?ah presyah."
This will make the difference bet-
ween our treatise and the vartika
quite clear
98 Tor similar rules, cf. RPr. II. 71
(Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p. 64), VPr,
IV 55 56, TPr. X.I4, and Panini
VI 1 94. VPr. IV, 56, 'ejatyojore
be?am' provides for sahojah etc
(but note the SVFp sahah | jah
on II, 1206) which is covered here
by 99 In our treatise the pheno-
menon is restricted to upasargas,
but m CA III 52, TPr X. 14 its
scope has been extended to words
like iSakalya and so on
99 Cf, Panini Vl.l 95 and 'otvosth
ayoh samase va' a vfirtika on P.
Vl.l 94. Our treatise goes further
38
and declares pararupa to the com-
pounds in general,
101 For corresponding rules, cf. OA.
III, 46 (and 47 which is an exce-
ption to 48); TPr. X. 8; Panini VI.
1. 87; l.-l. 51. All prescribe the
sandhi in a like manner. RPr. II.
32 and VPr. IV. 49, however treat
it very differently, merely pres-
cribing that both a and a become
a before r, -without requiring the
conversion of the latter into a
fact stated by our treatise in 102
and by Panini in VI. 1. 128.
102 101 covers KPr. II. 32 and VPr,
49, but implies rabhava (guna) as
■well, while 102 nagatives the same
in the opinion of some i. e. the
authors of RPr, and VPr. and
others, who follow them in that mat-
ter. Thus it seems to provide for
yatha rnam RV. 8.47. 17; yatha
rtavah 10. 11. 5; yatha rtus'o 10.
98. 10; 2. 24. 13; 2. 28. 5 and so
on, and also makes provision for
mahna rte SV. II. 1137, if we con-
strue eke as pujartham. The comm-
entator on £&S. XII. 13. 5 makes
an interesting statement, which may
throw some light on the difference
between the Rgvedasakhas. On 'na
rte grantasya sakhyaya devah.' R V.4,
33. 11, he says 'apadruto nama san-
dhir baskalanara prasiddhah tasyo-
daharariam'. Are we to understand
from it, that the followers of other
s"akhas did not admit this sandhi 1
For a list of the examples like
those quoted above, cf. Benfey. SV.
Einl. XXXII. RPr. II 64 is an
exception to II. 32. For the corre-
sponding rule in Panini cf. VI. I.
128
103 VPr. IV. 59 provides for aprktas
only. No corresponding rule is found
in RPr; OA; TPr. and Panini. But
see f rte ca trtfyasamase' a vartika,
on which Bhattoji cites sukhena
rta!h=sukhartali SK. Acsandhi.
104 Exception to 101.
105 For corresponding rules of other
treatises see CA. III. 48; TPr. X.
9; Panini VI. 1,91 (va supyapisaleh
92) and VPr. IV. 59 which how-
ever restricts the operation of the
rule to the preposition a. alone.
The TS. extends this contraction
to prepositions ending in a, uparc-
chati; see Whitney, OA. III. 47;
TPr. III. 9. In the post vedic lang-
uage this contraction was extended
to all prepositions ending in a. Cf.
Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p. 64, n. 2.
106 Cp."pravatsatarakambalavasanarnad-
as'anamrne" avartika on Panini VI.
I. 89.
Note its bearing on the date of
the composition of our treatise.
107 Cf. Panini VI. 1. 77.
108 An exception to 107. Cf. Panini
VI. 1. 127. The declaration of lira-
sva implies pragrhya sanjfia. Cf.
patafijali on P. VI. 1. 127.
109 For corresponding rules, cf. RPr.
II. 21; VPr. IV. 46; CA. III. 39,
and Panini VI. 1.77, The TPr. X.
15, however restricts the conver-
sion into a semivowel to i, i and
u— a restriction, which might have
been made by all, since final. u is
39
always pragrhya add final r no-
where in the Vedas comes to stand
before an initial vowel Cf "Whit
ney, CA III 39, Mocdonell, Vedic
Gr p 65 n i Tho fact seems to
have b(-en noted by the authors
of our treatise who separately for
mod su tra 107, which is obviously
meant for usiges jtoen in Bhas,a
alone Were it not so, tho ordor
of the sutras would have been —
asventastham 1 07, ruioko 108,
and there would ha\o accrued a
clear saving of one sutra We
may also note here the close rosem
bianco between our treatise and
^abd&nu^asinn of the Jaina Saaka
tayana, who lived in the time of
Amoghavarsa I, and v, rote his work
about £aka 789 The sutras aro
as follows —
RT 6A Panim
<UW*W$ I 73 wft
6 1 77
^^TT^ 74 $$rS3W
75 ^f«T 127
128
It is clear from the above, that the
author of ^ibdanuSasana was well
famihai with the terminology of
our treatise, and that while adopt
mg some terms from RI or from
some other ancient common soui ce t 1
he m the matter of systetnatisation
closely followed Paninl
In the commentary RPr II 32
is covered by asve (107) hrasvn-
meke n to cover Panini VI 1 128,
which provides optional prartyhga
tva for abodhi agnih etc In tho
comm road 'svarayontvadhikarah \
vyabhicara lti cod vikarah sasth&na
ltyuktam,' sasth&nah of RPr II
31 is oo\orod by 92 of our treatise
Tho word antastha designates
yan of Fanini and its use in jfami
nine gender (cf antastham svam
RPr II 21) may be significant
Does it not hint at tho important
fact that Indian Grammarians, re
garcfed semivowels not as essential
ly different from t, u etc but
merely a by-form of the same (an
tastha vrtti), a form with which
they had very often an mtorchan
gB (as in tho samprasaranaform of
the vowel gradation) t And the
fact that m reality there was no
interchange between tho so called
strong and weak forms and that
both of them sxistod side by
side even in Indo European times,
Beems to have boon hinted at by
Yaska, who, while discussing the
ways of deriving words incidental
ly remarks "tadyatra svarfidanan
tarantasthantardhatu bhavati tad
dvipralxCinam sthanainiti pradis*a
nti'Nir II 1 2 Can we not infer
from 'dviprakpttnam that both
lyaji, and i§ta t and vasati and us*
masi are trigmal forms 1
10 (a) Ihe corresponding rule in
Panmi seems 'tayoryvavaci sam
hitayim VIII 2 108, whichcoun
teracts VI 1 101 in agna 3 ym
dram, and VI I 127 in agn& 3
yafa, a fact corroborated bj Kfi&ka
which runs —
40
kintu yana bhavatlha na siddham,
yvavidutoryadayam vidadhifci |
taucarnama svarasandhisu siddhau,
sakaladirghavidhi tu nivartyau |)
ik ca yada bhavati plutapurvah,
tasyayanam vidadhatyapavadyam |
tena tayosca na sakaladfrgho,
• yansvarabadhanameva tuhetuh||
Like, hau | atra; hau J agja, we
have to assume some vowel in 'sya-
gnai' and 'in ai', as is clear from
'svarayorityad hikarah'.
(b) gatih: i. e. adding i or u
after a, or i after o. About the defi-
nition of gati see Simon, PpS. 520;
for ai and ayisee Simon, PpS. Einl.
p. 527, note 2, (the ai-bhava is
dealt with in PpS, III. 1—4, 242).
In between the a and a vowel, ay,
or a like sound is inserted in the
ganas of SV. Cf. Weber, Ind. Stud.
IV. 252; Oldenberg. RV. I, 457
ff; Bloomfield on KS. 74, 19. 135.
9. The y before i, I and e is phoneti-
cal; such a phenomenon is recorded
in Pali, where y and v are inserted
before* and e. For details, cf. Wack-
ernagel, Altind. Gr. I. p. 338 note.
Ill Cf. CA. III. 40; VPr. IV. 47;TPr.
IX. 11, 15, and Panini VI. 1. 78.
RPr. II. 25, 28, 31 however con-
vert ai and au directly into a, and
e and o directly into a, adding that
after the a and a which come from
o and aw a v is inserted, except
before a labial vowel. See Macdo-
nell, Vedic Gr. p, 67; Wackernagel,
Altind. Gr. I. p. 326 (274). In the
examples cited by the commen-
tator, the reading of B. is preferable.
y is dropped by 159 according to
Naigi, while according to other
teachers it may remain. Benfey's
SV. supports the reading of B.
Our treatise converts a n to visar-
janlya, when it is preceded by
any long vowel, be it a, I, u or r.
The visarjaniya when preceded
by a, becomes y by 117, only to be
dropped by 158; but when prece-
ded by other long vowels, it is redu-
ced tor by 115, and an anusvara, a
consonantal element, is inserted by
185 between the vowel and the r.
The process here is then as follows:-
paridhin ati = paridhih + ati(l 12)-
paridhir + ati (115 ) = paridhP*-
rati (158). This process exactly
agrees with that of the CA. accor-
ding to which the process in upaba-
ddha^ iha would be like this; upa-
baddhan + iha: = upabaddhah + iha
(CA. II. 27)=upabaddhah + iha
(nasalisation of the preceding vowel
by 1. 67)=upabaddhay + iha (II.
41) = upabaddha* iha (11.21).
This is an example of aw preceded
by a long a. But in examples like
rtii^rutsrjate where n is preceded
by a vowel other than a, the CA.
makes some difference. Instead of
following the reasonable process of
changing n into visarjaniya and
leaving ft for rule II. 42 to cha-
nge the latter into r, it directly
converts the n into r by II. 29.
The RPr. IV.69, 70, 71 also change
n into r and then prescribe nasali-
sation of the preceding vowel by
IV. 80. Whitney's remark about
45
sadyaA krona, sadja&kromain LfiS,
Till, 3. 1, 3) kamsk&n, earpisku
ndikn, dhanu^kapMamfcf. Bhattojt
SK. on P. VIII. 3 45) yajuspatram,
ayask&ntah, tainaskandali, nyas-
kandaTi, modaspindaA, bh5skaraA,
(P. III. 2. 21) ahaskarali.
kautaskutSdi —
kantaskutah, kaskah, putr&dmy-
fisputrali, 6iraspadam, adhaspadam
(P. VIII 3 47) ayaspatram (VIII
3 46 49) payaskamah (VIII
3. 46), ayaspmdaA (tnedaspindah
m kaskadi), pitnsputrah (tho word
does not occur in RV. SV. and
AV. cf RFr.59, 61 Bha^toji has
pituh putrah on VI, 2. 133, and
hotuh putrali in kaskadi) 6unaspu-
trali, Sunaspatift (in tho interior
of a p'ida, co\ered by 147, PAnini
covers this by VIII. 3 53) fiunas
karnah, common to both.
The above comparison will show
that the ganas of oor treatiso grea
tly differed from those of Panini,
n fact confirmed by the commenta
tor on 66, where ho reads 's*i%avai-
gravanau (vai^vanarau) skanda vi3a
khau, naradaparvatau, ujanabrhas
pati lti ganasam&sah." Campara this
with the "dadhipaya adi gana (II.
4 14) of P&nim which runs 'dad
hipayasi, filvavaiSravanau, skanda
vigakhaa, panvrajakakaugikau, and
so on
Note the influence of Panini
on the commentator. Ho also puts
kasha at the head of the gana
129 sadyaskala is covered by Panini
VIII 3. 48
130 Road m the comm. .nyovamprama
nam instoad of • nyokampra., Tho
citations show that this sutra cor-
responds to Pftmm VIII 3 45, if so,
then the uso of eamarthye is quito
tho ro* erso of that in Panini VIII.
3. 44, which correspondstoourlSl,
131 Punctuate mithnnakhyo va bhav-
ati | paro?m5 . bhiivaA J ... . api hi
tani» | punayogo etc. is not clear.
Tho word « occurs in 187 only,
and that sutra has nothing to do
mi th this phenomenon.
132 Cf. Panini VIII 3 44,with Tattva-
bodhini on SK. of Bhattoji,
133 Cf. VPr III. 23, TPr VIII. 24,
CA. II. 63 and Panini VIII. 3. 41.
134 TPr VIII. 24, CA. II. G3 and
Pilnmi VIII. 3 41.
130 No corresponding rule is found m
tho PratlSnkhyns, but cf. Papim
VIII 3 41 In the comm read
'kasmadasukho 1 du§khamidam
gakatam ' (kham -chidram) See
Jacobi KZ. 25 439 f, Kielhorn,
Ind Ant 16. 345, Epigr. Ind.
1 137. 2, 180, Wackernagel, Al-
tind Or I p 341 note.
136 In the comm, read taidhateydh
( - vidha\ayfl apatyam)
137 39 Pamni VIII 3 43, Tor par
tial correspondence cf. CA. II. 64.
140 Panini VIII 3 41.
141 RPr. IV. 47, VPr. Ill 23, TPr.
VIII 24, CA II 63 and Panini
VIII 3 41 Tor 'tiraskrtam' see
IPr VIII 30, and Pnmm VJIT
3 40
142 Pamni VIII. 3. 40. In the comm
read 'puraskrtamniam I mrjati
46
tarn j Cf. 'Madrah karam vina-
yante - niryatayanti'. Bohtlink on
• Panini 1, 3. 36. gvabhirurya o is
doubtful. I would prefer 'svabbi-
rbhuyatarupah (-hhumau yatam
rupam sariram yesam).
143 RPr. IT. 43; VPr. III. 62; OA.
II. 65 and Panini VIII. 3. 50.
144 This is to deny s in examples liko
sadhab ky • SV. I. 217.
146 RPr.IV. 44, 45,56;VPr. III. 26, 31;
TPr. VIII. 2$ OA. II. 66, 67 and
Fanini VIII. 3. 51, 53. I do not
know why the commentator has
included 'pituspari' [RPr. IV. 64]
among the counterexamples, where
( divah pari' II. 534 may safely be
placed. For tbe practice of writ-
ing visargas before s and s cf.
Benfey, SV. Einl. XL VI.
147 Cf. RPr. IV. 42, 46, 48, 49, 53;
VPr. III. 28, 35, 36; TPr. VIII.
27, CA. II. 70-74 and Panini
VIII. 3. 53. somaspati II. 224 is
correct, according to our treatise,
but cf. somah patih RV. 9. 101.
6 (so noted by RPr. IV. 51).
vigvatah prthuh I. 393 -IT. 595
is correct according to RT. [cf.
divah prthuh as a counterexample
on TPr. VIII. 28; Panini VIII.
3 51 Bohtlink] but cf. visvatas
prthuA RV. 8. 98. 4 specially
noted by RPr. 53, 57; VPr. III.
27; CA. II. 78, and Panini VIII.
3. 49; and such are divas prthivya/i
9. 31. 2 and vilitasprthu/i 2. 21. 4,
not found in SV. and similar is
divasprsthe on Panini VIII. 3.
53. pituspita, is correct in SV.
IT. 745 and RV. 6. 16. 35 [RPr.
IV. 64] but how pitu/i pita, in AV.
18. 2. 49; 3. 46. 59 [cf. Whitney
on CA. IT. 73] and manu/i pita I.
355 [where RV. has s and which
is so noted by RPr. IV. 64] svah
patih IT. 882; and svah pati II.
351 -RV. svarpati in 9. 19. 2. In
RV. we find yaspati/i in 5 51, 12
but ya/i pati/i in 10. 85. 39; pu-
rvyas pati A in 10. 48, 1 but pur-
. vyah patih in 1. 153. 4 which are
noted by RPr. IV. 51.
148 This is to avoid s in cases like
bandhuh pavalcah.
149 Cf. RPr. IV. 55; TPr. VIII. 29:
VPr. III. 25: CA. II. 80 and Panini
VIII. 3. 53.
151 Before mutes immediately follo-
wed by s or s finel s regularly
becomes visarjaniya. In RV. occa-
sionally the sibilant disappears, Cf.
Macdonell. Vedic Gr. p. 71.
For corresponding rules cf,
RPr. IV. 31. TPr. IX. 3, and
Pamni VIII. 3. 35. See also Bha-
ttoji on P. VIII. 3. 37. Cf. priya/i
ksapafr II. 1176.
152 Cf. CA. II. 25. Pacini VIII. 3. 6.
According to Whitney CA. II. 25
is an interpolation, but mark the
order of this and the following
sutra in CA. and our treatise.
153 Cf. CA.II.27. Virtually a sibilant
is inserted before the mute of the
same class with the latter, and the
n itself is replaced by the nasalisati-
on of the preceding vowel (see 185.)
Cf. OA. III. 133-36. The TPr. V.
20 gives a general rule for the
47
insertion of llio sibiiant boforo
c and V 21 gnosalltho cases In
which it doos not tako plnco Iho
isortion boforo f is notod in V
1 i and all (ho casos of its occuron
co nro conn tod 3ho UPr IV 74
registers nil (hoso words before
which llio sibilant is added, ns
MoIIns boforo ens boforo /, IV
7G Eoo Panini "V IIJ 3 7 In
tho BY. this in<-ortion occurs
onlj when tho sibilant is olymoloji
cally justified that is fn tho nom
sig and ncc \ 1 masc almost
oxclusnol) though not invariably
boforo ca (cf 154) and cid Tho
origin of tho insortion of a ubi
lant is historical Termor]} tho
insertion of a sibilant beforo c and
( was mado after a word which
was ontitlod b} origin to a final s
Cf MacdonolI.Vod Gr j G9,WacI
ornagol, Altind Gr I p 333 and
tho noto on p 332, Lantuan DIG
A noto But in courso of time tho
truo character of tho incortad » w as
forgotton and its aphero oi occuro
nee being considerably oxtondod,
it cirao to be apphod to casos, to
which it did not historically bolong
Thus jn tho other Samhitfig tho
inserted sibilant becomes commo
nor, occuring oion where it is not
etymological Iy justified, that 19 in
the 3 pi impf, and tho voc and
loc of n stems There are no exa
mples of the inserted sibilant
before eh in tho Samhitfis Jn tho
post Vodic languago a sibilant is
imariably inserted after n boforo
all \ oicoless palatals, carobrals and
dentals Cf W hltnoy on CA II
27, Bopp Coroparatho Gr. 1 468,
478 479 'bliatams.tika'ofthocom
montary maj bo corroctod to 'bha
\3ms$lkato' Cf tho commontary on
CA IT 27.
Liko CA II 27 tho procopt of
rur troatiso also looks moro Hko
a rulo of gonorol grammor rather
than that of a particular grammor
or a PrRtifAl h)a This fact should
bo notod over} now and then in
oar trealiso, and this actually oxp-
lains tho nvno Rktantra \yfikar
nam of this pratiiakhya
154 Rc-tho yon\ of tho eaman, and
not tho Rgiodn Hainan torm J o
sotu;ain&and £ukri}asamapana otc
aro excluded Aftor tfukriya* wo
expect sonio countoroxamplo
155 Cf Tfinini VIII 3 12 Examples
quotod bj tho commontator do not
occuro in SV No corresponding
rulo is found in otherPrfitis'akliyfls
156* budos.asasja is a misprint Koacf
lubodosasasja Cf UPr II. SO,
VPr III 10-17 lPr V ID, CA
II 57, andPflmm VI 1 132, 133
Pilmni roducosRI 156nud 157 into
one sutra 'otattadoh suh po 1 oranaf
snmfiso hah VI 1 138 and is
thus » decided imj ro\omont on our
troatiso
157 Cf ItPr V 16 Pimim (akorana u
snmfise) VI I 132 No correspo
nding rule is fcund m other Pn"i
ti&ilihyas
158 Road 'mahui. hi snh in tho common
tarj Cf CA II 55 VPr IV 38,
48
TPr. IX. 9. CA. VPr. and TPr.
do not change a visarjaniya into
y before consonants. They all drop
it straight. Our treatise on the
other hand, changes a visarjaniya,
preceded by a, a (cf. 117), alike
before vowels and consonants. The
RPr. IV. 2i declares that the vis-
arjaniya, along with its preceding
vowel, passes into a, which is an-
other way of saying the same thing.
159-160 The sutra requires 'ha atra' in
the comm. Cf. CA. II. 21; VPr.
IV. 125. TPr. X. 19-23 cite many
discordant opinions on the subject.
According to it y and v are dropp-
ed, when preceded by a and a:
Ukhya maintains contrary: San-
kritya denies the loss of v: Maca-
kiya allowing the loss of both, when
followed by u or o: Vatsapara holds
that they are not lost altogether,
but only imperfectly pronounced
(cf. 161). The treatment of final
diphthongs in the RPr. does not
include the exhibition of a final
semivowel which is repuired to be
lost, and hence there is no such a
precept in RPr. See Panini VIII,
3. 19.
161 Cf. CA. (II. 24) legavrttiradhisp-
arsam ^akatayanah, where the word
les'a means diminution, the word
occuring in the same meaning in
TPr. X. 19-23 which declares
that Vatsapra holds not the omis-
sion but the les'a of final y and v
after a and a and the commentary
thoro explains les'a by lupta vaduc-
caranam-an utterance of thorn as if
they were omitted. In the RPr.
les'a is once found in the chapter
treating of faulty pronunciation
(XIV. 17), where les'a is glossed by
Uvata with 'prayatnasaithilyena.'
PamniVIII. 3 18 attributes to
^akatayana the same doctrine as
regards the pronunciation of final
y and v. P, vyorlaghuprayatnataraA
^akatayanasya is glosaed by Bha-
ttoji with 'yasyoccarawe jihvagro-
pagra madhyamulanam saithilyam
jayate, Sakatayana then is to be
understood as holding, like Vat-
sapra that the final semivowels are
not to be omitted altogether, but
uttered with a slighter effort; the
partial contact (isatsprstamantas-
thanain) which is the characteristic
of them not being completely
made. The followers of Panini
restrict Sakatayana's doctrine to
y and v when preceded by bho
bhago agho and a (cf. Tattva-
bodhini on SK.), but the VPr.
IV. 127 refers to him as exemp-
ting only the word asau from the
treatment prescribed for y and v
in every other case, which treat-
ment however it does not declare
to be attenuation but omission.
The statement 'ardham va' does
not attribute the phenomenon to
a particular grammarian but as a
view of the authors of this treatise.
Does it not indicate that the trea-
tise is composed by the followers
of Sakatayana, who adopted this
view as their own, and, hence did
not think it necessary to attribute
4y
it to ^akataynna by name 1
162 See noteonl61 InSV II 144 St
reads ya rtavrdhavrtasya, -while
Benfey has yavrtavrdl)avrta3)a Cf li
mitravarunavrtavcdhavrtasprda K V
12 8, yavrtavrdhavrtasya RV 1
23 5 Cf Benfey, SV Eml XXIV
Bat we must be very cautious in fix
ing the text of the Vedas on the basis
of this kmd of comparison, because
a particular reading may belong
to a particular gakha and may not ^
be acceptable to others Tor exam
pie here the reading with v which
is correct according to 162, may
ha acceptable (m the SV ) to the
followers of Naigeya Sakha and
may not be liked by others,
who agree with 160, and Benfey s
SV is anything but the text of the
Naigoyas See also SV II 198,
where St reads J varuna rta which
Benfey emends to varunavrta.
on the ground of RV 1 2 8
163 v is not omitted before otu in the
opinion of Naigi (aprapta) as well
as others (160)
164 Cf 'avyaktanukarnasyata itiu Pa
mm VI 1 98
165 Cf 'namreditasyantyasya tu va' P
VI 1 99 patatpataditi or patatpa
teti from patatpata + iti Note that
the sphere of Panini V 4 57 with
the two vartikas (i e rlaci vivak
site dve bahulam, nityamamredi
te daciti vaktavyam) is different
from that of our sutra
166 See note on 128 Cf Pamni VI 3
109, where Bhattoji quotes —
bhavedvarnagarnaddhamsah,
simho varnaviparyayat |
gudhotma varnavikrter,
varnanasat prsodaram [|
Cf CA II 18 VPr IV 98 marks
the loss of s from the root, slambh,
but omits all mention of stha The
TPr V H includes such cases in
a more general rule, that s is drop
ped, when preceded by ud and
followed by a consonant See
Panini VIII 4 61
The commentator offers little help
in the exposition of the sutra, the
exact scope of which can only be
inferred from a critical comparison
with CA III 30, VPr, IV 110,
and TPr XIV 23, and in a way
from Panini VIII 4 50 Let us
take CA which prescribes doubl
ing by 'samyogadih svarat (III 24 =
269) and then by 'sasthane ca'
(30^168) negatives it m the case
of a consonant which is followed by
another of the same class Simi
1 irly TPr XIV 1 (svarapurvam
vya n janam dvivarnim vyagjna
paramr=269 ) prescribes doubling
of the first of conjunct consonants
and then stys 'savarnasavargiyipa
rah' (23 = 168), that a letter folio
wed by one homogeneous with
itself or one of the same mute ser
les, is not duplicated When read
in the light of the above quoted
rules of the two Pratisakhyas, our
sutra ' tulye (tulye sthme lupyate)
can be easily reduced t > this much,
that a letter is not doubled by
269, when followed by its savarna
which is another way of saying tho
50
same thing, Thus in 'vahanti' I.
25.31 n is not doubled; is antokay a
( = isam + to 180) n; in imasta s
(obtained by 269 -which is not
restricted to c hrasvatparah' 263, cf.
vedyamin the comm. of 169; VPr
IV. 102 prescribes the doubling
of t in such cases, while our trea-
tise does not); in indra n, (the omi-
ssion of y cannot be meant); and in
yavahuh sayuja (= huh + sa° 177)
In the counter example 'surupa
id goman'c?, occasioned by the dou-
bling (269) may be omitted, but
not the original d, which is here
not followed by its savarna letter.
We must note here that the sava-
rna in TPr. XIV. 23 applies only
to an identical letter, and to the
nasal semivowels into which n and
m are converted before y, I and
v by TPr. V. 26. 28=181. Thus
while TPr. denies doubling of v in
'devav vahanti', our treatise (169)
makes it optional. That the above
mentioned is the ken of this pre-
cept is hinted at by the comm. -who
says 'punah punah prasangas'ca'
(= again doubling by 269 and
again omission by 168).
169 In the sutra, rat=svarat: stha=an-
tastha; ajare - ajapare ( - re - pare,
as radi-paradi in 26). This sutra
is meant [1] to make 168 optional
before semivowels and [2] to dany
the same before letters that are
followed by ac. Cf. 'anaci ca' VIII. 4 #
47. According to this the c of accha
I. 523 should not be omitted [cf.
VPr. IV.:25]. But Benfey adopts
'acha' every where, which may indi-
cate the absurdity of blindly follo-
ingthemss., which were very often
copied and recopied by ignorant
scribes. That a careful editor of the
Samhitas aught to disregard as of
no authority or conseqence, the
variations or the unanimity of his
mss. upon such points, and to adopt
uniformly the reading prescribed
by the Pratisakhyas was suggested
by Whitney on TPr. V. 24.
Our sutra would then restrict the
ken of 168 to forms like indrah,
rastram, bhrastram, candrah, and
these are the very examples quo-
ted on Panini VIII. 4, 50 'trip-
rabhrtisu $akatayanasya' which
means that according to " ^akatay-
ana no duplication takes place in
a group of three or more letters.
And it is a pity that Burnell with-
out making a thorough study of
the text remarked in his introduc-
tion to RT. (p. XI) 'but of all his
distinct and peculiar opinions there
is no clear trace in the text".
170 For corresponding rules, cf. RPr.
IV, 29; CA. II. 19; VPr. IV. 35;
TPr. VIII. 16; Panini VII, 3. 14;
Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I p. 325;
Macdonell. Vedic Gr. p. 72. Steven-
son reads 'yukta, barhi ra°" cf. Ben-
fey on it. in SV. Einl. XXVI.
When r is dropped, the final vowel
is lengthened by RPr. IV. 29; VPr.
IV. 35; TPr. VIII. 17; CA. III.
20(which is a bit deficient, Whitney)
and Panini VI. 3. Ill; and
since our treatise does not give
such a rule, the commentator pre-
scribes a vartika 'rapurvayosca dir.
51
ghatvnra,' For other \ artika?, cf, tho
comm on 226, 236, 243, 245 otc
171 Tor similar rules, cf, RPr VI. 2,
TPr. XIX 5, VPr. IV. 108, CA.
I 04, and PJmm VIII 4 33, 55.
172 Cf. VPr. IV. 119, 0 \ II. 4, and
FammVIII 4 55 Final consonant
is assimilated in quality to tho
following initial, bocoming \oico
loss boforo ft \uiceloss consonant
and voiced before ft voicod sound,
as in m yallva RV. 1. 15 10.
Thore is a tondoiicy to writo "ksi
pajyfim' for 'ksipajjjfiin' (RV 4
27. 3) and 'tatva 3 ami' for 'tattvil
jami'insomo mss For its justi
flcition soo "Wackornagol, Altind
Gr. I. p. 327 and my noto on 271
InTS 1.2 7.1 'sarayatto-samyak
te' and hero a final guttural has
become a dental beforo a dontal
A similar example has boon notod
by mo in Saraatantrt, uhoro wo
have rccMotam for rkSlokara cf
noto on 179. Horo tho assimila
tion has extended its sway to tho
place of articulation as well Cf
"Wackernagel, Altind, Gr, I. p
328 (277 A)
173 Tho PrStiSakhyas are unanimous
on this point Cf ItPr IV. 3,
VPr, IV 121, TPr VIII 2 Pa-
mm VIII 4 45 allows eithor tho
unaspirated sonant or the nasal
before a nasal, while ms, usage 13
invariably in favour of tho nasal.
See Blacdonell, Vedio Gr p. 67,
Wackernagel, Altind. Gr I p
328 e. SV I 279 (Benfey) reads
'udag nyag to.', while tbo common
tator roquiros 'adan nyag v3 '
174 Cf RPr. IV. 32, 13, VPr. IV. 07,
CA II 17 and Pamm VIII. 4.
63 TPr V. 22, 24 prosenbo tho
chango of ( and n into c and 5 bo-
foro i and V, 34, 35 tho conver-
sion of £ into ch, whon pro-
codod by any muto oxcopting m,
Vslmlki (V. 36) also excepting
;> and Pauskarsadi(V,37)denying
tho changes, whon i is followod by
a consonant and don}ing m this
situation also tho chango of tho
procodmg n into ii. Tor dotails
soo Wlutnoy CA, II 17 Wgha
i tfi chagdhi ' according to "Wackor
nagol tho process of ouphonic al
tontion horo js a bit different
Ho thinks that in such oxamplos
an insertion of t (similar to that
boforo 5 187) takes place beforo 4,
that is '\ ijnn s'oatluhi' may hocome
•rajrin6naUiihi'or»fichna» (through
»jrmc5nao for »jrirtt snft«) Cf
Wacko rn ago], Altind Gr. I. p.
332 and tho rulo 280 a on 331 ,
Macdonell, Vodic Gr p 69.
175 Cf. Pamm VIII. 4 G3 andihe
vSrtika 'chaUamamiti vaoyam'
on it Read 'na naigih | s"cota
yati, s*nathi, tflokam, s*nas*ati, £ma-
gruni Hi pratyayuh j Tor gnathihi
cf, "Wackernagel, Altind Gr. I p
3U On VPr IV 96 is cited 'adi
tyaE bmafrnbluV Soe aho Yv& 1 23
For s"Iokara, cf. 'rcchlokam' on 179,
which in the opinion of some will
bo 'fkslokam ' Examples for other
words are not traced in SV and
RV. (For such a case in RPr cf.
52
TJvata 'vada, mrgyarnudaharanam'
" on VII. 33). For '^cyotati' Bhattoji
cites 'vakscyotati' on the vartika
quoted above.
176 RPr. IV. 5; VPr. IV. 122; OA. II.
7 agree with our treatise on this
point. The same doctrine is attri-
buted by the TPr. V. 38 to Plaksi
etc. TPr. V. 39-41 declare that in
view of some, the h remains un-
changed, -while the Mimamsakas
and others hold that an aspirated
sonant is inserted between the
final surd and the h. Panini VIII.
4. 62 allows the h either to remain
unchanged or to become the sonant
aspirate. See Macdonell, Vedic
Gr. p. 73.
177 The meaning is that iisma i. e.
visarjanlya is converted into the
spirant corresponding in position
with the following letters. Thus
before c and ch it becomes i, be-
fore t and th s, before t and th s,
before i, s, s it is changed into each
of these respectively; before h and
kh it becomes jihvamuliya and
before p ph it is converted into
upadhmanlya, Visar janiya itself then
does stand in Samhitas before a
pause. CA. II 40 agrees with it;
the VPr. III. 9. 12 gives as tau-
ght by Sakatayana the doctrine of
RT.-naruely that visarjaniya beco-
mes a sibilant before a sibilant
and jihvamuliya and upadhma-
nlya before gutturals and labials,
(while according to III. 10 ^akalya
leaves visarjaniya unchaged before
a sibilant) and itself maintains III. 11
the visar janTa before gutturals and
labials; VPr. Ill, 7 prescribes its
conversion into s before c and c/i,
III. 8 dealares the change into s
before t and th and III. 13 rejects
the visarjaniya altogether before
a sibilant followed by a surd mute.
TPr. IX. 2, 3 agree with our trea-
tise. Like RT. (151) TPr. also de-
clares that visarjaniya remains un-
changed before ks. It then rehea-
rses the different opinions - of
other teachers in IX 4, 5 and IX.
I. The RPr. treats at considerable
length the changes which RT.
compresses into a single rule.
RPr. IV. 31 completely agrees
with our treatise, excepting the case
of a sibilant followed by surd mute,
before which the visarjaniya is to
be dropped by IV. 36; IV. 33.34
permit the retention of a spirant
before gutturals, labials, and unal-
tered sibilants. Thus we see autho
rities vary on the treatment of vis-
arjanij'a before surd /'letters, the
point on which they all agree being
its conversion into s and s before
dentals and palatals. See also
Panini VIII. 3. 35 which declares
that visarjaniya remains unaltered
before surd mutes, if they are fol-
lowed by s s and s, and VIIT, 3.
36 which allows- a visarjaniya
either to remain unchanged before
is. s or to be changed to the corre-
sponding sibilant. See also the
vartika 'kharpare sari va visargalopo
vaktavyali' which prescribes omi-
ssion, retention and its alteration
into sibilant. According to Whit-
S3
ney the assimilation to a following
sibilant was a more primitive mode
of pronunciation than the reten
tion of it, which has become pre
valent in the later language, a
fact fully borne out by old mss
Cf Whitney on OA II 40 In the
commentary read jihvamulfya
before k m divan (x) kakutpatih
and upadhmanTya before p m
patih (X) prthivyah
For the treatment of final s be
fore dental t and cerebral t, cf
Macdonell, Vedic Gr p 70, 71,
Wackemogel, Altmd Gr I p 339
In the commentary 'dus\ apnyam*
may be read 'dussvapnyatn ' Tor the
tendency of spelling rayi sySt
( = rayih + syat) suci sma (-gucih
+ sma), gobhi syama (-gobhih +
syama) cf Benfey, SV Eml XLT
178 For corresponding rules cf RPr
IV 9-11, VPr IV 95,96 TPr V
22-24, OA II 10,11 andPamni
VIII 4 40 There seems hardly
any agreement among the Vedic
mss in the treatment of Final n
before consonants m general and
before c, ch and ( in particular,
and there is "hardly any passage
m which all the codices agree
either to make or to neglect the
assimilation Whitney We shall
concern ourselves here mainly
with the SV where n has been
virtually superseded by anusvara -
(1) h before c is represented by
anusvara in as mam ci» II 770,
vajrim ci» 1 408, RV has a
variant, vajrim citra* II 213,
yamam citrao I 135 For such
examples in the RV mss cf Ben
fey, SV Eml XXXVII.
(2) n before ch sam chukra
I 83, maghavam chagdhi I
274, "Vindam chis*n» II 258, si
dam chyono II 167, asmam cha
tru» II 1219, rnrukvam chatra.
II 1227 For such cases in the RV
cf Benfey, SV Einl
(3) n before j vidharmam jana»
I 385, bhrajam jyoti. II 377,
maghavam jyofe II 1154, gacham
jaro II 724, arnavan) jagamyah I
340 For RV cf Benfey.
(4) n before t ajigl$am tam I
372, maghavam tubhyam II 219,
samam tapa II 779, avSm tmana
II 435, satrura tadhi II 1227,
dasyum tanubhih II 337 For RV
cf Benfey In Pamni V 4 118
Bhattoji has 'ajnao' while Maha
bhasya has 'anna.' also Cf Bbhthnk
on it
n is required *to be assimilated
with thefollowing cavarga by RPr ,
VPr TPr , RT and Pamni It is
assimilated to the following.; occor
ding to OA (II 11) as well But
even before j we find anusvara
Why 1
Thero has been a great similan
ty between m and n m the matter
of sandhi Barring a few stray
situations {like samrat) m, when
followed by a consonant was not
allowed its distinct independent
existence It was assimilated with
the following mute (and antastka)
by RPr IV 6, TPr, V 27, VPr
IV. 12; OA. II. 31; ET. 180; and
Panini VIII. 4. 58. It was turned
into dot before r and spirants by
RPr. IV. 15; TPr. V. 29; VPr.
IV. 1; OA. II. 32 and Panini
VIII. 3. 23. But there arose a
tendency, probably for conveni-
ence sake, to show m by the dot
even before mutes and semivowels
noted by our treatise in 182, and
by Panini in VIII. 4. 58 and 59.
This tendency slowly gained grou-
nd till it completely superseded
the phenomenon of parasavarna.
Exactly the same thing occured
with regard to n. VPr. IV 2 turns
n into anusvara in the interior of
a pada, and a similar phenomenon
is recorded by Panini in VIII. 4,
24, in which CA. goes further and
makes the use of anusvara a uni-
versal usage. Cf.WhitneyonII.ll;
see also 34. Preceded by a long
vowel and followed by a vowel or
v, and h, the n was unanimously
turned into either anusvara or
anunasika (cf. note on 112); follow-
ed by c, c7i or f it gave rise to s
(153) which in turn changed it to
either anusvara or anunasika.
Thus in sandhi the letter n was,
in a vast number of cases, repre-
sented by the dot, and no wonder
if this dot, helped by the process
of simplification, superseded n even
before those letters, where its use
was correct, and prescribed by the
grammatical treatises.
Thus before d we find n repi'e-
sented by anusvara in vrsaro dya-
va I, 93; devaw deva 1. 100; hari-
vawi dadhe I. 223; agmara devasya
I. 435; vidharmawj devebhyah I.
521; nyasmiw dadhra II. 77; kra-
nidam deva II, 110; mahawi devo
II. 284; krnvaw diva II. 309;
kramdato devo II. 310; Sedha7«
durita II. 666; madhumam drap-
sah II. 719; dharmam divo II.
802; stabhaya7rc divo II. 896; ma-
ham deva II. 1110; asrgram deva,
II. 1166. Before dh we find a
variation in SV k I. 344; before p,
n is changed to by (Panini VIII.
3. 10, 37; for which there is no
rule in our treatise) or Cf.
nr*-: pahi RV. 8. 84. 3=nr^
pahi SV. II. 594, but nrn pahi in
RV, I. 174. 1. For n before I,
and s see Benfey, SV. Einl.
XXXIX,
The process of simplification had
gone to such an extreme by the ,
time when the Samaveda mss. (on
which Benfey based his edition of
SV.) were written that, of assimi-
lation, we do not find in them,
even a single example, and this
was probably the reason why our
commentator imported 'pasyagjan-
mani' from RV. 1, 50. 7 and it is
no wonder if the scribes have not
followed the practice of assimilating
the n to the following cavarga even
under that rule which prescribes
its observance.
In the commentary adopt bha-
van pare instead of pare. For the _
euphonic combinations of final f,
cf. Macdonell, Vedic G-r. p. 68, 69}
55
Witckornsgel, Altind. Gr. I. p.
328.
179 Thoro is no difloronco among tho
difforont authorities with regard
to tho combination of t with oithor
£ or /, though thoro nro difForoncos
in tho modo of statomont of tho rule*.
SeoRPr.IV 9, 1 0, VPr. I V 13,96,
CA. II 13, TPr. V. 22, 25, and
Pfinini VIII. 4. CO, 63. 'rkSIokaV
is doubtful Bat cf 'vfikchoto' on
P. VIII. 4 63 Inthocommontary
of SiimaUntra onco occurs r«fl/o-
Lim' (porhapj duo to tho change
of tho space of articulation, as f is
found in tamyatte for tamyak te,
Cf. Wackernagol, Altind. Gr. I.
p. 328) Tor tho treatment of final
n boforo I, cf, Macdonel!, Vodic
Gr p 69.
180 Tor corresponding rules, soo RPr
IV. 6,TPr. V.27,VPr.IV.12,CA
II, 31,andPaniniVIII, 4 S8.Tho
mss. and pnntod texts usually repre-
sent this eandhi by tho anusvfira
eign.Tho actual change of m ton bo-
foro dontals led to some orrors in
tho pada text of RV. Cf. TVacker-
nagel, Altind. Gr. I. p 332, Moc-
donell, Vedic Gr. p. 68. -tvfinka-
?tha St has tva ka§thS. 'tnstuih-
makare' preferable, here m is not
turned into anusvSra
181 2 CA. II 32 omits m before an
tasthR and u?man, but this omis
sion carries with it the nasalisation
of the preceding vowels, CA II
35 however declares a nasal I be
fore I, tho RPr IV ID changos m
into anusvfira before the Bpirants
(seo 183) and r, but makos it bo
foro y, /and r, a sotnhowol nasalt
ted (soo IV. 7). VPr. IV. 1, 4, 10
agroo with tho nho\o, but IV. 5
declares that Kfisyapa and ^akatfi-
jana hold that m is dropped Tho
IPc XIII. 2 prosenbos tho omis
aion of m boforo thoviraiifjand r,
but convorts it (V. 28) into tho
nasalised sonihowol boforo al] other
semivowels. Cf Popini VIII. 4.
59 Forms liko yamyamana and
ajKmUJcta show that final m origi-
nally romainod unchangod in san
dhi boforo y and / ( Wacko rnagol,
Altind Gr I. p 334) and forms
like jayatirdn point to its having
at ono timo bocomo » before v in
aandhi, Macdonoll, Vodic Gr. p.
68. Read 'krwm yyathft' and so
on in tho commontary. It is to
bo notod that whilo VPr. IV. 5
doclaros that according to 6aka
tajnna tho m fs dropped, our trea-
ti'o changes it to soumowol.
183 Cf. VPr. IV. l,TPr. V. 29, RPr IV.
15 and Pimm VIII. 3. 23. Before
r 6 f s and A final m becomos ami
stdra Prom its original uso before
sibilants and A anustSra came to
bo employed before the semivowels
also This is shown by 182. In the
post Vodio languago anusvfira
came to be before mutes and nasals
also. The compound 'eamraf shows
that »i originally remained uncha
ngod in sandht before r. Seo
Wackernagel, Altind Gr I p 334,
Macdonoll, Vodic Gr p. 68, and
my noto on 178
56
m Cf. Vhmxii Till, 3. 26, 27.
185 114 is meant for those case?, whoro
the visarjanlya has boon reduced
to i/ only lo bo omittod by 158.
T3jo present precopt covers thoso
cases, whoro Iho visarjanlya is
reduced to r. According to our
treatiso then, the ranga is a nasalis-
ation of the preceding vowols,
whilo anusvara is a consonantal
clement, which is inserted botwoon
u and r in 'rturanu' and the Jiko.
This distinction is also admittod
by Panini VIII. 3. 4. Tho TPr.
XV, 1 proscribes tho nasalisation
of tho preceding vowel in caso of
tho conversion of n into r, a spi-
rant or y, aho when tho y is omi-
tted, or in caso of tho omission of
w; while TPr. XT. 2 adds that
j-omo deny this and XV. 3 dir-
ects that an nnusvAra is insertod
in between. It should bo noted
tliat tho TPr. is not perfectly deci-
sive upon the question, whether
tho s'/callcd jtnusvara consists in a
nasalisation of tho preceding vowel
or in n nasal consonantal clement
following tho vowel. Hoe Whitney
<>n TPr. II. 30. Por corresponding
rules too HPr. IV. 80; VPr. III.
KU, IV. 4, ami CA. 1. 07.
CA. 1 1. {H VPr. I V. 15, and TPr. V.
?>rt- virtually in agreement w ith
* ;sr Jr< -.'.r:;fnt n% regard? the imo-
r';i.:.«. vhile ]l?r, TV. 10 merely
r:.'*:/..''.?.* tSi'ni as ^nif/in^d bv
L\ l-\ 71 ■» iw-r-xiu.li <>f thf^Q t' 4 fi-
afvr ?!.<.• r. -.-••.!« ;<• a j ttrrly
physical phenomenon and is quite
natural. Cf. Whitney, CA. II. 8. 9.
187 In tho commentary 'sayl' may be
road 'sayo.' Cf. Bohtlink on P.
Till. 3. 30. Boforo tho dontal
sibilant final n remains and a tran-
sitional / is insortod c g. 'niahfmt
samudrah' I. 429. In such cases
the / is organic. Prom such survi-
vals it spread to cases whore it
was not justifiod. Cp. Wackornagol,
A Hind. Gr. J. p. 332; MacdonoH,
Todic Gr. p. G9. Tho mss. how-
over do not uniformly follow this
rulo. Cf. Bonfoy, ST. Einl. XXX-
Till; Burnoll, Shpbr. p. XIII. In
English a final t is vory ofton
added aftorn as in pleasant tyrant,
jicamnt. Horo tho t is addod
on the analogy of tho alternation
ofton found in OE. botwoon a
singular in — nt and a plural in
— 72 s. Just as tho singular mer-
chant corresponded to a plural in
— ns, so also a singular 7>?ascmf
was formed to tho plural in — itfi.
Por dotails soo O. Josporson, A
Modern English Gr. I. p. 220.
Por corresponding rules, soo KPr.
IT. 17; TPr. V. 33; CA. II. 8, and
PAnini Till. 3. 30. ST. II 767 yal-
£<im(St.) may bo omondod ioyant-
tatn Cf, Bonfoy, ST. Einl. XXTI.
l^f 4 Head ^atl^nitikiiynnith,' liljo 'pra*
tyajif.aitikfiynnah, udauuaufuigava?/
Fnt«f,jali 1. 1.2; Bhatloji, JribdaK.
1.1.2:57.
1 4 D TPr. V. C; VPr. V. *3; CA . I V. .V,
r.Tid the \ArUka {*ampnrnbi»f*n) to
vak'nvy-th) on P/.m'ni VIII. 3,31.
57
190 TPr. V. 7, and Panini VI. 1. 135,
13G.
191 This rule sounds pocuhar. This is
apparonlly moant to show tho
function of tlio past porfoct, which
does not como in tho kon of a Pra
tis*akhya, Por tho insortion of a cf,
Panini VI. 1. 135.
192 RPr. IV. 85,87, VPr. III. 53,
Pamni has (VI. 1. 137-139) throo
sutras, whiJo onr troatisosorvos tho
tamo purpose with ono. In tho
coram reid 'gobhirbhangam pari
$krtam' SV. II, C83
193 Panini VI. 1. 148.
194 Panini VI 1 157, w Inch include*
in it par"\ikara, kilra^kara, and
rathasya (cf 209 a soparflto rnlo
for it), ki^kuh, kis,kiiidh5, tadbr
hatoh karapityoicoradotatnjoh sat
talopa-Sca (cf 211) and priltlura
patau gaw kartari |
195 Panini VI 1 149.
196 No corresponding rulo ovon in
Panini, He on tho other hand notes
'apSccatugpacchaku n lS^aleVhane*
VI 1. 142 on which vartikakftra
says 'sudapi har?adi§\eva vakta-
vyah', 'kiraterharsajlvikakul&yak
nranosviti vacyam ' Of. Bhattojt on
it In the comm. 'apakiratjanyat'
would suit better.
197 Panini has two sutras for it, VI, 1
140, 141 In tho comm. reid 'pari
kham '
198 Panini VI 1 150
199 Pfinini VI 1 H3.
200 Panini VI, 1. 146
201 Panini VI 1 144. Cf Bohthnk
on it
S02 Panini VI. 1, 135 Our troatiso
rostncts tho word hari£cmdra to
tho rc. Cf. 207.
203-4 Panini VI. 1. 145. Panini leaves
tho uso of this word in anScartte
(204) unnoticed, whilo our troatiso
o%orlooks its nso m 'sovitfisowtn-
do£o '
205 Procisoly tho samo rule is found
in Panmi VI. 1 147.
20G No corrosopnding rulo is found. Tor
ftskrMi ..vahasah, cf VIII.
21 I 'tnis*tado\Iyam nil. it saha
pQ^aih paficabhirunatnm?ada\a-
sanft ' Tiio reading in Niridadhyfi
)n is 'askrah ' Tor askra cf. TS, 1.
5 8 5, 2 D 8 6, VI 3 8 1.
207 Cf UPr, IV. 84, VPr III. 54,
and Panini VI, 1 151, Macdonoll,
VodicGr p. 74 Mark tho SVPp.
hanh J candrah, but su | cmdrih
and puru | candrah According
to Bhattoji Panmi VI. 1. 151
provtdos for hari&andrah and
suScandrah in mantra and VI 1
153 for hanscandra m lola. But
I would ralhor liavo 151 for sus"
cindrah and purugcandrali etc
and 153 for tho two words menti
oned in the sutra
208 Exactly tho same rule is found in
Pamni VI 1. 155
209 Cf paraskaradigann on Panmi
VI 1 157.
210 Cf 'maskaramaskaripau \onupan
vrajabayoh' Panini VI. 1 154
Jflanendra, the author of Tattia
bodhinl says 'maskaras ibdadininl
matvarthlyenestasiddhau maskari
grahanam pinvrajaka evayam pra
58
yogo yatha syadityevamartham.'
Against this view cf, Kaiyata on
154, Bhattoji inliis SK. remarks:-
'maskaras'abdo' vyutpannali, ta-
sya suditi nipatyate' This rbinark
- is very significant, inasmuch as
it indicates in a way that this sutra
and others which treat avyutjjanna
words are not Panini's his own,
who held that the Unadis are not
derivative words (cf. Vartikakara,
Patagjali, Kaiyata, Bhattoji and
Nages'a on 3. P. 3. 1) but who, in
order to make his work complete
and thorough, adopted them and
the sutras like the present one,
from 6akatayana (Nages'a on r.
3. 3. 1) who in his Nairuhtu Yya-
7carana (S& on.3 .3. 1.) proposed that
all words were derivative (Nir. I. 4)
and did accordingly give derivations
of difficult words, some of which
may have been adopted by Yaska
in his Nirukta. It is quite proba-
ble that in parallel passages, found
in Panini and Rktantra, the for-
mer stands a debtor to the latter,
which was perhaps (1) originally
written by A.udavraji, (2) was
improved upon by 6akatayana (3)
and was finally brought to its pre-
sent form by his followers. For
details see introduction.
211 Cf. VPr. III. 52. tasharah taikaro
bhavatUi Yaska, Nir. III. 3, 14,
2; and 'tadbrhatoli karapatyos'cora-
devatayoh sut talopa^ca' in kaska-
dlgana.
212 The sutra prescribes lengthening
for bhasa alone. But cf. RPr.
'paryabhyapaplti vrtavyvarW IX.
6. Ptmini would construe pravmu-
te otc. as pra + a + vraute and so on.
213 VPr. III. 125. and RPr. VII. 6.
214 Panini VI. 3. 117.
215 No corresponding rule is found.
The RPr. devotes three chapters
(VII-IX) to the subject of the ir-
regular prolongation of vowels. In
VPr. the same subject occupies the
sixth section of the third chapter
(III. 95-128); and one rule in the
seventh in the TPr. it occupies the
third chapter, which however, in-
verts the form of statement adopted
by other Pratisakhyas, and details
the cases in which a vowel which
is long in Samhita must be shorte-
ned in the pada. The method of sta-
ting the phenomenon of prolonga-
tion adopted by different treatises
is so varying that little would be
gained by any detailed comparison.
216 RPr. IX. 216.
217 VPr. III. 130.
218-9 RPr. IX. 1; VPr. III. 103;
OA. III. 9, and Panini VI. 128-
129.
220 OA. III. 10 and 'suno dantadam-
strakarnakundavarahapucchapade-
su dlrgho vacyah' a vartika on
Panini VI. 3. 130. In the comm.
read: sVa-vit | sVavit [ vit j s'va-
padah | sVapadab | pad ( s>a-
varahah. | sVavarahah | varaha (
and so on. It was customary to
repeat the word after citing its
example.
221 Cf. Panini VII. 3. 90 and 'asarva-
namna"h' on it.
59
224 Cf. PanlnlVI. 3. 137. Ci Hhi
t(oj) on thinatra, And IlOlitlitil. on
II. 2. 27.
225 P«n,nf VI. 3. 125, I2G
22G IMniui VI. 3. 17, 49. Tho M*n-
mtmutor In 'ftUltMrametft dvi(\b-
iK^s' Is rfftirrin^ t« Mvyittu ah
MmUiy\y*mib*>itobriby*<HyoVYJ 4
3. *V.
227 CA. III. 2 Head in tho co-nm.
n?!ip»(i«m | a? t*pi i»m ( pa da J
nftARoyiil.Um J «(tAs lyultam | £o-
yuUa j and io on. Cf nolo on 220.
22S CA. III. 1, and r^rrfoi VI. 3 I.T7.
Thnro ti tin nrrfciAn in tur*|U
In limjnf-t tfri ft! Utn SV, ami
UV. ror'jiHiM* cf. lUiiltnk on
VI 3. 137.
229 rinlnl VI, 3. U7 #
230 KPr.IX. G. PAuini VI. 1. UC
restricts tho operation to jnron
roots,
231 ItPr. IX. 7, VPr III. 10C, CA.
in. 12 find Paaini VI. 3 122.
SV. II, 4G5 nsrlnuim Rt t ptrt-
naiam Bontoy, 8V. II 855 pari
\rtah St , btttp-uUrtab in Benfay.
232 Pftnini VI. 3 122.
234 CA. III. 11. Paoinl compresses
this sQtra into txro sylltbles
'dusti' VI, 3, 124, wboro BOhtllnk
citos nltta, llltn, pirltta For t
ci. Pftnlnl VII. 4 47 and VftsU,
'prattam'HaltBmiti dhnUadl o\a
^i?yoto ' Nir II, I.
235 VPr. III. 130. Noto tlio browtj
in 'ikah k-iUo' PAtiini VI, 3. 123
Hark tho animara for n in prati-
kftSJim (">n) in tlio comm.
236 Cf CA, III 16 with Whllnofa
oxhaasttro noto, VPr, Ilf ISO,
PAnint VI. 3. 133, KPr. VII. 12,
15, 21, 51, 1.'7, 29, mipr portion
* f 30, greater portion of 33, 35, 36,
37, 39, 40, 4G, 49, 50, 01, £0, IX.
35 »ro j-rietlcally covered by tho
rulo tf o«r trettho. It
should bo notnd that our trentho
atoidei rolifsr^hii; antniloi and
liko P5nmi proicribos a general
rnlo which cover* snverO sltni
tton< that while In SV. II.
632 Ft ft" Jthl vKri, Ponfoy
reads. j\M vKrS. Son Bonfoy, SV.
Itml XXV.
237 KPr VII 23,26, VIII. 1, 4 nro
pirtl) covered by this Sen aim
Piulnl VI 3. 133. SV, II CIS
juru (Si.) but pari! In Bcnfey.
Our lrc«i*o support* tho Utter.
21S UPr. VIII S InSV,II. 190 St,
litOritnunViT svardrje'hut Ho n [fly
rfid» 'vi {rural i iv»rdr?e*(I'r»r~
It'mr cf Pp)md tho noto on 271;
Bonfov, SV.Kinl XXV) In SV.
II. 3S1 St. has'pirljanti'butBon-
foy 'pari yanti* which Is corroct acc-
ording to our treatise Cf tho
comm. 'tipasirgo no ' In II. 332.
bt. has '\ananl cV but Bonfoj 'van*
ftnl c.V iho latter botng correct.
039 HPr. VII. 13, and Paninl VI. 3. 134
InSV.II 596 St haa 'abhlhisatya/
but Bonfoj 'abhi hi satja.' 'dantyo
pratyayo' support tho latter. Bat
why not abhi do\a * ayflsyah 1 In
fact this kind of longthoning mat
nly dopondod upon tho require-
ments of tho motro, for which sso
longthoning of fmi\l short \owoh'
in Arnold, VoUic metro p 145
60
240 RPr. VII. 43, 44, and Panini VI.
3. 134.
241 RPr. VIII. 18 is covered by this.
242 VPr. III. 1 1 1, and OA. III.4. Mark
that our treatise takes 'yuyotana'
as two words and the SVPp. ma-
kes avagraha in 'krnotana' etc. In
SV. II. 232 St. has 'tadadya' while
Benfey reads 'tadadya'; the latter is
supported by our treatise.
243 'ayamu te bhasyam' is a kind of
vartika. It is to be noted that whi-
le lvatyayana uses the word vacy-
am in his vartikas, our treatise has
invariably bhasyam. In the comm.
on Samatantra such vartikas are
more than one hundred.
244 SV, I. 397 runs 'yuyotana no' while
the comm. requires 'yuyotana no',
because here it is citing yuyotana
as a counter-example. The word does
not occur anywhere else in the
SV.
245 RPr. VIII. 11 is included in this
and 243. RPr. VIII. 13 is also
covered by this. A portion of VIII.
14 also. Mark in the comm. 'janay-
at bhasyam.'
246 'abhi madata vosvo arnavam' SV.
I. 242 cited as example by the
commentator shows that lengthen-
ing takes place, though the pada is
not immediately followed by a
'nakaripada.'
In the commentary, read 'adidva-
ndeo | In 'adid vamdeta varunam'
I. 288, it is not lengthened, beca-
use it is not followed by a sibilant.
'sapta nu sata' SV. 1. 577; there
is no n in this, yet this is cited by
the commentator as an example. .
247 Cf. RPr. VIII. 6.
248 RPr. VIII. 10.
249 RPr. VIII, 35 is partly covered
by this.
250 'imam stomamarhate jatavedase
rathamiva sam sahema manisaya'
SV. I. 66 In this verse the lengt-
hening takes place, because it has
'imam' in it. In 'dvirimam stoma-
yam' the commentary says the same
thing in an obscure manner. I do
not understand the significance of
'somaparvabhih',because, there being
no imam word in this re, the sutra
cannot be applied to it.
257 na kevalah svarasandhi/i | a tveta, [
The commentator means that in
a tveta there is first lengthening
of a, tii and then sandhi; hence the
sutra is not applied to it
258 RPr. XII. 20 reads ^prabhyapara
nirduranupapasampariprati nya-
tyadhi siidavapi | upasarga vims'a-
tirarthayacakah sahetarabhyam ||
TPr. 1. 15 reads 'apravopabhya-
dhi prati pari vi nltyupasarga/j. |
These ten words are but half the
number „ which are reckoned
as prepositions by the RPr., and
VPr. VI. 24 and by Pacini 1.
4. 58, 59; see pradigawa in Pacini's
Grammatik by Bbhtlink 154. The
discordance is real and difficult
to explain, though the commenta-
tor of TPr. suggested that only -
so many are recognized by the
Yajurveda. See "Whitney on TPr. 1.
15. cit — vak are not counted in cadi-
gana. Cf. Pacini's Grammatik for
61
cadignna winch is on akrtigana
62 F&nim VI. 4 73
63 Of. UPr. IX. 40 VPr. Ill 120,
and Pfimni VI. 3 137. Cf. Boht
link on it
64 Cf. OA III. 27 which also pro
scnbos doubling o! final consona
nts. Our troitiso does not oxpros
ely montion pndhnlc, honco its icopo
is unrestricted and it may well
applj to tho words In paaso as
woll Indian grammarians go no
rally do not proscribe doubling of
final consonant^ tho only oxcop
tion to this boing ourlroitiso and
OA. VI. 7, VPr IV. 11C and
UTr. XIV, 15 unanimously teach
that a consonant is not duplicated
in pauso. It should ha noted that
tho authors of thoso troatisos reco
gnizod tho doubling onlj in tho
Samhitii pfHha, and not in tho
pada text, lliis hypothesis is to
some extent aupportod b} the fact,
that both tho UPr VI 14 (cf
"VSaV* on &T * d Vhumi VIII
4 51 attribute to (Sikala or £>3ka
Ija, tho teacher to whom tho in
vention jdE pada text Is gonorally
attributed, a denial of all duplica
tion
One thing raoro Wo havo no
record of such doubling m Sans
krit except in liaison, whilo Pra
lent has dropped the final conso
nants instead of doubling them If
the phenomenon over occurod, it
must havo been confined to ft par
ticular area, which it is difficult to
locate at present
C5 OA. III. 27, RPr. VI 15, VPr.IV.
10G, TPf. IX. 18, 19, and PdninI
VIII.3.32SV. In 11.289 St roads
dadhya* npo«, whilo Bonfoy has
dadhyanapo*.Soo nlso SV, II, 515.
St. sidftti, Bonfoy sidrnasi. For
roasons soo Bonfoy, SV. Einl. XXV,
XXXIV, AH grammatical autho-
rities agroo that tho Anal n or fi (
when procodod by a short lowel,
and followed b) any vowol aro dou-
blod. But nolo that, whilo PAnini
and othors mako this doubling
obligatory (nitjam), our troatiso
makes it optional (-draldham).
But according to thoPan$ik$d and
Vyilsis'ik$a tho final nasals, though
wnlton double, should bo prono-
unced onlyonco Whon a consona*
nt foftws, tho^o nasals, according
to Varnaratnadlpikft £ik?a, Ijko
all final consonants, may bo doub-
led, m 'apnmannpunam' otc. as in
tattkaroU. 'But although this (JiksS
calls them final consonants, they
cinnot bo strictly callod final,
bocauso they aro followed by othor
consonants,and thoir doub]ing,accor-
ding to SiddhoSvara, is roally a case
of liaison rathor than doubling
proper. Likowiso doubling of final
n boforo vowels is also a caso of
liaison, for tho final n ropresonta
in many cases an original Indo-Ger-
manic nt (or ns), which by assimi
lation from the succeeding vowel
bocamo ntf, and was finally chan-
ged into nn, Skt. ean**$onts, Simi
larly final n represents nls, pra-
tyan roally being pratynnls' Tor
details boo Macdonoll, Vedic Gr.
62
p. 68; Siddhes*vara Varma, Criti-
cal Studies etc. p. 106. For vari-
ous explanations of this doubling,
see Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. p.
330.
266 For the definition of stobha, cf.
JNMV. IX. 2. 11; Sahara on Pur-
vamirnamsa IX, 9, 7; Sayana, SV.
I. p. 11; Vedic Chant, pp. 1-3; B.
Faddegon, Ritualistic dadaism.
Acta Orientalia V. 1926. 177 et.
seq.
267 RPr. VI. 3, and Panini VI. 1. 73.
'karnacchidram' may be emended
to 'karnacchidram.'
268 RPr. VI. 13, and Panini VI. 1. 74.
Note 'ma cchinnoti' in the comm.
and cf. 'atrnoti' ( = atrnatti Yaska,
Nir II. 4) in Samhitopa^adbr.
III. p. 32. Panini VI. 1. 76 pres-
cribes c in kali cchaya also.
269 Cf. note on 168-169. RPr. VI. I;
VPr.IV.100, and TPr. XIV. 1, put
corresponding rules at the head of
the varnakrama as the fundamen-
tal and most important rule. The
CA. III. 28 treats it, like our trea-
tise, in a general manner. The
intricate and obscure subject of
duplication in consonant groups is
treated in RPr. VI. 1-14; VPr.IV.
100-107; CA. III. 26-32, and Pa-
cini VIII. 4. 46-52. This is treat-
ed at a greater length by TPr.
XIV. 1-28.
The examples given by the com-
mentator may be read 'abhippri-
yani' and so on. Benfey does not
give doubling, and the majority of
mss. agree with him. Cf. SV. Einl.
XL VII. Our treatise does not
particularly note the treatment of
a consonant group, beginning with
anusvara. The VPr. IV. 109 ex-
pressly exempts anusvara from dup-
lication, [while ianxh khayaft (cf.
SK. on samskarta) a vartika may
imply its doubling in samskarta,
because Patasjali has put anusvara
among the gars. Cf . Pat. on haya-
varaV; and Nagesa SS. on samska-
rta] and the RPr. VI. 1 rules out
anusvara in the estimation of con-
sonant groups, it being thought
that a consonant is doubled after
it in the same manner as after a
vowel, a fact confirmed by Pata-
Sjali on 'hayavaraV and Bhattoji
(anusvaravisargajihva mulTyopadh-
maniyayamanamakaropari garsu ca
pathasyopasamkhyatatvenanusvar-
asyapyactvat) SK, Halsandhi. Acco-
rding to Whitney there is no
reason to doubt, that the same is
to be taken as the doctrine of the
TPr.; and that it takes anusvara as
the affection of the vowel, to which
it is attached, at least so far as the
duplication is concerned. This
may equally hold good in the case
of our treatise also. It has already
been noted that both the TPr. and
our treatise do not hold very defi-
nite views, regarding the phonetic
value of the anusvara.
ram hrat = param rephahakarat;
natau has been supplied by the
commentator. According to the
comm. rephahaharhbhydm we
would expect in the sutra 'rhat' in-
63
stead of ArAf VPr IV 101, CA,
III. 31, and PSmni VIII 4 46
exactly agroo with oar treatise
Tho RPr. VI 4, 8 'param rophat,
narophah'and TPr. XIV 4 'ro
phatparam ca' deny doubling to r
nlono, and loa\ o h to moot tho sinio
troatmont with other spirants
In tho comm road njuhvvilna
sya, nrkkadrni | 'duduhnro' sooms
a counter example, and is hero mis
placed,
271 Road examples with doublod ?
Tho procopt seems rather an ill
concoived ono, since tho doubling
is already declared by 270 Its
real function howover is to deny
tho doubling of spirants, when tho)
are followod by a vowel, as in kar
tjatx, and this is exactly what othor
Pratigakhyas and PAnini do ,
cf. TPr XIV. 4-1 C, CA III
31-32, and Famni VIIT. 4 40
to 40 The RPr VI 10 how
evor exempts from duplication any
spirant, when followod oither by a
vowel or by anyother spirant For
tho fact that ntyama sutras aro
meant for negation, cf Patafijah
(Kielhorn, Ind Ant XVT 242)
and Nfiges*a, Halsandkx on
Pamm VIIT 3 17. Tor the im
portance of Pamm VIIT 4 50
from tho point of view of our troa
tise, cf note on 168 For the fact,
that like oursutra, the three sutras
of Pamm (VIIT 4-48-E0) are
really meant for vyavastha, cf
'yaro* nunasika ltyato vetyanuvr
ty&, nacltyeva siddhe tu sutratra
yamapi tathoti' Nfigosa, 6& on
VIII 4, 50.
Tho tondoncj for duplicationjiad
a peculiar charm for tho Indian
phonoticians, who olaboratoly sta-
tod its nicotios, and thus carried it
to a frightful appoaranco Groups
socb as nthsttr, tthspphy, Uhshttny,
montionod by Whitney on TPr.
XIV, 9 would palo into msignifi
canco beforo tho staggoring\anoty
of tho forms of samskarfc [Bba
ttoji, SK, against 'trisakfirakama
pi' cf NagoSa, LSs" 'itinayultam
laksjo lak?anasjoU nyayftt' otc]
resulting chiefly from tho duplica-
tion of *, i, ( and o\on anwvara
(-far, cf PataRjahon hayavaral),
forms which could have existed in
puro fhoory alone, and which pro
hably had no Patafijali's sanction,
who, for tho formation of pny6?
(an, pnyfista, first said on Papim
I 1 24, 'yathalal$anamaprayuKte\
but at onco corrected bimsolf by
saying 'naiva rd laktyQamapra
yulte tartate, prayull&n^mem lah
tfanen&nv&khyHn&t 'Cf. also Nfigesa,
on pnyasts.
But this tendency brought its
own noraesis, and wo see the pro-
cess of simplification set m com
paratnely early in tho msa , (cf
Koth,ZDMG.XLVIII,101)which
adopt more or less rogularly the
abbreviation of a double consonant
before a consonant (Kieth, Veda
of Black Yajus XXXVII n 5),
and gradually ignore the doubling
altogether (cf Macdonell, Vedic
Gr for Students p 413 rundhe)
64
This process too was carried in
turn to extremes, till we meet in-
stances, where the Vedic mss. use
one letter in place of two,
which were not the result of doub-
ling, but belonged to two different
words, Cf, jy for jjy in dadhajyotir
<t+jyoo' SV. IT. 879; ty for iiy in
bhinattyojasa 'tti+o« I. 297; tr for
ttr in caratrimsat ( t+tri°' 1.281,
corrected by Benfey; tv for ttv in
mahatvUm 'tf-ffoa 0 ' II. 258, utva
H+totf I. 194; yatva 't+tva' I.
371; itvam '2+toa°' II. 334; ci<«a
'£+taa' II. 662; osatve 'sat + tve 1
II. 928; syUvz 't+tv&o' IT. 1158;
<fj/ for ddy'm paihody&m 'ut-^-dyam 1
I. 92; yadyavah 't+dyao' I. 278;
(fr for in onadrao l t-\-dra<? I.
4; cfo; for e?efo in vaksadvipade *t-\-
dvW II. 1057; c?% for c&2% in
idhyasya 'U+hi+aa I. 224; cio?A-
'cii+M-fasii' II. 335. These
forms are provided iri our treatise
by 168-169. The principle of drop-
ping d bofore dh gave rise to forms
where t is dropped before s, (s-f-s
= ts). Cf. isvardrse Ht+sva* II.
190— ifsuar^rse, in RV. There are
good many instances, where in
place of nk and ng only n is writ-
toil. Cf. ante II. 1101; (OA. II.
20) ahdhi II. 878; panti I. 56. Here
iit--hkt--hm. Cf. Benfey, SV.
* Einl. XL VII; Wackernagel, Alti-
nd. Gr. J. 133-134.
272-73 For corresponding rules, see
RPr. V. 40; YPr. III. 85; TPr. III.
6; CA. III. 75, and Panini VIII.
4. 1, 2. For details of cerebralisa-
tion, cf. Macdonell, Vedic Gr. p.
38; Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I. p.
187.
274 See RPr. V. 58 (exceptions in 59);
VPr.III.87, and Panini VIII. 4.27.
Note arsanah II. 685, where RV.
9. 61. 16 reads 'arsa nah' so noted
by RPr. V. 58. SV. II. 797 has
ririhi nah, while RV. 9. 11. 9 runs
rirthi nah not noted by RPr. 59.
SV. I, 81, 184, 358, 509; II. 598,
have pra nah and II. 247, 560
rerd pari nah [which sounds pecu-
liar, when read in the - light of
'pari na iti £akatayanah' VPr. III.
88], while RV. 7. 41. 3, 57. 5; 8.
19. 27, 71. 6, 80. 4; 9. 79. 2 etc.
have 'pra nah' and RV. 8 47. 5; 9.
54. 5; 9. 64. 18 etc. have 'pari nah.'
275 RPr. V. 40 (samanapade 'vagrhye)
54—57; VPr. ITI, 87— 89 (excep-
tions in 90—93, 96); CA. III. 76,
77, 79,-85 (exceptions in 86-92)
prescribe natva in compound wor-
ds. Our treatise, on the other hand,
has no rule to cover these com-
pound words, but simply sayas'mase
yatha drstah' (1), and thus shows
its unwillingness or inability to
cope with the intricacies of Vedic
grammar. 272 and 273 are appare
ntly meant for samMiapadas, and
this is exactly the reason why
words like 'parmasi' are cited on
sutra I. And yet the commentator
here cites hariyojanam etc. as cou-
nter-examples, words which are in
reality no ehapada (like girinam),
and to which, therefore the two sii-
tras (272-73) are not applicable. A
65
similar inconsistency has boon no-
tod by Whitnoy on IPr, XIII 15
For corobralisation in two padas,
cf svfiraa II 1201, bat against
this svarnopa* in II 303, which is
■wanting in RV, varoa» II CI,
grngavr§o napat II 77, nrbhiry
omanahll 52=RV 2 US 3 whi
ch has yemaoali, nrmanah I 323
and eo on
RPr V 42, Ai, OA III 93,
94 givo to separate rules, wlitlo
the VPr III 9G, and TPr XIII
15 proscribe one rule Oar treatise
precisely agroos with tho latter
troop
Tho physical explanation of the
effect of the sounds raontlonod in
this rule, to prevent tho corobrnli
sation of the nasal is obvious They
cause the tongue to change its
position, when the tongue is unco
bent back in tho mouth lo tho
position in which the cerebral
sibilant, semi-vowel and on els
nre uttered, it tends to remain
there and produce Hie following
nasal at that point Bat these le
tters suddenly call jt into actit n
in another quarter and thus put
it out of adjustment, as it were,
and thus prevent the cerebralisa
tion of the following nasal Cf
Whitney, CA III 91, Macdonell,
Vedic Gr p 38 n 2, Wackorna
gel, Altind, Gr p 187 note
276 VPr III 58 precisely agrees with
oar treatise See also OA II, 87,
RPr V 22 (which has better
example 'svars.amapsfim'and Pamni
VIII 3 57, D9 It should be
noted that tho prnpor function of
a PrAtiSakhya is to gtvo rulos for
tho conversion of tho disjoinod
toxt into tho joined ono, honco it
should liavo nothing to do with
tho procoss of donvation of a
word Peculiarly onoagh our treo-
tiso is horo proscribing a rule for
tho formation of words Jiko rkso,
vanik?n otc, with which a Pratisa
khya has nothing to do On VPr
III 58 Uvata citos those examples
and then trios to justify tho posi
tion takon up by tho Pratis*akbya
in the following words —
"nannca yatra padak&ro'nyatka
bhutam padnm karoti anyatha car
fasamhita tat ran a laksanam kar-
tum yajyato, yatha susava, sa?ava,
yatra punali padakilrasyacargasam
lnl4)as*ca samanavfikyatvam tatra
laksanam najjiatato | \yflkaranasya
vj$a)ahsah( satyame\o, yadi nfima
I rasangamupojlvadilcaryena ai§ya
vj utj att} artham ka<cidvyilkarana
lak^ann lhasafljitah o\am samhita
yamavidyamanosa laksanam dras
tavyam | athavajnthaedhaharasyo
madhvAharanamudakaharasya ma
tsyftharanam pu?pahflras)a phala
haranamevametadaj l | evam ca
krtvft ado?a eveti | "
Bat this is a lame excuse and
does not by any means justify the
position In fact the FrStis'ikhyas
do enter now and then in the riis
cussion of a matter which is really
out of their province For instance
in OA I 83 we read a rule which
66
prescribes shortening of a nasaliz-
ed vowel occuring in the interior
af a word. Similar is the case with
RPr. XIII. 22 (one of its later
books) which treats the same sub-
ject, and for the introduction of
which into the Pratis'&khya, the
commentator, TJvata takes so much
pains. Cf. RPr. XIII. 22. Simi-
larly CA. II. 33, 34 concern mat-
ters, with which the Pratis'akhya
properly has no concern. Accord-
ingly RPr. IV. 7 disposes of them
simply by specifying that m is al-
tered before an initial vowel, ex-
cepting r. The TPr. says nothing
upon the subject, but the VPr.
IV. 2 gives a precept which inclu-
des both the rules of CA. in it.
Sometimes these treatises prescribe
most blundering and superfluous
rules. For example, OA. III. 43
shows that in 'stmanta' the result-
ing vowel is short, a word which
is nowhere found in the AV.
Again, it is a peculiarity of the
author or authors of our treatise,
like that of the OA, to give their
rules a wider scope than the voca-
bulary of the Samaveda requires,
in many instances contemplating
and providing for combinations of
sounds, which are found nowhere
in the whole body of the Vedic
literature, and for which the co
mmentator is compelled to fabri-
cate examples. Note the sutras
from 186 to 235 and their comme-
ntary. Here one would at once
mark the identity or near co-
rrespondence of so many fabrica-
ted illustrations furnished by the
commentator wiih those given by
the scholiasts to Panini,' and it is
a very noteworthy fact, as it supp-
lies us with a positive proof of the
more intimate relation of the
grammatical system of our treatise,
than that of any other of the
Pratisakhyas with the general
Sanskrit grammar.
277 'su gayata' is the saman from of
'(raja)su gaj'ata' SV. I. 255. No
corresponding rule is found.
278 Cf. Panini VIII. 3. 57.
279 Cf. TPr. VI. 1 4, and CA. II. 90.
Note the peculiar way of citing
examples. The commentator picks
up the opening 'a tveta' of I. 164,
and the example nisldata, to which
the sutra is applied, comes after-
words; and such is 'a, sota pari siflca-
ta' in 1. 580. For a similar practice
in TPr. cf. Whitney on TPr. IV.
20. pro, te II. 236 contains no
word on which the sutra may
have any bearing. The reading
pratu ssems correct, because I. 525
runs 'pratu drava pari kosam ni si-
fica' and there we get 'ni since' to
which the sutra is applied, 'a. no'
I. 43, has purusprham where puru
is not an upasarga. abhi tyam is the
reading of Bur. and B., and with
this open T. 376, and 464; but
neither contains any word on
which the sutra may have any
bearing. I suspect abhi Jcram in
place of abhi tyam and in 'abhi-
krandan kdlasesu sidati' II.
382, we get sadanesu sidati as a
counter-example of the sutra. ucoa
In I -4G7 has divi iad udfrala
(jadudtrata I. 474, which his Hha
nam in placo of tlhanil of KV.). da
dhotm&n, 'Whjau* rofors to (n) I,
223, which contains injuriinutim
and (b) II. 1017, which has su?u-
mp*.
280 (a) In the comm. fnh mom», that
tho word 'pin sv/inah* occurs thnco
In SV. Cf. I, 475, II. 413, CC3
Vat add pan s\\nft«ah of I 485,
Similarly t/nh "menu, thai 'adhl-
slnah'occursonbj twice, Cf. I. 529,
532, In COI, 529 i\ ropeatod. Hw
rcading'adhaUadiriti' scorns bettor,
because in these situations # Is not
that of adliatn, but of n word, which
Is not derived from a dlifttu Note
the exlremo brevity, which Is the
chlof characteristic of our com
montator.
(b) The phenomenon of changing 1
Into ? has hen n treated in dotails hy
KPr. Hero is a eorapirnon of iho
nmo with our troati«o —
s=g nftor n np-isjot KV 9 87
9 (IlPr. V. 30) not found in SV.
and not noted by Pfinini, Bonfoy
notosantarjksfijftt, hut cf IJohllink
on P. III. 2 CI. Aftora vrthftsiH
I G3 4, only onco in tho KV , but
wanting in SV, turflaSt II 301,
only onco in SV, but fourtlinei
in HV; noted by tho comni with
prftsM, prtnnftjM, SntrusH on OA
II 82, prtanfWlt II. 781 thrice
In SV„ but Inotimos In HV., not
dividod in tho patla text of oither.
prtanSsahya>n 1.37 1 noted by
KPr. V 23, VPr III. 75, »nd
Pfinlnl VIII. 3. 109.
«=* nftor I: KPr.noteieximpIos
of vi $\ KV. 9. 97. 38=vi fa
1 1. 70G, flit *ih G. 2. 4, but fltl sab
InSV. I. 3C5 hi nh I. 3S1; vi #n
II. 1057 and tho I1L0 are co>orod
by 292.
ItPr. V.—
4 provides for >at and tthah:
dhlsid 9 CI. 10, but cf. dlrl
iad in SV. II, 22 and did san
in I. 83 (KV. has tin), 'ja-
vam hi cthah irarpatl' is a
counlor-examplaand occure In
SV. II. 351, 423 having svaji
pall HPr V. 4 is colored by
2S0.
C provides for gobhfcuyama etc ,
which are not found in SV.
7 notes ima. hutna HV. 1. 37.
15 *hi»maSV. II. 319. SV.
IT. 107S has prat! «ra1, but I.
2 I roads prati f ma, whoro HV,
han.SV I 230hasnpismasl,
whoro HV roads t Such
caios nro covorod hy 282. Cf.
vrr. III. 68,
8 oxamplos do not occur in SV.
9 oxamplos aro wanting in SV.
10 oaa u sjah 9, 3. 10=s)a1i II.
61. SV, II 588 has pari 8)a,
but HV. roads pan *ya.
11 Pamni VIII. 4 4 1 - 286.
13 provides taUafor 16 padas
tarou s^avitma 8. 95. 6 -II.
23t, anustunuvanti 8 38-11
922, (VPr III. 72),ftpohisthfi
10, 9. I - IT, 1190, (cf TPr.
VI. 2 which contorts s into
* aftor 12 words), rajati «tup
68
9. 96. IS-H. 524; pari stobha-
ntu 8. 92. 19-11. 72, II 413.
All aro covered by 281, 2S2.
13 pari sificata II. 580, 635, 679,
7-42, 796, 1026; pari svajanta I.
375; pari svajamaho II. 1155.
Cf. VPr. III. 64; TPr. VI. 4,
and Panini VIII. 3. 65.
14 nisodathuh RV. 4. 56. 7-
II. 946; ni sldall. 27. Cf. VPr.
III. 59, and Panini VIII. 3. 66.
15 pari sasvajo II. 548. Cf. Panini
VIII. 3. 64, and CA. II. 90.
16 hi stha II. 1191, but hi stha
II. 351, 423, RV. 9. 19. 2.
17 trisadhasthe II. 259; cf. CA.
H. 98, which covers all cases
that aro not otherwise provided,
and Panini VIII. 3. 106; abhi
pata I. 309-7. 32. 24. For
purvinosthiim, see note on 1.
adhisnubhih I. 615,
18 u svu nah II. 347 -u suvanah
RV. 9. 107. 8. Cf. VPr. 1H.
62; TPr. VI. 2, tho scope of
which is very vjdo; CA. II. 97
and Bohtlink on III. 2 106.
divifiafichukra6. 2. 6, but divi
paSchukra T. 83. vamsu sTdati
II. 1110-1.57 3. Note also
su*tthn, su^uta, susumat, susu-
mna etc , which nre covorod
by 281.
IS 20 example? aro not found an SV.
21 CAmiiifscchyonnh 9, 96. 19-
II. 525; mrnjanlyr^isfma 9.
86. 4 -II. 236.
22 rathc-Uinm G. 21. I -II. 77-1.
P7lan?ii.*ihyftyAh-t? boon noted.
Cf. pnra;ue*Ui?J» on Punini
VIII. 3. 97; VPr. III. 56,
and CA. II. 94.
23 records exceptions, Cf. TPr.
VI. 8. pari srava I. 567; II.
249, 325, 331, 412, 534, 558,
662.
24 susamiddho no RV. I, 13. 1
(VPr. III. 82 records 24
exceptions), but SV. II. 695
reads susamiddha; divisprsah
II. 753; abhisvare II. 281 =
RV. 8. 97. 12.
27 gosakhayam 5. 37. 4; gosakho
11. 1187, but gosakha in RV.
8. 14. 1 = 1. 122.
28 For sutesuto soe note on I.
carsanisaham 8. *21. 10 = 11.
709. Cf. VPr. III. 84.
29abhisatva 10. 103. 5 = 11.
1 206. Cf. VPr. III. 8; TPr. VI.
12. For iinusak, cf. note on 1.
30 pnru santyoh 9. 58. 3r:II.
409; susamidha 7. 17. 1; <sus-
amiddhah II. 695.
To the phenomenon of co-
robralisation Panini dovotos
53 Mltras. Cf. VII. 3. 57—109.
281 Cf. RPr. V. 18, 19; VPr. III. 61-
63, and TPr. VI. ^Sooalso'sufiah.'
CA, II. 97, which is quito identi-
cal V ith Panini VIII. 3. 107 and
is according to Whitnoy somowhat
dofoctivo. See Whitnoy, CA. IT. 97,
282 In tho comm. 'jagato pado' may be
corroctod to *jngafo pado.'
283 RPr. IV.41, and Panini.VII 1.3.41.
284 RPr. V.3 1-38; VPr. III. 7 i~79,and
Panini VIII. 3. 101, 104, stasia-
tali, is (ho reading ndoptod hy
Rur. Rut 'svasuftsrnah ' f?V. h
451 seems t-orrcct, because in
69
swtutah * is not tandhya. In
suilutah the b is cbangod into f
by 272. 600 Panml VIII. 3 105.
In 'Uamagne grhapatistTam hota*
^SV. I. 61 patih is not in tlio
mid d to of the pada, bnt at tho
end of it,honcocerobralisation docs
not take placo, Cf. Bba$t<>]i on
Panlni VIII. 3, 103, and tho
commentary here 'padamadhyasye
tyadhikarah,' (brought down from
282). SV H. 237 has prabkoste,
hat RV. in the samo passage has
prabhwto.
285 Correct 511 to 551, which reads
Mhftn us/fan ran ti paamsyam ' In
*«ar!rabhistarftti vSjakarmabhib/
'surlrabhih' is not followed by a
pada containing p
286 Cf RPr V. II, VPr. III. 80,
TPr. VII. 13, U, OA II. 16, and
PaniniVIII. 4 41.
287 This iQtra has nothing to do with
this treatise It stands at tho bo
ginning of Samatantra, a treatlso of
S&mavoda, which treats sSman
form of the rc and is invariably
appended to RT In fact both the
treatises are supplementary to oach
other, and tho one is not complote
■without the other "Wo know no-
thing for certain about the author
or authors of either. Tradition
attributes RT. to fkkaViyana, and
Simatantra to Audavraji.
Nor can v. 0 say anything about the
author of tho commentary on KT.
as to who ho was or whon and
whoro ho lh od. Tho quotations from
gathls (100 38) and tho quotation
from Nafeulamukha, which could
hnvo given somo cluo about his
da to, are, inipito of my best efforts,
yet untracod. A portion of a eopi«
ous commentary on this gloss was
secured from Adyar Library and
is givon in tho following pages.
But as it is incomploto and does
not comment either on tho be-
ginning or tho end of our treatise,
it is of no practical value to settle
anything abont the authorship
elthor of RT. or of tho commenta-
ry theroon. Further rosoarch is
roquired for settling this question
and I foe] confident to continue
my quost, till it boars the desired
fruit
Tho statement of B , that RT.
contains 280 sfltras, seems to be
duo to miscalculation, as I have
carofully compared A, B, C and
Bur for this, and found the same
number of etltras in all of them.
«TFrat5tnpi qrr ttt^ H^*nr«nr3T'TT'nT*p5rcnt ax t«it sufasfl'
=roi^r <Tiw*i<£ 'iw««i ^fer *rriifo^r5SJiT^raT?r strati htstr ^
ww4i-3twii<t sreim 3tfarci=# flu tt 3 %w^i^i«t $sr »nifit % ^tw
sreTfJi I =^ 1^131% wjiwimiwj sn^rtw 'frfs's^: I ici^ feudal
iftira; a^s^r^ fra«n *nrfrr am M^fwrd 1 to sTr^rnmag; 1
1 Op. Dbr. III. 23, 24; Agnisvamia 5ft sjif. *am\ TRcfffit IjRM^
on LSS. VII. 10. 16. The avyayl- jfixtftf' p VB 7 . 2 ,
bhava compound requires short i. Cp _ Siiy ana on it .—
2 The quotation is not found in Arbr.
and Concordance. For the practice
of quoting from memory cp. M. ^
Muller, Preface to I vol. of the 1st. Wilt «fftT fWT SflU l"
od. of rv. p. xxvi. 5 sretpp- ^ss-^m reft Dr. xx. 4;
3 The Ms. hasft *mT%». * L&3. VII. 9. 6. The printed text
i I ^PW 1R5T 5l]I^ fhif has f%»
i(a)^ircfa -^^ki srararcraTf^r 4 °^nR^r%° L&s. vn. 10. 23.
grR ^ %*2cfT Dr. XXI. 2. 8; L^S. 5 The MS. has 1;<HIM^r«>
VII. 11. 1. The Ms. has <TT^. 8 ST^T^r W 5% VII.
(b) WR^: D r . XXI. 10. 24. Dr. XXI. 2. 4 has 1
2. 9: L&S. VII. 11. 2. 7 PVB. 7; 1. 2.
2 ^^^^TT%% VTR^l: Dr. XXI. 8 Dr. XXI. 2. 5-7; wanting in LSS.
2. 2;LSS. VII. 10.22^113? T^FR:) 9 So the MS. I suspect fecW4<»
3 PVB. 7. 1. 2. > 10 Wanting in the MS,
siror 5f syi^j; nj^ i» 4M4d^ftid *tr: i <rf^ »rm^j ■ft*
ttw«ij<i<w?<U'dt 5js^?r ?rm%^tffrmrei <rc afirsR: i Hers
Hmsnri^ *tfod*t i <r«Tsr fkurr *r% «idgi< ! i
1 l&S. 7. 10. 22. Dr. XXI. 3. 3.
2 Cp. Sayana :—
cFir=tl<lW(T«7'' n misprlnt)'0hn-
Wwifr^&>TR5n:!I: (printod tent
difloronce botween this and ths
quotation.
3 Cp. tho quotation in llio beginning,
4 www i^r srmi?: Lgs. vir.
10. 19; on. Dr. XXI. 1, (Inst portion)
corrupt) 5fit I WHlWi: I OTPlf B 3JOTgt%fcI I,SS. VII 10. 10.
.%<i imii^Pt^wrbd^mm- o lSs. vir. 10. 17.
sfAwil>iirftBT& I Note Hie great
7 PVB. VII. I 3.
w w i z& ^resrar ot* %^rr ft^rc s^nl^rtcT \?r^wiw^ir%
II n II s^pf II ? II
n^ii^n%iuti
II II 5TI^TT^T II 3 II
1 LSS. 7. 10. 21. Dr. XXI. 2. 1. 4 sn^T: * ^ ^ 3
2 3;4 ^rerrcr §?r^ fw^r fl^rt ^«m. l&s. 7. 11. 12. Dr. xxi. 2,
X ^ L&S. 7. 11. 3. (last portion).
v Dr - xxi. 2. 10. 5 - ffo'ffcw: 7. 11. 13. «n
3 i Wrnqt 5ir%^r jr^t ^t^t q^r- ^% 7. 11. 14.
fafa LgS. 7. 1 1. 4; Dr. XXI. 6 Op. ET. 51-61
2. 11.
srrfrra tpr^TTOf mrr I wuhK'W siw^i^n^ii^^WKa (wRd)
iwh^h icjiiw&Kia, wRd snT *«4<.itt^}jniTi la^iriH'^'iwi'fl^i'ij
T T^ft^Txf Hr^JSi! -^T «W •Wild! II
jtot: ifcsq^r <r&3 gTsr Wrai'di-n" n
tlMId^ WJT^rf^reRTpn:: !WI ST?T <T3^: tiR.ti<-M*<J§<)^lT( 15
iraT! Jll^d 1 d«SM ^Tsf •wRdl'diJ^ II
miVilil I «M^Rt<4'il ^ •wRdfald 4<J<.l»d<«R-d
s^SjW'tl sffcr: *tKd! ^grt 1 II
1 1 has IMVIIWdf^BWanci jJtfiJT: 3 has !TW: jp-M
WfetBTC: I Cp. &3. p. 422. WltHH. I Cp. SS. p. 422.
2 runs 1 l^Kra ^B: ?T tpr *q- 4 Not found in NS.
teni. II Cp. 3S. p, 422.
s^^eto^t: i mxkw ^jer sera* i ^^4»un%%.* ^cr i
wtwt^ i ^?tt4^ ^ros te r i ^^^^ ^rr^^r? ^tpc ot - ?TFRr
1 Op. M 11. gs. 1. 397. The Ms. has W$TRT ^fr: I
2 N& 6. gS. 423. The ms. has;— SS. p. 423.
^^#T3Tf f% **Tpt^R; || 5 The MS. has ^r%S&Tl%£f°
3 The Ms. has ?K instead of ^R. 6 NS\ 3. 6S. p, 395. The Ms. T^cR-
4 NS. 7 runs. ^ff^T ^CtS^.
II II II 8 II
sncr i wmi^w nfeiRaftrygtitSd i 3*ft*r*n% snui^iticyajV
£iur-u tstM Eratfcft ^rr i frer ^jR?t sfiir m sr?^ trow
^ra^ '--ti'i'd ^ vre^frpro: i d^i^od i i% §rerr srifo ^nsfa 1 fr
( t. m ) 1 Rnr w tf tr ( ^bx ) Htm i fia 1 ^
iT^fcr 1 d^Rdfarfth 11 yvfiy** 11 « 11
srg tfi^t ttr ncT^ Prrnr trr ^ Ra 1% y n 1 ii 1 i{\ ( \ . \y
Hii^mthi<i^<ntiTitmF> 57H4<^Ri. v^RtuJl^wij^ , <n^r
11 w iisfhi^ii a 11
5T%ii?r^ifiri sfw»jiuk<j< **i$d 5flri3^rsT% sn (M) i«tk-
ETfttud. t«>) 1 wifSiwr (K. «5c ) 1 zfa i£mn 0*. ««) 1 m'nnc
(t 1 S^t (Vv*) 1 wnnfe (*.U0 snaafft 1 sragvnft.HJOi
jjst (t.i?) 1 £rir yiwd fas (t^o^) 1 iris (t.?ac) 1 mr
5 nftr*r.(U : 0i ih£i) (?.yv«) 1 (^) WrfJr »ir?% (?.x<>i<) i srY
*nfe 53^\%tr?f? (t.U^) 1 wrwunftr ( i s.°* ) snjtftffr
jtts =fi*t *n fei^ %f% 1 3«n ^ sTi^ srsra- fsrTw sir Jfi^gwi^-
.-3a 3^*J 3q a 3^*? 3 a _ _
H 11 #%rrg[ii $ ii
3 1 3 3efi
1<T ^
c 3 3 3 Sff-X
9 1 3 1 3^ 3 ■* * 3^3 3^ ^
9 1 3<p 1x ,9 3x a 3cfJ 1r
i tW cctt^^^t t*t^p-( far g stft )-T*kr c^rr ^ ^
^ w) i | ^nf^r (H) ^tn ^^ i Prefer
wr gp nuicma ^M^ma i 'STTtq,? root toi:- snrrg KFT
4Mi*K« ^4' i Jiitj, h<.cMiuwim • ?rfcr: i * sfWyMiftfd IS)
«I<<I<I1WMI< II *)<?l'll^ II ^ II
ii y*s ii ^{ i ^n^Ri II V9 II
uitwft r i w vr-i-v; (1.1*1) i sro snr-srar
fe^r i rere=tfreri% ^M, - *W Jrfhrft^r 'dip*. C-
sr*i oifr^tj (mu), *gks wra; (MsO.frss^raisrr.H.H )
II H= II ?f^#' II s ||
rf?r i srasftternH - j< i T»iidMKHi< i aw i
'H^.SWS' ( V if «■ ) i sren^-Ji* ^ rWhc (?. 1U) i V
wRdt II ani^rn II
II VS. II %fttfpmr II £ II
^hu I OT^at wrt airBw i *s%*a n^fa^n. : i ^rfer
^prr^ ^fn^T^ij rnitswrq'^: n ^tiRwrar n s. n
1 Cp. BT. Bt^iH 58.
U 1} II ?* II
U ^5^%^ SPOT. ^15^* 11
II 5? II II ? II
S ^ l^td I ^ir^TcT^T ( I) I (t ^)5Tgcft^» SHMIdf
\s\s) i 5tt^stt srerar T^rntr i ^Ricw, sttsttctt fjsfi^r ^ik^r
TTOT?^T^Tr^ ^GtU 44^1x1^%: I W r3T Sf^rcfT^TT% Sl^f^
W<H, I dWIH d '^^fdfaidiyiUI'dUKfawrfidl*4t-
iq^tTR 3<{iy ?TTc^ Hfcfll tjirldnl^JH. 11
qtfkwft d *) <l'rf t .S?PSt^FTO T?fS! II
r tfl^ii HlHl^t o^ril^W g II
vJ^lrl^Rddlt^ sra^t Pr^cT: ^TO I
<ra g *3ftd!<i,<p3?ra! nan: ^mrs n
<wRdU«r -i^ittsj u-dym \%<i\mi: i
H+WWH: ?5TK: WJJUly^W^H II
^rj gr^rr^fer <rWr fa § «. spy i En<rc: sA^mr-
1 Not found in fiS.
^ -s?rpzt: ^kst: ^r^r ^mon^n^ H
^TRT! I ^cf ^ ^ 5^ Ur?&n^R[re: ^ftxi: %mr: 5R^: 5r%*TOTSRT
%frf Staler ^Rd Y^Tt ^ I
^ra^rrccrsj srg^rT f^r ^erc; i
1 The MS. is broken.
4.md<M'<udi'jwRd^idR{hn^'?i fiffim: I iwi^rar^ >kt-
H'hl4l l dlt'4W!Xdl4-U^< : H^<45lH<Hl i —
OTtfll wRdcll'ilf'dJim'W W^lcTw wRdl^Mli?l'<»^«»JW[«l'»it^l^ I
3<n ^ ^KMId. TO ?irfi<T: ^ Rd^a.^ : snftrftrem; TO=jf
II #1 wlq.ll
1 Cp. BT, 61.
2 Cp. Pacini VIII. 4. 66.
3 Cp. PSpini 1. 2. 39.
4 Cp. RT. 63.
8 So tho MS. May ho faUT#=T
TO t^TT ^TCT?5 ^wffrSST HHWiM I
to: it g^H ^jMigiqi&ft to! I
araiNfcftrPrereroirci
snfcr ^iVt *tti ts#t^ i
3tct ft irrercn h«tts stemsmreTf^; I
tG^iM feM wwdi ii
# |tf ^ II
Wlft^ g^ranr ll
^R*n%: J??iwfw ll
wwi TfiGtoMts to^ II
isiRyw fern fnsTOTHT^ ifcnfiT i
tt?w^(ifa*MwifcMi+<H w^w
HWm lf%T !^t%T II
g^fero^ ^3:^3 'jTlfc: 11
3jj»ir«H$*"d TP* II
%rorf^g w ft ^rit^nf fsSs fto ^ 11
g^iR^f JFrrc% ^rrcs ytwflwuiis 11
*qg^ trsg% tfa gm^n *pftfcrrs II
SWT ^ 3^" ^ <TS% ^ OTT I
W3% w ^^rpw II
wn 5 #wwf II
nmrcrc ^f^pr^rot W II
^R^r^Tfm fs^ft^s II
yqii+wwRwutftjw^i h
^ar ntspr f^rejjrTwft: ii
t$«l«Wkft<l IHJMWnldllU II
yimmt tot srcr tjt*iwf<n+iw I
2£T KnI ,; ^K i MrtlWHIdl*ld|: II
wfH Mii^nS it^J Md^+H. I
to: 5T%th%"^pt "ifctftilfcra. I
srr sTOT^ft g ■q^rrc: "TfaftfTOT.* I
srnri^TB^ H^ii
STTStT •TTO' MlSM«HRlWKudk>J<<l II
SHR^R^t 'forrsft mfr tot i
yRrmtT 3 fr srs ^ t^cr^ 1 1
^Ki^toj #nr^Fg^ 1 1
I^T^ R^rftftr 5% I
re<pr ft ^rw^^sn: II
^H^^RTOw^r^f^a^ i
^frrcr ^fq^r ^rir# sfrf&r: II
WRfp srffft ^ro^r l
tort frm: n
JpT^H'n^nftra =q II
3PT vltaigtkft -Mtm^K m^+n i
terror wwM fafr^dn i
Ssl+i^ll ftft; ||
m TSrfsPTOrt g 5TWtT II
3vt^*?fir RT^rcrr hwRwN i
wtj&Gj it wmrf snww g i
?g^f^ qte^ mfT mwii wfl&iv* it
#&rcms3*pn iji^ii^TJ II
OT^fr srafi^FS %^rww f*in II
w% % f^c wnrcsft fl[#r% 1 1
•NfaHIKN^STCII 9*1% II
Open Library
